Only this pageAll pages
Powered by GitBook
Couldn't generate the PDF for 163 pages, generation stopped at 100.
Extend with 50 more pages.
1 of 100

English (US)

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Introduction

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Navigation

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Basics

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Notation

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Idiomatic notation

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Alternative notation

MuseScore Studio Handbook

Learn everything you need to know about using the world’s most popular music notation program, MuseScore Studio, which is available for free for Windows, macOS, and Linux-based operating systems.

Get the latest version of MuseScore Studio

Getting started

Create your first scoreEntering notes and restsPlayback controls

License

MuseScore Studio Handbook © MuseScore Limited and contributors (CC BY-SA 4.0)

Except where otherwise noted, all text and images in the Handbook are copyright MuseScore Limited and contributors, and licensed CC BY-SA 4.0. Linked or embedded content is subject to its own licensing terms.

Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License

About the handbook

MuseScore versions covered

This handbook is valid for MuseScore version 4.0 and above.

If you're using a different version of the program, please consult the appropriate handbook for your version:

Download and installation

To download MuseScore Studio for free (no account or subscription required), please follow the instructions for your specific operating system below.

Windows

  1. Go to

MuseScore 2 Handbook

  • MuseScore 1 Handbook

  • Exploring the handbook

    Browsing chapters

    Use the chapter links on the main page to explore content in each chapter of the handbook.

    There is also a single-page view of the entire handbook, which can be used with your browser's find-in-page facility (shortcut: Ctrl+F, or Cmd+F on macOS).

    Searching the handbook

    To search the handbook, use the dedicated search field in the top right of each handbook page.

    If you're not sure what to search for, try browsing the Glossary. It has pictures to help you to find things that you are unable to name.

    You can also try a web search using this special syntax to only include results from MuseScore.org:

    This works with most search engines. For example, perform a Google search for "site:musescore.org tempo markings".

    If you still can't find the information you need, please ask for help in the Support Forum.

    Reading in a different language

    The handbook is translated into several languages, although translations are not always up-to-date with the English version. Pages are translated individually, so not every page is available in every language.

    To read the handbook in a different language, use the languages dropdown displayed in the top right of each handbook page, directly below the Search field. If a particular language isn't available in the dropdown this means the page hasn't been translated into that language yet.

    In case of doubt, please consult the English version of the handbook, or ask for help in one of the forums. Use the Support and bug reports forum if posting in English, otherwise use the appropriate forum for your language.

    Downloading the handbook

    To save a copy of the handbook to your computer for offline viewing:

    1. Visit the single-page view of the entire handbook.

    2. Open your browser's Print facility (shortcut: Ctrl+P, or Cmd+P on macOS).

    3. Choose the option labelled Print to PDF, Save to PDF, or similar.

      • Make sure you are saving a file rather than printing a physical copy.

    If you require a physical copy, it's best to follow the above steps to create a PDF, then check the PDF is formatted correctly before you proceed to print it with a real printer. The handbook is quite long, so please don't print a physical copy unless you really need to.

    Contributing to the handbook

    The handbook is maintained and translated by the MuseScore community. If you'd like to help write content, please read Editing the handbook.

    If you want to translate pages, please read How to translate the handbook.

    MuseScore 3 Handbook
    Click the button marked Free Download

    [This section needs completing]

    macOS

    1. Go to musescore.org

    2. Click the button marked Free Download

    An application called MuseHub will be installed in your default download directory (usually the Downloads folder). This application makes it easy to install MuseScore Studio, as well as a range of sound libraries and effects plugins that can greatly enhance your music writing experience.

    To install and open MuseHub:

    1. Open the Finder and go to the Downloads folder

    2. Double-click the application Muse_Hub.dmg

    3. In the dialog that appears, drag the MuseHub application icon into your Applications folder

    4. Double-click the Applications folder icon to look inside the folder

    5. Double-click the MuseHub application to open it

    During this process, you may need to grant MuseHub various permissions and access to folders. These permissions are required to ensure MuseHub installs correctly.

    Now that you have MuseHub open in front of you, it's time to install MuseScore Studio:

    1. Click on the Apps tab in the left panel

    2. Locate MuseScore Studio and click the Free button beneath it to start the download and installation process

    3. Once the app has been downloaded, click the Open button beneath the MuseScore Studio icon.

    Now get writing some music!

    Linux

    Also see Troubleshooting

    AppImage

    Install

    The easiest way to install the program is by using an AppImage:

    1. Go to the Download→Software page at musescore.org

    2. Under Linux→AppImage (recommended), click on the Download (64 bit) link

    3. When the download is complete, right-click on the AppImage and select Properties

    4. Switch to the Permissions tab

    5. The next step varies depending on your file manager:

      • Nautilus-based (Nemo, Files, Caja) : Check the “Allow executing file as program” box.

      • Dolphin: Check the "Is executable" box.

      • Thunar: Check the “Allow this file to run as a program” box.

    6. Exit the dialog.

    7. Right-click inside the directory in which the AppImage is installed and select Open in Terminal

    8. In the Terminal type, ./[file name] install (the dot and slash at the beginning are important!)

    Steps 7 and 8 ensure that a MuseScore entry appears in the system’s menu and is linked to the new location of the AppImage (/home/[user name]/.local/bin). The correct file associations are also automatically made.

    Note: Instead of steps 7 and 8 (above) you can, of course, install using the absolute file path instead. That is:

    1. Open the Terminal

    2. Type [file path] install

    Tip: if you apply copy to the AppImage and press Ctrl+Shift+V in the terminal this will enter the absolute file path of the file that has just been “copied”.

    Uninstall

    No formal uninstall procedure is needed to remove the installed AppImage. Just delete menu entries and any shortcuts manually, then delete the App itself, and its links (which will be in ~/.local/bin).

    musescore.org

    Editing the handbook

    Guidelines for writing articles

    So you'd like to contribute to the MuseScore 4 handbook – great! We're so happy you're here.

    This page contains brief guidelines to get you started with writing articles. Please read this page carefully before editing anything in our handbook. This information is intended to help, but if you're in doubt about anything or have any questions, please join the discussion on the Documentation forum.

    Structure - General principles

    Each page should explain a single topic more or less completely. If a page feels like it is getting too long, try splitting it into separate pages.

    Not every page is identical, but keeping the following in mind can help you structure your page content in a way that's easy to understand for the reader:

    Start with an overview

    Starting your page with an overview can help introduce a topic before launching into details. Overviews don't usually need a section heading.

    Establish a hierarchy

    Think about what most users will be trying to achieve, and why they might be coming to the handbook to look for information. Put solutions for the most common tasks towards the top of the page; less commonly needed information can go towards the bottom.

    Group information logically

    Related concepts should be discussed together. This may sometimes require less-commonly-used features to be discussed alongside more-commonly used ones, but that's okay.

    Focus on user tasks, not just UI components

    For instance, a section about "Creating custom key signatures" is better than a section called "Using the master palette".

    Headings

    Headings are used to give a structure and hierarchy to the information on the page.

    The first section heading you enter will always be a Heading 1. Please also don’t skip heading levels (for example, by adding a Heading 3 after a Heading 1).

    Heading level
    Usage

    Try to start your headings with a verb, e.g. "Adding time signatures", rather than "Time signatures".

    Content

    The MuseScore handbook broadly contains two main types of information: descriptive material, and goal-oriented instructions.

    Descriptive material

    This is used to explain different areas of the program. For example:

    A Palette is a folder containing musical symbols which can be applied to the score. MuseScore's default palettes contain collections of related symbols, but you can customize palettes to display almost any kind of symbol, line or text.

    Descriptive material tends to be longer and more “fleshed out” than goal-oriented instructions, but we still ask that you use wherever you can.

    Goal-oriented instructions

    These explain how to perform a specific task. The instructions should be as short and direct as possible, generally taking the form of a numbered list. For example,

    To create a new palette:

    1. Open the Palettes tab

    2. Click Add palettes

    3. Click Create custom palette

    Notice that we use bold text for named components of the user interface, including menus. Keyboard shortcuts, such as Ctrl+S, are rendered with GitBook's 'Keyboard' style.

    When writing goal-oriented instructions, please:

    • Use only numbered lists (no dot points)

    • Begin each numbered instruction with a verb

    • Write only one task/direction per numbered item

    For example, instead of writing this:

    1. Open the Palettes tab and click Add palettes

    Please write this:

    1. Open the Palettes tab

    2. Click Add palettes

    Please be sure to include keyboard options for goal-oriented instructions, where such options exist. This is especially important for improving the program's accessibility.

    Use of non-written media

    The use of non-written media is encouraged as a supplement to written descriptions. This includes:

    • Animated GIFs

    • Screenshots of relevant parts of the user interface

    Creating animated GIFs

    Animated GIFs offer many advantages over screenshots and videos in that they expose in the shortest amount of time the sequence of actions required to achieve a particular task. There are lots of tools available for creating GIFs, however we recommend the following workflow to ensure crisp and clear image quality while maintaining as small as possible file size (ideally <2MB per GIF).

    • Use only the MuseScore Studio 4 interface, and set its appearance to dark mode with blue highlights (to achieve consistency across the entire handbook)

    • Plan and rehearse the mouse clicks and keyboard shortcuts you will use, aiming to demonstrate the required steps in as short as possible time (ideally <10s)

    • Use a free tool like to record the contents of your screen

    • Use a free tool like to record keystrokes (where required)

    Upgrading from earlier versions

    If you’re coming to MuseScore Studio 4 from MuseScore 3 or earlier, you’ll notice changes not only to the user interface, but also to many familiar features and ways of doing things. These changes have been designed to improve the user experience while providing much greater functionality. Here's a very quick overview of some of the major changes.

    User interface

    MuseScore Studio 4 comes with a sleek new interface. Nearly every part of the application has been completely redesigned to be cleaner and easier to read. You can choose between light, dark and high contrast themes, as well as pick your preferred accent color. Changes to the appearance of the app can be made in Preferences.

    Instruments and parts

    The new allows you to hide, rearrange and customize your instruments without having to leave the score view.

    The panel integrates tightly with the process of creating , making it much easier to produce custom parts with any combination of available instruments. There’s now also a convenient button in the toolbar that allows you to quickly open any available part.

    Inspector

    The Inspector from earlier versions of MuseScore is now known as the . Every option in this panel has been re-organized and the entire experience has been streamlined. By default, the Properties panel displays multiple useful options, like the ability to show or hide empty staves and various other types of score markings. Whereas previously you needed to select single element types before you could make changes to them, MuseScore Studio 4 always displays relevant settings, regardless of how many different elements you have selected.

    New playback and VSTi support

    Playback improvements are the single largest change to MuseScore Studio 4. Apart from new sample libraries (Muse Sounds, available as a separate download), there’s now support for VSTi plugins, which can be applied to instruments using the new panel. The mixer also lets you easily switch between VSTi, and the Muse Sounds libraries, while also supporting VST effects. Sounds will now always be saved on a per-score basis, so there is no longer any need for the Synthesizer panel found in MuseScore 3 (this has been removed in MuseScore Studio 4). If you previously used SFZ files for playback in MuseScore 3, we now recommend that you use a free VST sampler, like or , both of which support SFZ playback.

    Engraving improvements

    MuseScore Studio 4 features many engraving improvements, some of which will have an effect on the appearance and layout of scores created in earlier versions. The most significant changes affect the placement of beams, slurs and ties, horizontal spacing, and page layout. There are far too many changes to list here, so those interested in learning more about the particularities may wish to read (link forthcoming) that explains and illustrates everything in detail.

    An unavoidable consequence of having made such significant engraving improvements is that it will not be possible to open a score in MuseScore Studio 4 from an earlier version of MuseScore and have it look identical.

    Cloud storage

    When you save a document for the first time, you’ll now be asked whether you want to save your file locally to your computer, or to the cloud. This new option is part of an exciting expansion we are making to services on musescore.com. Learn more about this in and .

    Other changes

    As you use the program, you’ll find lots of other small but significant changes that have been designed to make the process of composing and notating music just that bit easier. These include:

    • An expanded note input toolbar, with one-click access to frequently used elements like tuplets and articulation marks. There’s also a convenient “+” menu where you can quickly add everything from notes and intervals, to frames and text elements.

    • Easy-access features in the that let you quickly add and remove measures, and show and hide empty staves

    • A beautiful new

    • Improvements to the dialog

    More changes are listed in , including some keyboard shortcuts that are different or entirely new.

    site:musescore.org your topic here
    PCManFM: Change the “Execute” option in the drop down list to “Anyone”.
    Name your new palette and click Create

    Only show the amount of UI required demonstrate a particular task

    Heading 1

    Use for the start of every section.

    Heading 2

    Use for the start of every sub-section, and to introduce single-step instructions (i.e. where a list is not necessary).

    Heading 3

    Use sparingly if additional sub-sections are required.

    simple, plain language
    gifcap
    KeyCastr

    A streamlined experience for setting the language of the app

  • A new Learn center for instructional videos on how to get the most from the app

  • Layout panel
    parts
    Properties panel
    mixer
    SoundFonts
    Sfizz
    Sforzando
    this dedicated document
    Open/Save/Export/Print
    Share Scores Online
    Properties panel
    mixer
    time signature properties
    Upgrading from MuseScore 3.x
    Search in the handbook
    Handbook languages dropdown

    Guitar

    Instruments, staves, and systems

    Navigating your score

    Scrolling

    Mouse wheel

    • Use the scroll wheel to move the view up and down.

    • Use Shift plus the scroll wheel to move the view left and right.

    • Use Ctrl plus the scroll wheel to zoom in and out.

    Scrollbars

    Scrollbars appear at the right-hand and bottom edges of the score view. Click and drag them to quickly move the score view up and down, or left and right. Scrollbars are usually hidden from view, but can be revealed by hovering over the edge of the score view with your mouse.

    Keyboard

    You can also scroll the score using the PgUp, PgDn, Home, and End keys on your keyboard. If your keyboard lacks dedicated keys for these functions, most systems will also allow you to access these functions by holding Fn or a similar key, then pressing Up, Down, Left, or Right respectively.

    By themselves, PgUp and PgDn scroll one screenful at a time. This may be less than an actual page of your score. If you hold Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) while pressing PgUp or PgDn, it moves a full page at a time.

    Element navigation

    When a single element is selected in your score, it acts as a cursor. You can change the selection—and thus move the cursor—using common keyboard shortcuts.

    The Left and Right keys will move horizontally through your score one chord or rest at a time. If you hold Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) while pressing Left or Right, you can navigate a full measure at a time.

    To move the cursor vertically through the various notes, voices, and staves in your score, use the shortcuts Alt+Up and Alt+Down (Mac: Option+Up and Option+Down).

    You can also use the shortcuts Alt+Left and Alt+Right (Mac: Option+Left and Option+Right) to select elements other than notes or rests. These commands allow you select almost any elements—including articulations, barlines, hairpins, and more—using the keyboard alone.

    In addition, Ctrl+Home (Mac: Cmd+Home) will select the first element in your score, and Ctrl+End (Mac: Cmd+End) will select the last element. Again, for keyboards that lack dedicated Home and End keys, most systems provide the alternative of Fn+Left and Fn+Right respectively.

    See to learn more.

    Navigator

    The Navigator is a panel that displays thumbnails of score pages. To view or hide the Navigator, click View → Navigator.

    The blue bounding box represents the area of the score currently in focus in the score view. Click on the box and drag it to move around your score.

    Timeline

    A navigation aid that shows instruments and score structure. For details, see .

    Views

    You can switch between different views of the score using the pop-up in the right-hand side of the status bar.

    Page view

    The score is shown as it will appear when printed or exported as a PDF or image file: that is, page by page, with margins. MuseScore applies system (line) and page breaks automatically, according to the settings made in Page settings and Style. In addition, you can apply your own system (line), page or section breaks.

    Continuous view (horizontal)

    The score is shown as one unbroken system. Even if the starting point is not in view, measure numbers, instrument names, clefs, time and key signatures will always be displayed on the left of the window.

    Continuous view (vertical)

    The score is shown as a single page with a header but no margins, and with an infinite page height. System (line) breaks are added automatically, according to the settings made in Page settings and Style. In addition, you can apply your own system (line) or section breaks.

    Zoom

    There are several ways to zoom the score in or out:

    Zoom in

    Ctrl++ (Mac: Cmd++) or scroll up with the mouse scroll wheel while holding Ctrl (Mac: Cmd).

    Zoom out

    Ctrl+- (Mac: Cmd+-) or scroll down with the mouse scroll wheel while holding Ctrl (Mac: Cmd).

    Status bar zoom controls

    To zoom in and out of your score from the Status bar controls:

    • Click on the magnifying glass icons in the right-hand area of the status bar

    • Click the number field to the right of these icons, then type a custom zoom level

    • Choose from one of the preset zoom levels in the pop-up list on the extreme right

    Restoring 100% zoom

    This restores the zoom to the default (100%) level.

    Ctrl+0 (Mac: Cmd+0)

    Find/Go to

    The Find/Go to panel allows you to speedily navigate to a specific measure, rehearsal mark or page number in the score.

    To show the panel:

    • Go to Edit → Find, or

    • Press Ctrl+F (Mac: Cmd+F).

    To hide the panel:

    • Click the X (close) button on the left side of the panel, or

    • Press Esc while the panel has focus.

    Navigating to a numbered measure

    Enter the measure number (counting every measure, starting with 1, irrespective of pickup measures, section breaks or manual changes to measure number offsets).

    Navigating to a numbered page

    Enter the page number using the format pXX (where XX is the page number).

    Navigating to a numerical rehearsal mark

    Enter the number using the format rXX (where XX is the number of the rehearsal mark).

    Navigating to an alphabetic rehearsal mark

    Enter the name of the rehearsal mark (the search is not case sensitive).

    Pro tip! It is best to avoid naming rehearsal marks with the single letters “R", “r", “P”, “p", or one of these letters with an integer (e.g. “R1” or “p3”), as this can confuse the search algorithm.

    Timeline

    Overview

    Timeline is a navigation aid that displays at the bottom of the program window, giving you an overview of the instruments and main structural elements measure-by-measure. You can easily move about the score by clicking on a measure or a structural element.

    There are four parts to the timeline:

    Meta labels

    This is found in the top left corner of the timeline. These are the names of the meta rows.

    Instrument labels

    This is found in the bottom left corner of the timeline. These are the names of the rows in the main grid.

    Meta rows

    This is found in the top right corner of the timeline. These hold the meta values of the score.

    Main grid

    This is found in the bottom right corner of the timeline. This holds multiple 'cells' (a specific measure and staff in the score represented as a square)

    Meta elements

    Meta elements are those found in the score that are not notes, but are still important to the score—such as key signature, time signature, tempo, rehearsal marks, bar lines, and jumps and markers.

    Basic interactions

    Selecting a measure

    To select a measure in the timeline, press the mouse button on the cell. A blue box will appear around the selected cell and the respective measure in the score will be selected. The score view will place the selected measure in view.

    Selecting multiple measures

    Drag selection

    Holding Shift and holding the left mouse button and dragging the mouse over the main grid will create a selection box. Upon releasing the mouse button, all the cells underneath the selection box will be selected, as well as all the measures in the score.

    Shift selection

    If a cell is already selected, holding Shift and selecting another cell in the timeline will stretch the selection to that new cell, similar to how the score does

    Ctrl selection

    If no cells are currently selected, holding Ctrl and selecting a cell will select the entire measure

    Clearing a selection

    To clear selection, holding Ctrl and clicking anywhere on the grid or the meta rows will clear any current selection.

    Meta values selection

    Selecting the meta values on the timeline will attempt to select the respective meta values in the score.

    Scrolling

    Standard scrolling

    Scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and instrument labels down or up respectively. The meta labels and rows do not move.

    Shift scrolling

    Holding Shift and scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and meta rows left or right respectively. The meta labels and instrument labels do not move.

    Alt scrolling

    Holding Alt and scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and meta rows left or right respectively, faster than Shift scrolling. The meta labels and instrument labels do not move.

    Dragging

    To drag the contents of the timeline, hold the left mouse button and move it around.

    Labels interaction

    Rearranging meta labels

    All meta labels besides the measures meta may be rearranged in any way. By moving the mouse cursor onto one of the meta labels, small up and down arrows will appear. Click the left mouse button on the up arrow to swap the meta label with the one above it. Click the left mouse button on the down arrow to swap the meta label with the one below it.

    Collapsing the meta labels

    In order to hide all the meta labels while keeping all the meta information on the timeline, click the left mouse button on the measures meta to collapse all the currently visible meta rows into one row, where the meta values are staggered in that row. Click the left mouse button again on the measures meta to expand the meta rows.

    Hiding instruments

    All instruments--hidden or not--will be displayed on the timeline. To start this interaction, the mouse cursor is moved over an instrument label. A small eye will appear on the right side of the label that is open if the instrument is visible on the score, and closed if the instrument is hidden. Click the left mouse button on the eye to toggle between the two options.

    Zooming

    To zoom in or out of the score, hold Ctrl and scroll the mouse wheel up or down respectively (Mac: Cmd + scroll).

    Octave lines

    Overview

    Octave (Ottava) lines are used to indicate that a section of music is to be played one or more octaves above or below written pitch; the line may be dotted or solid:

    8--------┐or 8va--------┐: Play one octave above written pitch. 8--------┘or 8va--------┘: Play one octave below written pitch.

    8va alta/bassa lines are particularly common in piano scores, though they are sometimes used in other instrumental music. 15ma alta (2 octaves above) and 15ma bassa (2 octaves below) are also occasionally used.

    MuseScore automatically adjusts playback of the score under the ottava to the correct pitch.

    Ottava lines may be found in the

    Default keyboard shortcuts
    Timeline
    Using scrollbars
    Using navigator
    Using different views
    Zooming
    Timeline
    Timeline collapsed
    Hidden instrument

    Respell pitches

    Manually changing the enharmonic spelling of notes

    To change the enharmonic spelling of a note, or notes, in both written and concert pitch views:

    1. Select a note, or group of notes

    2. Press J

    3. Continue pressing J to cycle through the enharmonic equivalents.

    To change the enharmonic spelling in the written pitch view, without affecting the concert pitch view, or vice versa:

    1. Select a note, or group of notes

    2. Press Ctrl+J (Mac: Cmd+J)

    3. Continue pressing the same combination of keys to cycle through the enharmonic equivalents.

    Note: If the pitches of selected notes are not all the same, the effect may be unpredictable.

    Automatically respelling all notes in a selection

    Respell pitches

    • From the menu, select Tool -> Respell Pitches.

    Rhythm, meter, and measures

    Ambitus

    An ambitus indicates the range of notes included within a staff. It is used to indicate the appropriate voice for a particular part. (See Ambitus on Wikipedia.)

    Adding an ambitus to your score

    To create an ambitus, use either of these methods:

    • Select the desired start clef and click on the ambitus symbol in either the Pitch or Lines palette

    • Drag the ambitus symbol from either the Pitch or Lines palette and drop it onto the desired start clef.

    Changing the range of an ambitus

    You can change the range of an ambitus via the Properties panel.

    To update manually, set the values for Top note and Bottom note as required.

    To do so automatically, click the Update to match the notes on the staff button.

    Ambitus properties

    These properties are also available in the Properties panel (under Show more):

    • Direction

    • Notehead type and Notehead duration

    • Line thickness

    Pitch

    Repeats

    Expressive markings

    Keyboard

    Accordion notation

    [work in progress, please add missing info]

    See Accordion notation and playback tutorial.

    • accordion symbols are literally just symbol from the Symbols, but there is a dedicated palette for them

    • we could consider eliminating this page

    • we could also consider adding one for harp

    Adding accordion symbols to your score

    Percussion

    Lines
    .

    Adding an octave line to your score

    See Adding a line to your score.

    To adjust the range and vertical position of the line, see Adjusting elements directly.

    Octave line properties

    Properties specific to the selected ottava(s) can be adjusted in the Ottava section of the Properties panel, namely:

    Style tab

    Type: Specifies whether the Ottava line is 8va, 8vb etc. Show number only: Hides any text (such as “va”). Show line: Makes the line visible / invisible. Text is unaffected. Allow diagonal: Allow line to slope if required.

    For other properties in this tab, see Line properties.

    Text tab

    This has a similar user interface to general lines (see Line properties), but uses special code to specify the ottava text.

    Octave line style

    Default properties for ottavas can be adjusted in Format→Style→Ottava.

    palette

    Style guide

    General

    Case

    All text is to be written in sentence case. This includes all paragraphs, headings, and page titles.

    GitBook renders some text in ALL CAPS, such as group (aka chapter) titles in the table of contents on the left of the screen. However, you should use sentence case when editing this text.

    Proper nouns and abbreviations should be capitalized according to the prevailing form used on the Wikipedia page of the topic in question.

    Import the MusicXML file. ✅ MusicXML is capitalized

    Customize the user interface (UI). ✅ UI is capitalized and user interface is not

    Available in braille and Modified Stave Notation. ✅ MSN is capitalized and braille is not

    Contractions of everyday speech should not be capitalized.

    A quarter note (aka crotchet) is a musical duration. ✅ aka is not capitalized

    UI labels

    When writing instructions for the user, text that appears in MuseScore's user interface should be copied verbatim, including any capitalization, and highlighted in bold without enclosing quotation marks.

    Press the Not now button. ✅ Not now is bold and capitalized like in the application

    Arrows in UI paths

    Type -> to describe the path through submenus or through the hierarchy of a dialog.

    GitBook will format -> as a single arrow character, though in editing mode it appears as separate characters. Since the text on either side will be styled in bold (as all text from the UI should be), keep the arrows bold too. Use a space on either side of each arrow.

    Choose File -> Save other -> Save a copy... ✅

    Uncheck Style -> Notes -> Shorten stems. ✅

    Bullet points

    Bullet points (aka unordered lists) are used for listed content that is not an ordered process.

    If the contents of a group of bullet points are not complete sentences, there's no need to use periods.

    • Dynamics

    • Accidentals

    • Articulations ✅ No periods

    When bullet points are complete sentences, use periods at the end of each sentence, even if there is only one.

    • This is a one-sentence bullet point, with a period at the end.

    • This is a bullet with two sentences. Periods are included after every sentence. ✅ Full sentences require periods

    It's a common pattern to have some bolded text at the beginning of a bullet followed by a colon. In this case, the colon should be bolded too and the first character after the colon should be capitalized.

    • Bullet: This is a good example. ✅ The colon is bold and 'This' is capitalized

    • Bullet: this is a bad example. ❌ The colon is not bold and 'this' is not capitalized

    Numbered lists

    Numbered lists (aka ordered lists) are used for listed content that must be done in sequence. For explanations of how to execute a task, try to keep it to one sentence per number, and use periods at the end of each one.

    1. Think of what to say.

    2. Express each step a short sentence with a period at the end.

    3. Finish the list. ✅

    Hyperlinks

    Where appropriate, hyperlinks may be added to key words or phrases in ordinary text, which should be written to make sense without the link. In general, the full URL should not be displayed.

    Watch the . ✅ Text makes sense without the link

    Watch the tutorial . ❌ Text wouldn't make sense if the link was removed

    Watch it at . ❌ Don't show the URL

    Plain domain names should be captalized like the brand name. The top-level domain (TLD, e.g. .com, .org, .co.uk, etc.) should be omitted unless there's a good reason to include it.

    Find us on and . ✅ Omit .com TLDs for these popular sites

    Listen on . ✅ TLD is part of the website's branding

    Visit . ✅ TLD is necessary to distinguish from MuseScore.com

    Download the installer from . ✅ Referring specifically to the website

    Get the sounds in . ✅ Referring to the app (but linking to the website)

    Keyboard shortcuts

    Keyboard shortcuts should be formatted as follows:

    Press Shift+1—9. ✅ en-dash indicates range

    Press Ctrl+Shift++/- (Mac: Cmd+Shift++/-). ✅ slash indicates alternatives

    Modifiers should be written in this form and in this order for each platform:

    Windows/Linux: Win+Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Fn+... ✅

    Mac: Ctrl+Cmd+Option+Shift+Fn +... ✅

    In Linux-specific instructions, the Win key should be written as Super.

    Keys that type printable characters should be represented by that character.

    . , ; ' [ ] / \ - = ` etc. ✅

    All non-printing keys should be referenced by their (possibly abbreviated) name rather than by a symbol. This includes the cursor keys.

    Space Backspace Del Ins Esc Return Up Down Left Right PgUp PgDn Home End Menu Caps Lock ✅

    Typed characters

    Typed sequences should usually be formatted as inline code, even if it's just a single character.

    To enter a double flat, type bb. ✅ Inline code (single element)

    Occasionally, it may be preferable to show the actual keys pressed, formatted as keyboard shortcuts rather than as inline code.

    To enter a double flat, type B B. ✅ Keyboard keys (space between each key)

    Structure

    Pages

    You're currently viewing the page, which is a subpage of .

    Page titles

    Page titles should be relatively short. Ideally the title should fit on one line in the Summary on the left of the screen, although this may not always be possible. Bear in mind that page titles may be significantly longer when translated to other languages besides English.

    Tips to keep page titles short:

    • Avoid saying "score" (e.g. "Selecting elements", not "Selecting elements in the score")

    • Avoid saying "MuseScore" (e.g. "Upgrading", not "Upgrading MuseScore Studio")

    Subpages

    When subpages are used, only one level of subpages may be used. Never create a subsubpage.

    Parent pages should have very short titles because its title appears in the URLs of all its subpages.

    In general, we prefer to use rather than subpages, to avoid nesting in the Summary.

    Groups

    Groups are like chapters. They are displayed in ALL CAPS in the table of contents on the left of the screen (e.g. 'INTRODUCTION' and 'NAVIGATION'). The current group name is also shown, hyperlinked, above each page title in the main content area.

    Group names should be written in sentence case – the ALL CAPS styling is handled by GitBook automatically.

    Groups should have very short names. This is because the group name appears in the URLs of all pages within the group.

    It is possible to edit the group slug to make it shorter than the actual group name. However, in general, this should not be done. Instead, the group name should be made as short as possible.

    Create your first score

    We’ll start by creating a new score from a template (Alternatively, you can learn about creating a score from scratch in Adding and removing instruments).

    To create a score from a template:

    1. Click New score in the Scores screen

    2. In the New score dialog that appears, browse templates by Category, or use the search bar to look up a template directly

    3. Click Next to enter additional score information (or skip this step and let MuseScore pre-fill your score with default information, which you can always change later)

    4. Click Done to create your new score

    Entering score information

    In the Additional score information screen, you can set:

    • The initial key signature (the default key signature contains no sharps or flats)

    • The initial time signature (the default time signature is 4/4)

    • The initial tempo (Click Tempo, then Show tempo marking on my score for this to appear)

    • A (anacrusis or upbeat measure), and its duration

    Entering notes

    The simplest way to enter notes in MuseScore is to:

    1. Hit N on your keyboard to enter the note entry mode

    2. Start typing note names (A, B, C, D, E, F, G)

    You’re now engraving in MuseScore! You’ll notice the blue note input highlight, which indicates that you are in note input mode. It shows you where in the measure your next note will be entered.

    You can specify the duration of each note you enter in the Note input toolbar. To change note duration:

    1. Ensure you are in note input mode (See above)

    2. Click on the desired note duration, or

    3. Use shortcut keys 1 through 7 to select different note values

    Learn more about this topic in .

    Adding items from the palettes

    The Palettes panel contains almost every notational object you might need to add detail to your score. The simplest way to add palette items to your notation is to:

    1. Select an existing object (or range of objects) in your score (e.g. a notehead, clef, measure, etc.)

    2. In the Palettes panel, open a palette by clicking the triangular arrow button

    3. Click once on a palette object

    Learn more about this topic in

    Making adjustments in Properties

    The Properties panel can be revealed by clicking on the Properties tab on the left side of the screen:

    (Users of MuseScore prior to version 4 will know this as the Inspector).

    The properties panel will show settings that are specific to the object being selected. These settings usually affect the visual appearance of the selected object. Most of the time, changes you make in Properties will apply only to the object you have selected (e.g. you’ll change the selected hairpin, and not every hairpin in your score).

    As you add details to your score, click on any object to see what settings are available.

    Learn more about this topic in .

    Inserting and deleting measures

    To insert a single measure:

    1. Click on a measure to select it

    2. In the Measure section of Properties, click Insert measures

    3. Click the + button

    This Measure section contains controls that allow you to insert multiple measures at once. Simply set the number of measures you wish to insert in the text field. You can also use the dropdown menu to change the point where new measures will be inserted.

    To delete a measure or group of measures:

    1. Select the measure(s) you wish to delete

    2. In the Measures popup, click the trash can icon

    More information on this topic can be found in .

    Saving your score

    To save your score locally to your computer's harddrive:

    1. Select File→Save

    2. In the dialog that appears, select folder and fill in the required info such as file name, click Save or OK

    To save your score to the cloud on musescore.com:

    1. Select File→Save to Cloud.

    2. You may be asked to sign in to your account on musescore.com.

    3. Fill in the Name of your score.

    4. Set a Visibility. Private means only you may see your score. Unlisted means anyone with the correct link may see your score. Public means anyone may see your score.

    You can find all your cloud scores by going to Home > Scores > My online scores (look for the files marked with a small blue cloud symbol). Read more about this in .

    Exporting your score

    Export allows you to create non-MuseScore files, such as PDF, MusicXML, MIDI, and .

    To export your score:

    1. Select the Publish tab

    2. Click Export

    3. Select the parts you wish to export

    4. Choose the file format for your exported file(s)

    You can also on .

    Mid-score instrument changes

    Overview

    When a musician is required to change from one instrument to another in the course of a piece, the instruction to switch is generally placed either after the music for the first instrument ends, or when the music for the new instrument begins. A return to the primary instrument is handled in the same manner.

    In MuseScore Studio, the instruction to change to a different instrument is handled by the Instrument change text element, which is found in the Text palette. This is a special type of item, quite distinct from other text types, as it also affects the playback of the instrument, and may affect aspects of the notation such as transposition.

    Adding an instrument change

    To add an instrument change:

    1. Click on a note or rest to select the position for the change

    2. Click on the Change instr. item in the Text palette

    3. Choose which instrument you wish to change to in the Select instrument dialog that appears

    4. Click OK.

    The instruction to change to the new instrument will appear above the selected insertion point in the score.

    Removing an instrument change

    To remove an instrument change:

    1. Single-click an Instrument change text element to select it

    2. Press Del or Backspace.

    Relabelling an instrument change

    To change the text of an instrument change:

    1. Double-click an Instrument change text element to start editing it

    2. Edit the text in whatever way you wish.

    Note that this does not affect which instrument is actually changed to. If you wish to alter which instrument the instruction changes to, you must delete the element and enter a new one.

    Instrument changes in the mixer

    Playback sounds for instrument changes are reflected in the mixer as separate channel strips stacked to the right of the primary instrument channel strip. These instruments are labelled in parentheses. You can change the assigned playback library, apply effects, adjust the volume, and mute, solo, and pan these channel strips just as you would any other instrument channel strip. For more information, see .

    Changing staff type

    Changing to a different instrument may necessitate the use of different key signatures, clefs, and even staff type. See for details.

    Cross-staff notation

    Creating cross-staff notation

    1. First of all, enter the notation on one staff only

    2. Select a note in the voice that you wish to move up or down to the other staff, e.g.

    3. Press Ctrl+Shift+Up/Down (Mac: Cmd+Shift+Up/Down), to move the voice up or down to the other staff. Alternatively, you can click on the cross-staff icon in the toolbar and choose the same options from the context menu.

    Note: Currently it is not possible to move individual notes of a chord from one stave to another; if you move one note, the whole chord will move. Therefore, if you want certain notes to remain on the original staff, they should be moved to a different voice. Also, be aware that notes which are moved to a different staff in this way still belong logically to the staff of origin - they are just drawn on a different staff. This is why no rest is shown on the staff where the notes have been moved from.

    See also

    Regroup rhythms

    Overview

    Standard music notation normally follows a set of conventions designed to facilitate the reading of rhythm. The basic idea is to group notes in ways that clarify which notes belong to which beat. Rules include:

    • sixteenth notes should be beamed in a way that clarifies each beat

    • eighth notes should be beamed in a way that clarifies each group of two beats

    • longer notes that start off the beat should be broken up with ties to clarify each beat or group of two beats

    A full discussion of this topic is beyond the scope of this Handbook, but for more information, see .

    Here is an example of a rhythm written incorrectly and then correctly:

    MuseScore can correct many of these cases automatically.

    Regrouping rhythms

    To regroup rhythms according to the common conventions of standard music notation:

    1. Select the passage you wish to regroup.

    2. From the main menu, select Tools→Regroup rhythms.

    The rhythm itself is not changed—only the notation of it.

    See also

    Accessibility

    Screen readers

    MuseScore Studio supports NVDA on Windows and VoiceOver on macOS. JAWS is not currently supported. Support for other screen readers varies.

    Speech on Windows

    If speech isn't working in MuseScore, try pressing

    Setting up your score

    Overview

    To create a new score, use one of the following options:

    • In the tab, select New score, or click New (bottom right)

    Staff type change

    Overview

    The 'type' of a staff refers to its properties: number of lines, distance between the lines, what kinds of noteheads appear on it, etc. To change the type of a staff throughout an entire score, see and . However, it is also possible to change the appearance of a staff starting at any measure of the score by applying a Staff type change element and then adjusting its properties in the panel. This can be used when changing between pitched and unpitched staves or for various experimental notation effects.

    Stems and flags

    Stem direction

    Default stem direction

    MuseScore aligns the stems of 1 notes according to the conventions of music theory. By contrast, voice 2 and voice 4 stems point downwards by default, while voice 3 stems point upwards

    Measure and multimeasure repeats

    A measure repeat symbol indicates that the previous measure is to be repeated. Two-measure and four-measure repeat symbols indicate the repetition of the previous two or four measures.

    Adding a measure or multimeasure repeat to your score

    To apply a measure repeat symbol, select a measure in the score and click on the measure repeat icon in the Repeats & jumps , or drag the symbol on to a measure.

    To apply a two-measure or four-measure repeat symbol, select the first blank measure following the section you want to be repeated, then click on the applicable measure repeat icon in the

    Tremolos and rolls

    Types of tremolos and rolls

    A Tremolo is the rapid repetition of one note or chord, or a rapid alternation between two notes or chords. The placement of tremolos is handled automatically by the program.

    Single-note tremolos

    Brackets

    Overview

    Brackets are used to visually group multiple adjacent staves together (usually instruments of the same family, e.g. woodwind or brass), and braces are used to group multiple staves of a single instrument (e.g. the grand staff of a piano) or adjacent instruments of the same or similar type.

    Brackets and braces are automatically added when you create a score via the , but you can easily add, remove or change them.

    Note that brackets and braces are drawn on all systems. You can add, remove or modify them on any system, but the changes will affect every system where they appear. They are added from the Brackets palette.

    Breaths and pauses

    Breaths and pause symbols may be found in the Breaths & pauses .

    These symbols also have an adjustable playback effect.

    Types of pauses

    Measure properties

    Opening and using the dialog

    The Measure properties dialog allows you to adjust various properties of an individual measure, such as visibility, duration, numbering and width ('stretch').

    To instead change all measures on the score, use the settings in Format -> Style... under the

    Other symbols

    The Symbols palette is a category within the and houses all symbols and text from all built-in music fonts.

    Unlike other categories in the , items in the Symbols palette are non-functional: they are for display purposes only and have no other effect on the score.

    You should find most symbols and text items you need for scoring in the —use of the Symbols palette should be reserved for specialist items not available in the small palettes, or on those occasions when you really do need a non-functional element.

    The Symbols palette

    Harp

    Overview

    Harps typically have seven strings per octave, with one string per pitch-class from C to B. Modern harps also have seven pedals, each of which has three positions: middle (natural), highest (flattened), and lowest (sharpened). Raising the pedal from middle position loosens the tension of one pitch-class of strings in every octave, lowering the notes by a half step, and lowering the pedal results in notes a half step higher. For example, moving the C pedal to the lowest position will make all C strings play C#.

    In notated music for pedal harps, diagrams or text markings in the score indicate when to change pedal positions to change playable notes.

    Other percussion notation

    Diddles

    Diddles can be added by using an eighth-note tremolo:

    Pedal lines

    tutorial video
    here
    https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=z4Ecaaqwg8U
    Facebook
    YouTube
    Audio.com
    MuseScore.org
    MuseHub.com
    MuseHub
    Style guide
    About the handbook
    groups
    . Voice 1 stems automatically flip upwards in the presence of voice 2 or 4 notes.

    Flipping stem direction

    1. Select either the notehead, stem or attached beam (if any)

    2. Use any of the following methods:

      • Press X

      • Click on the "Flip direction" icon in the Note input toolbar

      • Select a stem direction from the Stem tab in the Properties panel

    This action will flip any attached beam as well.

    Changing stem length

    1. Select the stem

    2. Use one of the following methods:

      • Press Up or Down to extend or shorten the stem

      • Change Length in the Properties panel

    Creating stemless notes

    To hide the stems of individual notes:

    1. Select one or more noteheads

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Select the Stem tab

    4. Select the checkbox next to Stemless

    To hide all stems in an instrument part:

    1. Right-click on the staff and select Staff/Part properties

    2. Click on Advanced style properties

    3. Select the checkbox next to Stemless

    Stem and flag properties

    Properties specific to stems and flags can be edited from the Stem tab in the Note section of the Properties panel:

    • Stemless removes the stem (and associated beams) from the selected note(s)

    • Stem direction:

      • Auto determines the direction of the stem according to the voice of the selected note(s)

      • Up and Down override the default stem direction

    • Flag style sets the appearance of flags for the entire score to either traditional (default) or straight

    • Thickness determines the stem's width

    • Length determines the stem's length

    • Stem offset can be used to move the stem in a horizontal and/or vertical direction

    Stem and flag style

    Global settings for Stem thickness and Flag style may also be set in Format→Style→Notes.

    See also

    Beams

    voice
    Adding brackets

    To add a bracket or brace:

    1. Select a range of staves by clicking a measure on the staff where you want the bracket or brace to start, then hold Shift and click on a measure on the staff where you want it to end

    2. Click the icon representing the desired bracket type in the Brackets palette.

    Alternatively:

    1. Select a measure on the topmost staff which you wish the bracket to span

    2. Click the desired bracket in the Brackets palette (you can also drag it directly from the palette to the staff)

    3. Select the bracket at the start of the system, then click the adjustment handle at the bottom and drag it down to the lowest staff you wish it to span. When you release the mouse button the bracket will snap into place.

    You an apply nested brackets using any of these methods. Newly created brackets are drawn outside of existing ones, so it usually easiest to start with the innermost and work outwards. However, you can edit the order later using the Column property (see below).

    Editing brackets

    If you select a bracket/brace, you can edit its properties in the Properties panel (sidebar).

    • Column: Moves the bracket inwards/outwards.

    • Span: Extends or retracts the end of the bracket/brace.

    Changing bracket span

    The top position of a bracket is fixed. If you need to move it, you must delete the bracket and create a new one.

    To change the bottom position, use any of these methods:

    • Select the bracket, click the adjustments handle, and drag it to the new position

    • Select the bracket, click the adjustment handle, and press Shift+Up/Down to move it from staff to staff

    • Select the bracket, go to the Properties panel, and change the Span property, which specifies how many staves the bracket should enclose.

    Changing bracket type

    • Select the bracket or brace that you wish to change

    • Click on a new bracket or brace in the Brackets palette.

    Customizing bracket appearance

    There are a few global properties for brackets and braces which are available in Format -> Style -> System under System brackets:

    • Bracket thickness: The thickness of a thick bracket

    • Bracket distance: The distance between a thick bracket and the staff

    • Brace thickness: The thickness (total width) of a brace. Note that this only applies when the Emmentaler and Gonville fonts are used, as these fonts do not include brace symbols and so the braces are drawn algorithmically

    • Brace distance: The distance between a brace and the staff.

    Deleting brackets

    To delete a bracket or brace, select it and press Del.

    Brackets and vertical justification

    Brackets and braces can affect the vertical spacing of staves: usually, extra space is given between bracketed groups, and staves enclosed by a brace are kept closer together. This behaviour can be configured in Format -> Page. See Vertical spacing for details.

    New Score dialog

    The initial number of measures in the score (the default is 32, but you can add/remove measures from the score edit window)

    Press Save.

    If exporting multiple parts, choose whether you want each part combined into one file or exported to as separate files

  • Click Export

  • pickup measure
    Entering notes and rests
    Palettes
    Properties
    Measures
    Opening and saving scores
    various audio and image formats
    share scores online
    musescore.com
    Create new score (animated image)
    Entering notes (animated image)
    Changing note durations (animated image)
    adding palette items to the score (animated image)
    locating the properties panel image
    Properties demonstration (animated image)
    inserting and deleting measures (animated image)
    Mixer
    Staff type change
    Create mid-score instrument change (animated image)
    Mixer showing instrument change channel strip
    this handout
    Notation Rules: Rhythm
    Example of rhythm written incorrectly and correctly
    How to span a chord or stem over two staves
    Longstem2
    Ottava style
    Alt
    +
    F
    to focus the File menu, then press
    Esc
    twice to return to where you were in the app, at which point the screen reader should start working again. This tends to be needed if you start the screen reader after MuseScore is already running.

    As mentioned above, MuseScore's speech output with JAWS is not currently as complete as it is with Narrator or NVDA.

    Screen Reader
    Modifier key
    On/off shortcut
    Settings shortcut

    Narrator (built in)

    Narrator = Caps Lock

    Win+Ctrl+Enter

    Win+Ctrl+N

    NVDA ()

    NVDA = Ins / Caps Lock

    Off: NVDA+Q Toggle: NVDA+S

    NVDA+N

    JAWS ()

    JAWS = Ins / Caps Lock

    Off: JAWS+F4

    Speech on macOS

    VoiceOver's Quick Nav mode must be turned off while using MuseScore 4. You can toggle Quick Nav on or off by pressing the Left and Right arrow keys simultaneously while VoiceOver is running, or via VoiceOver Utility > Commanders.

    MuseScore's interface is navigable with the tab cursor as well as with VoiceOver's own cursor. In general it's best to use the tab cursor because this matches the interface on other platforms, hence is what you will find described in most documentation and tutorials. When using the tab cursor, remember to use the arrow keys as well as Tab as described in Navigating the UI. VoiceOver's cursor can be used to reach areas of the application that are not yet accessible to the tab cursor.

    Screen Reader
    Modifier key
    On/off shortcut
    Settings shortcut

    VoiceOver (built in)

    VO = Ctrl+Option / Caps Lock

    Cmd+F5

    VO+F8

    Speech on Linux

    On Linux it's necessary to start the screen reader running before you launch MuseScore, otherwise accessibility features will be disabled to save system resources (the same is true for all Qt applications on Linux). If you forget to do this, simply exit MuseScore and launch it again, this time with the screen reader running.

    Orca is the most feature-complete screen reader available for Linux. Orca is built into the GNOME desktop environment, so it's recommended that Linux users with accessibility needs use a distribution based on GNOME or one of its derivatives.

    Screen Reader
    Modifier key
    On/off shortcut
    Settings shortcut

    Orca (built into GNOME)

    Orca = Ins / Caps Lock

    Super+Alt+S

    Orca+Space or run orca --setup

    Keyboard access

    Navigating the UI

    MuseScore's UI (user interface) has a hierarchical system of keyboard navigation, which is different to what you may be used to in other applications. In MuseScore's system, the Tab key skips some controls to save time. If you want to reach these controls, you need to use the arrow keys as well as Tab.

    Shortcut
    Action

    F6 / ` / Shift+F6 / Shift+`

    Move between UI sections (` is the backtick or grave accent key, found near the Tab key or left Shift on most QWERTY keyboards).

    Tab / Shift+Tab

    Move between control groups.

    Up / Down / Left / Right

    Move between controls within a group.

    Esc

    Stop interacting with an editable text control (so you can move away from it with the arrow keys).

    Enter / Return

    Activate the current control.

    Space

    Activate the current control or select an item in a list.

    Please note that UI navigation shortcuts are fixed and cannot be changed, unlike the shortcuts for score navigation, which can be customized in Preferences.

    Navigating the score

    The following shortcuts are of particular value to accessibility users:

    Shortcut
    Action

    Right / Left

    Move to next or previous note, chord, or rest.

    Alt+Right / Alt+Left

    Move to next or previous element. These shortcuts enable you to visit all kinds of notation elements, not just notes and rests.

    Alt+Up / Alt+Down

    Move to note above or below. These shortcuts enable you to move between individual notes in a chord, and also to reach notes and rests in other voices and in other staves.

    F2 / Alt+Shift+E

    Edit selected element. Equivalent to double-clicking with the mouse. Use it to edit text objects or adjust the length of hairpins, slurs, and voltas (use the Tab key to change which end of the line you are adjusting). When you have finished editing, press Esc to return to Normal mode.

    Menu / Shift+F10

    Open context menu for selected element(s). Equivalent to right-clicking with the mouse. It provides access to various options that depend on the element selected. Use this shortcut on a to provide access to , and .

    Other aspects of keyboard navigation are described on pages throughout this handbook. All score navigation and manipulation shortcuts can be customized in Preferences.

    Video tutorials

    The following accessibility tutorials are designed to get you up and running with MuseScore, using your keyboard and screen reader. They don't cover every aspect of the program, but they should give you a solid foundation that will enable you can take full advantage of the rest of this Handbook.

    Video
    Topics covered

    Installation of MuseScore on Windows, including Muse Hub and Muse Sounds. The process is similar on macOS and Linux, although on Linux you need to install Muse Hub and MuseScore separately.

    Initial score setup, including choosing instruments, key signature, time signature, and other settings.

    Basic note input.

    Using the palettes to add markings (e.g. dynamics) to your score.

    Main window of the program, so you can understand where all the different panels, toolbars, and controls are, and how to reach them by keyboard.

    From the menu, select File→New
  • Use the keyboard shortcut, Ctrl+N (Mac: Cmd+N)

  • This will open the New Score dialog (more instructions about this dialog are below). Once you've finished setting up your score, it will be visible in the Score tab.

    Instruments

    When creating a new score, you can either choose instruments yourself or use a template that comes pre-configured with appropriate instruments (these can always be changed later).

    Choose instruments

    In the New Score dialog, make sure the Choose instruments tab is selected.

    MuseScore contains over 500 instruments. Instruments are grouped into categories, and categories are organized into families. If you know what you’re looking for, you can type an instrument's name into the search bar. Alternatively, you can browse instruments by group from the Family dropdown menu.

    Adding instruments

    To add an instrument to your score:

    • Double-click on an instrument name, or

    • Click on the instrument name to select it, then click the → button

    Instruments are automatically arranged according to the order shown in the dropdown menu under Your Score. From this menu, you can choose from a range of standard score configurations.

    Changing order of instruments

    To manually change the order of instruments:

    1. Select an instrument in the Your Score panel

    2. Click on ↑ or ↓ to change its position

    Removing instruments

    To delete an instrument from your score:

    1. Select an instrument in the Your Score panel

    2. Click the trash can button

    You can also delete multiple instruments at once by first holding down Shift and selecting multiple instruments, then clicking the trash can button.

    Create from template

    Scores can also be created from pre-configured templates.

    Templates are organized into categories based on musical style or ensemble configuration. Each template contains the instruments most commonly required for a particular type of score. Instruments are ordered and styled according to conventional practice.

    To create a score from a template:

    1. Click Create from template

    2. Select a group of templates from the Category panel

    3. Choose your desired template from the center panel

    4. Click Done

    You can also search across all available templates in the search bar.

    Visit Templates and styles to learn more templates, including how to create your own for future use.

    Additional score information

    Click Next in the New score dialog to specify additional information about your score.

    Key signature

    By default, new scores are created with a key signature containing no sharps or flats (C major). Specify a different key signature by clicking the button under Key signature. Major keys are shown first; minor keys can be displayed by selecting the Minor tab.

    Time signature

    New scores are created in 4/4 by default. Change this by clicking the button under Time signature. Change the number of beats per bar using the arrows in the spin box, and change the beat quality from the dropdown menu. You can also select common and cut-common (alla-breve) time signatures in this popup.

    Tempo

    By default, new scores will play at a tempo of quarter note (crotchet) = 120 beats per minute (bpm). Metronome markings are not automatically included in new scores.

    To customize the starting playback tempo, and to show a metronome marking above the uppermost stave:

    1. Click the button under Tempo

    2. Tick Show tempo marking on my score

    3. Select the desired beat value

    4. Enter the desired number of beats per minute in the text field (or use the up and down arrows to scroll through the tempo range)

    Learn more about tempo text indications, metronome markings, and playback speed in tempo markings.

    Measures

    New scores are created with 32 measures and no pickup (anacrusis). To change the starting number of measures in your new score:

    1. Click the button under Measures

    2. Enter the desired number of measures in the Initial number of measures field

    Learn more about Adding and removing measures at any time after score creation.

    To start your score with a pickup:

    1. Click the button under Measures

    2. Tick Create pickup measure

    3. Enter the desired number of beats for the pickup in the text field

    4. Select the metrical value of the pickup measure from the drop-down menu

    You can always create a pickup later. Learn how to do this in Pickup and non-metered measures.

    Title and other text

    Enter text in the fields at the bottom of the New score dialog, and MuseScore will automatically place it in an appropriate format in your new score. You can enter text labels for the score's:

    • Title

    • Composer

    • Subtitle

    • Lyricist

    • Copyright

    This information gets saved to the score's project properties, which you can change at any time.

    Once you've finished specifying additional score information, click Done to confirm your selections and create your score.

    Changing instruments after score creation

    There are three ways to change existing score instruments:

    • Use the keyboard shortcut I while in the Score tab

    • Click Add from the Layout panel (if this panel is not yet visible, press F7, or select View → Layout)

    • Click Replace instrument in the Staff/Part properties dialog

    Home→Scores
    Adding a staff type change
    1. Select the measure in the score where you want the change to occur

    2. Click the Staff type change item in the Layout palette:

    Alternatively, you can drag the symbol from the palette directly to the measure.

    Other than the item appearing above the measure, nothing will change in the score until you configure its properties.

    Setting staff properties

    When you apply a Staff type change to a staff, its properties override those which are set in the Staff/Part properties dialog, starting from the measure in which it appears. Not all properties can be modified via a Staff type change.

    The properties of these items are configured via the Properties panel. If you do not see this panel, select View -> Properties from the menu bar, or press F7.

    To configure the properties of a Staff type change:

    1. Click the grey Staff type change icon which appears above the measure

    2. Go to the Properties tab

    3. Configure the properties under Staff type changes as necessary.

    Note that as you change these properties, the icon in the score will updated to reflect them, as well as the staff itself changing in appearance.

    These are the available properties:

    • Cue size: Makes the staff small (cue-sized), following the size defined in Format -> Style -> Sizes -> Small staff size. For a custom size, use Scale, below

    • Offset: Displaces the staff vertically. This is an offset downwards from the top line of a 5-line stave, so to align a 1-line staff with the middle line of a 5-line staff (for example), set this to 2sp

    • Scale: The size of the staff, and its contents, as a custom percentage

    • Number of lines: The number of staff lines

    • Line distance: The distance between lines, in spaces; 1 is 'normal'

    • Step offset: Offsets notes and other notation items vertically relative to the staff

    • Invisible staff lines: Toggles visibility of the staff lines

    • Staff line color: The color of the staff lines

    • Notehead scheme: Specifies which type of noteheads to use (e.g. pitch names, shape notes)

    • Stemless: Will draw notes without stems, flags or beams

    The remaining checkboxes toggle whether barlines, ledger lines, clefs, time signatures and key signatures should be shown on the staff.

    For some more details on these options, which are also available in the Staff/part properties dialog, See Staff properties.

    Configuring staves
    Staff/Part properties
    Properties
    Staff type change example
    An example of a staff type change element
    Repeats & jumps
    palette. Alternatively, drag the repeat icon from the palette onto the same blank measure instead.

    Note: You may need to click the More icon in the palette to reveal the two-measure and four-measure repeat symbols.

    In the case of multiple-measure repeats a "Keep measures on same system" layout item is automatically added to each measure of the repeated section except for the last. This keeps the repeated measures together on the same system, so they will not be broken up by layout changes to the score. These layout items can be deleted if desired.

    Measure repeat properties

    For multiple-measure repeats you can change the vertical position of the number which appears above the symbol:

    1. Select the multiple-measure repeat

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Under Bar repeat, edit the Number position value.

    Measure repeat style

    You can edit the properties of all measure repeats in the score in Format -> Style -> Measure repeats:

    palette
    Measure repeat
    For stemmed notes, the rhythmic value of the tremolo is indicated by the number of diagonal strokes through the stem. One stroke indicates that the original note is divided into eighth notes, e.g.
    A single-note tremolo

    Two strokes divides the note into sixteenth notes, and three strokes into thirty-second notes. (On notes with beams or flags, the number of strokes and flags are combined, e.g. an eighth note with a one-stroke tremolo is divided into sixteenths.)

    On whole notes and other notes without stems the tremolo is centered on the notehead.

    Two-note tremolos

    In traditional two-note or two-chord tremolos, incomplete beams are drawn between the notes to indicate the rhythmic value of the tremolo (to change the style see below). One beam indicates eight notes, two beams sixteenth notes, and three beams thirty-second notes. e.g.

    Two-note tremolos

    Buzz roll

    A buzz roll symbol is also available from the Tremolos palette. (Whether it plays back correctly depends on which sound library you are using.)

    Adding a tremolo to a single note

    1. Click on a notehead in the score

    2. Click on the desired tremolo symbol in the Tremolos palette.

    Adding a tremolo between two notes/chords

    1. Enter the notes at half the desired final duration of the tremolo.

    2. Select a note in the first chord.

    3. Click on the desired tremolo symbol in the Tremolos palette (one of the tremolo symbols without a stem).

    Tremolo beams appear between the notes/chords and the appearance of the noteheads is adjusted accordingly.

    Example: To enter a two-note tremolo with the duration of a half note, enter two normal quarter notes. After applying a tremolo symbol to the first note, the note values automatically double to half notes.

    Changing appearance of tremolos

    Three styles of tremolos between notes/chords are supported in MuseScore. To change the style:

    1. Select the tremolo symbol in the score

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Under the Tremolos section, choose the desired setting for Style (between notes).

    Fermata

    A fermata, or pause appears above/below a note, and extends its written duration, indicating a pause in the music.

    It may also be written above a rest, or a barline, indicating the end of a piece or section of music.

    Breath mark

    A breath mark is placed just above the staff, and tells a wind instrument performer or singer to take a breath here, or other instruments to pause slightly. It may occur between two notes or at the end of a measure.

    Caesura

    The caesura also indicates a pause, slightly longer than a breath mark but less so than a fermata. It may occur between two notes or at the end of a measure.

    Adding a pause to your score

    To add a fermata:

    1. Select a note, rest or barline

    2. Click on a fermata symbol in the Breaths & pauses palette.

    Alternatively drag a fermata symbol onto a note.

    Note that while it is customary for fermatas to be shown on all staves in a score, MuseScore Studio does not currently do this automatically: you must add fermatas to each stave manually.

    To add a breath mark or caesura:

    1. Select a note

    2. Click on a breath mark/pause symbol in the Breaths & pauses palette.

    Alternatively drag a breath mark/caesura symbol onto a note.

    MuseScore automatically places the breath mark/caesura in the correct position, just above the staff and after the selected note. It may create extra horizontal space for the marking.

    Changing pause playback

    Pause symbols have a playback effect in the score. To adjust the pause length:

    1. Select the pause

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Click Playback

    4. In the popup, adjust the Time stretch value.

    The Time stretch value scales the rhythmic duration of the note or rest to which the pause is attached.

    Pause properties

    To specify whether a fermata is placed above or below the stave:

    1. Select the fermata

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Under Fermata, choose the desired Position setting.

    Pause style

    You can specify default positional properties for all fermatas in Format -> Style -> Fermatas.

    palette
    Breathes and pauses
    Score
    ,
    Page
    ,
    Measure numbers
    , and
    Measure
    categories.

    To change all measures of a specific staff throughout the whole score, change the staff's Staff/Part properties.

    To open the Measure properties dialog, right-click on a measure and select Measure properties:

    If you only want to adjust one measure, once you have made the changes you want, just click OK. If you want to adjust multiple measures, instead click Apply and then use the left/right arrows at the bottom left of the dialog to move between measures. The measure number being edited appears both at the top of the dialog and in the status bar.

    Staves

    • Visible: Uncheck this to hide this measure entirely on this staff. Note that this checkbox is disabled if there's only one staff in the score or part.

    • Stemless: Check this to use stemless notation in this measure on this staff.

    If you want to automatically hide all empty measures on a particular staff, see .

    Measure duration

    • Nominal: This is the time signature set in the score (which cannot be edited here).

    • Actual: Adjust these figures to increase or decrease the real duration of a measure, for example for a pickup bar (anacrusis) or cadenza.

    Other

    • Exclude from measure count: Check to make the count skip the selected measure (this is checked by default for pickup bars created via the New Score Wizard).

    • Measure number mode: Choose Always show or Always hide to override the Auto score-wide measure numbering settings for this particular measure.

    • Add to measure number: A modifier to the number this measure automatically receives, which will apply from this point on.

    • Break multimeasure rest: at this measure.

    • Layout stretch: See .

    • Play count: This only appears if the measure is before an end repeat barline. It indicates the number of times the repeat section is played (defaulting to 2). Access this option more easily by selecting the end repeat barline and changing Properties -> .

    See also

    If you want to make all barlines aligned vertically between systems, see Fixed Measure Widths for a workaround.

    View

    To view the Symbols palette, select View→Master Palette, or use the shortcut Shift+F9.

    Selecting “Symbols” in the list of headings reveals all symbols under all subcategories. Selecting one subcategory to focus on a specific set.

    Search

    You can search for a symbol by entering a term in the Search box at the top of the Symbols section. Specify the musical font you want in the dropdown at the bottom right.

    Adding symbols to your score

    Symbols added from the Symbols palette scale in line with the score (see Staff size), but their font-size is fixed.

    If you need a symbol with an adjustable font-size, you should consider adding it instead from the Special characters palette as staff text.

    Add a symbol

    Use one of the following methods:

    • Select one or more score elements (notes, rests, barlines) then click on the desired symbol in the Symbols palette.

    • Drag the desired symbol from the Symbols palette onto a score element (note, rest, barline).

    Add to other symbols

    After adding a symbol, you can, if required, add an additional symbol to the existing one. Use one of the following:

    • Select a symbol (previously added to the score from the Symbols palette), then click on the desired symbol in the Symbols palette.

    • Drag the desired symbol onto the existing symbol in the score.

    Reposition symbols

    To reposition, you can drag the symbol, or edit the offsets in the Apprearance section of the Properties panel. You can also move the symbol using the keyboard arrows—after selecting it and entering edit mode by pressing Alt+Shift+E or F2.

    If two symbols have been joined together (see Add to other symbols, above), moving the first-added symbol moves both. However you can still move the second symbol in relation to the first.

    See also

    • Using the palettes for information about how to search for and apply palette items to the score.

    • Working with images for how to apply images to your score.

    Master palette
    Master palette
    Palettes panel
    Master palette
    Adding a harp pedal diagram to your score

    The harp pedal diagram element is available in the Harp notation palette.

    To apply a harp pedal diagram to a staff:

    1. Click in the score where you want to add a harp pedal diagram.

    2. Click the Harp pedal diagram element in the Harp notation palette.

    3. Choose the tuning in the popup dialog.

    Notes that cannot be played with the selected pedal configuration will turn red.

    The diagram view shows every pedal, while the text view shows only the notes that need to change since the last pedal marking.

    By default, diagrams appear above the staves and text markings appear between them.

    To change a diagram, select it in the score to reopen the popup dialog.

    Reading harp pedal diagrams

    Visual diagram

    The diagram corresponds visually to the seven harp pedals. The three to the left of the vertical line are the left foot pedals; the four on the right correspond to the right foot. From left to right, the notes the pedals control are:

    • Left foot: D, C, B

    • Right foot: E, F, G, A

    A bar on the line indicates the middle position, which plays a natural note. A bar above the line tells the player to raise the pedal, flattening the note, and a bar below indicates lowering the pedal, sharpening the note.

    For example, the playable notes indicated by the diagram below are C#, D, E, F#, G#, A, and B.

    Text diagram

    The upper line of notes refers to the pedals controlled by the right foot, and the bottom line to the left foot pedals.

    The first instance of a harp pedal text diagram in the score will always show the positions of all seven pedals. The text view shows only the notes that need to change since the last pedal marking.

    Text diagrams appear between the staves by default, but can be manually repositioned.

    To add a vibraphone pedal line, see Pedal.

    Rolls

    To add a drumroll to your score, see Tremolo.

    Sticking

    To enter sticking symbols (R, L):

    1. Select a start note;

    2. From the menu, select Add→Text→Sticking (alternatively, set up a keyboard shortcut to do the same thing). The cursor positions itself ready to accept your keyboard input;

    3. Input the letter just as you would normal text. To move forward or backwards to the next note, see Keyboard commands (chord symbols).

    4. To exit, press Esc, or click on a blank section of the score.

    Adding and removing measures

    Inserting measures

    MuseScore allows you to insert or delete measures in the score using a variety of methods. Measures can be inserted:

    • After a selection

    • Before a selection

    • At the start of the score

    • At the end of the score

    Measure context menu

    To insert one or more measures:

    1. Right-click on a blank area of a measure

    2. From the context menu, choose Insert measures

    3. From the options presented, choose the location where you want the measure(s) inserted

    4. Complete the dialog box and press OK.

    The Properties panel

    To insert one or more measures:

    1. Click on a measure

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Click Insert measures in the Measure section

    4. Type the number of measures you wish to insert (or leave it as “1” to insert a single measure)

    This popup remains open until you click another part of the user interface. As such, you can continue pressing the + button as many times as you need to insert further measures.

    In addition, you can insert measures from one of two menus:

    Note input toolbar

    1. Select something in your score (can be anything except line objects)

    2. Click the + button in the Note input toolbar

    3. Navigate to Measures

    4. Choose where you want the new measure(s) to be inserted

    Menu bar

    1. Select something in your score (can be anything except line objects)

    2. Click the Add in the Menu bar

    3. Navigate to Measures

    4. Choose where you want the new measure(s) to be inserted

    Inserting measures with keyboard shortcuts

    To quickly insert one measure before the selection point:

    1. Select something in your score (can be anything except line objects)

    2. Press Ins

    Insert more measures before the selection point by repeatedly pressing Ins.

    To quickly insert multiple measures before the selection point:

    1. Select something in your score (can be anything except line objects)

    2. Press Ctrl+Ins (Mac: Cmd+Ins)

    3. Type the number of required measures in the dialog that appears

    4. Click OK

    To append to the end of your score, you can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+B (Mac: Cmd+B) for a single measure, or Alt+Shift+B (Mac: Option+Shift+B) for multiple measures.

    Deleting measures

    To delete one or more measures using keyboard shortcuts:

    1. Select a measure (or hold Shift and select multiple measures)

    2. Type Ctrl+Backspace or Ctrl+Del (Mac: Cmd+Backspace or Cmd+Del).

    Alternatively,

    1. Select a measure (or hold Shift and select multiple measures)

    2. Right-click on any measure within the selection

    3. Select Delete measures

    You can also:

    1. Select a measure (or hold Shift and select multiple measures)

    2. Go to Tools

    3. Select Remove selected range

    Remove empty trailing measures

    To remove any empty measures at the end of your score:

    1. Go to Tools

    2. Select Remove empty trailing measures

    See also

    Other measure-related pages:

    Grace notes

    Grace notes can be applied to the score from the Grace notes palette.

    For bagpipe players there is a comprehensive range of grace notes in the Bagpipe embellishments palette.

    Types of grace notes

    Grace notes are small (cue-size) notes which ornament a previous or following note. They take their value from this parent note but do not themselves count towards the measure duration.

    There are several kinds:

    • Acciaccatura:

      Usually written with an oblique stroke through the note flag, or through the beam, if there is a beamed series.

    • Appoggiatura:

      A stressed note which takes half the value from the parent note.

    • Grace note after (trill endings).

    Adding a grace note to your score

    Note: For standard staves and tablature, the following instructions for adding grace notes work in both note input and normal modes.

    Add grace note with keyboard shortcut

    1. Ensure that the "parent" note is selected (multiple selection is possible in normal mode)

    2. To apply an acciaccatura, press / (slash).

    You can create a custom shortcut for other types of grace notes if you wish (see ).

    Add grace note from palette

    1. Ensure that the "parent" note is selected (multiple selection is possible in normal mode)

    2. Click on the desired symbol in the Grace notes palette.

    Alternatively, you can drag and drop a grace note from the palette onto a note in the score.

    Multiple grace notes

    Sequential grace notes

    You can add a run of grace notes to a selected note by repeatedly doing any of the following:

    • pressing the relevant keyboard shortcut (see above)

    • clicking on a grace note icon in a palette

    • dragging and dropping a grace note from a palette onto a note.

    Grace note chords

    To input a chord of grace notes:

    1. Add a single grace note (as described above)

    2. For standard staves, use one of the following methods:

      • Press Shift and a note letter, A to G; this will add the corresponding note above

    Editing grace notes

    Change duration

    To edit the visual duration, click on the grace note in normal mode, and select a duration from the note input toolbar or by using a keyboard shortcut (see ).

    Change pitch

    On a standard stave, change the pitch of a grace note using one of the methods described in .

    On tablature staves, use one of the methods described in .

    Grace note properties

    The same properties are available for grace notes as for normal notes. See , .

    To control whether a slash should be shown through the stem, there is one additional option for grace notes only

    1. Select a grace note

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Under Note, select the Stem tab

    4. Toggle Show stem slash.

    In the case of a beamed group, setting this for any note in the group will set it for the entire group.

    Grace note style

    You can adjust the default size for all grace notes in Format -> Styles -> Sizes -> Grace note size.

    Note that Grace note size is independent from Small note size, which is the size used for cue-size notes; the two sizes are often the same, and they are in MuseScore Studio by default, but do not have to be.

    Laissez vibrer ties

    Overview

    Laissez vibrer ties (often abbreviated as 'l.v. ties') are short ties starting on a note and hanging into space, indicating that the sound is to be allowed to resonate. They are commonly encountered in parts for piano, harp, guitar and metal percussion, among others.

    Laissez vibrer ties are per-note, rather than per-chord.

    Adding l.v. ties

    To add an l.v. tie:

    1. Select a note or range of notes

    2. Click the l.v. tie icon in the top toolbar:

    If you do not see this icon in the toolbar:

    1. Click the cog at the right of the toolbar

    2. In the Customize toolbar popup, locate Laissez vibrer and click the eye icon to its left.

    Removing l.v. ties

    To remove an l.v. tie, either:

    • Select it and press Del, or

    • Select the note to which it is attached and click the l.v. tie icon in the top toolbar (it acts as a toggle).

    Laissez vibrer properties

    You can configure individual l.v. ties via the Properties panel:

    Style, Position, and Placement function the same as they do for ordinary ties and slurs (see ). Minimum length allows you to override the score-wide minimum length setting for a specific tie.

    Style and Minimum length will not be available if the Use SMuFL symbols option (see below) is enabled.

    Laissez vibrer style

    There are two settings for laissez vibrer ties in Format -> Style under Slurs & ties then Laissez vibrer:

    • Minimum laissez vibrer length: specifies the minimum length of l.v. ties. In the case of a chord with multiple ties, they may start at different positions, but the ending positions are aligned; some ties may, therefore, end up longer than this value.

    • Use SMuFL symbols: If this is unchecked (the default), l.v. ties are drawn as 'normal' ties, following all the same rules for placement and geometry. If this option is checked, symbols from the music font will be used instead, which have a fixed size and shape.

    Laissez vibrer ties will be heard in playback when using MS Basic, VST (with limited support, depending on the VST), and MuseSounds.

    As of the MuseScore Studio 4.5 release date, only the following MuseSounds libraries will support laissez vibrer playback. This list will be updated as support gets added to further libraries:

    • Muse Keys

    The user interface

    Overview

    MuseScore Studio's UI (user interface) consists of the main application window, as well as all associated dialogs, panels, and menus.

    Main window

    In the top left of MuseScore's main window are three tabs, labelled

    Tuplets

    Creating tuplets

    A tuplet is a division of a duration into a number of equal units. The eighth-note triplet (one quarter note divided into three) is perhaps the most familiar type of tuplet:

    Input by duration mode

    This page explains music creation on standard staves. See also the and pages.

    Quickstart

    To enter notes using Input by duration mode:

    Voltas

    Volta brackets are lines above the staff used to mark different endings for a repeated section. MuseScore Studio creates correct playback. In the example below, the repeated section is played once through with the ending marked "1.", then a second time with the ending marked "2.".

    Adding voltas to your score

    1. Make sure that are in the correct position.

    Repeat signs

    A repeat sign looks like a double with a dot above and below the center line of the staff (see image below). It is used to enclose repeated sections of the score.

    Adding repeat signs to your score

    Find repeat signs in the Repeats & jumps and Barlines .

    Place a start repeat barline at the beginning of the repeated section and an end repeat barline at the end:

    If the start of the repeat section coincides with the beginning of the piece there is no need for a start repeat barline.

    Articulations

    This chapter discusses symbols available in the Articulations palette (accents, staccato, vibrato markings etc).

    To add verbal articulation objects available in the Text palette (legato, pizz., arco, tremolo etc) to a score, see chapter. Guitar articulation is covered in chapters under . Brass or woodwind articulation (fall, doit, plop, scoop) is covered in .

    Adding articulations to a score

    Creating a tablature staff

    Overview

    Music for fretted, stringed instruments is commonly notated using tablature (often abbreviated as tab); this gives a visual representation of the strings and fret numbers. Tablature is frequently found in combination with traditional staff notation.

    Applying capos

    Overview

    A capo is a device that can be clamped onto the fretboard of a fretted stringed instrument, such as the guitar. The capo effectively shortens the strings, which makes the instrument play in a higher key than it normally would.

    MuseScore allows you to emulate this effect by adding a Capo marking to an instrument staff (or staves). This automatically transposes playback to the desired pitch while keeping the notes, or fretmarks, unchanged. Partial capos, where only some strings are shortened, are also possible (see ).

    Using the palettes

    MuseScore Studio places elements in your score automatically according to a set of rules and style settings. These are designed to produce excellent results by default. Elements are positioned according to standard engraving practices while avoiding collisions. Default positions can be customized for any given element.

    Default position

    Most elements in MuseScore have a default position that is determined by a style setting that can be customized via the Properties panel or the Format→Style dialog. For elements that are placed above the staff, the position is specified as an offset from the top line of the staff; for elements that are placed below the staff, the position is specified as an offset from the bottom line of the staff. These offsets, like most measurements in MuseScore, are expressed in staff spaces—abbreviated sp. For many element types, you can specify an offset to be used when placed above as well as a separate offset to be used when placed below, and also which of these placements should be applied by default.

    Items across repeats and jumps

    Sometimes, items which can span multiple notes can start before a repeat or jump but need end at the other side of that repeat or jump. This can mean that the end actually comes before the start in the score (for example, when going back to the start of a repeat, or at a D.C. or D.S.), or may come after the start but have other material in between, like when jumping across a first-time bar or to a coda.

    MuseScore Studio supports this behaviour for certain types of item, specifically ties, slurs and lyrics lines. The way that each type of item is created is slightly different.

    The following instructions will refer to this short example as a model:

    Ties

    To add a tie that crosses a repeat or jump:

    Changes and courtesies at repeats and jumps

    Overview

    Layout and styling of clefs, key signature and time signature changes at repeats and jumps can be a complex matter. MuseScore Studio provides a range of options to configure when and where you want them to appear. These are options are found in Style -> Format -> Clefs, key & time signatures.

    For example, for dynamics, the default placement is below the staff, and the default offset below the bottom staff line is 2.5 sp. If you flip a dynamic marking above the staff, it defaults to 1.5 sp above the top staff line staff (expressed as a negative offset: -1.5 sp). These settings are all found in Format→Style→Dynamics.

    NOT FOUND: dynamics-style.png

    Note that the default offset is larger for dynamics placed below the staff than above only because the offset is measured from the baseline of the text.

    NOT FOUND: offset.png

    Auto-place

    Auto-place is the term MuseScore uses for a set of algorithms used to avoid collisions as well as to align certain elements automatically. A basic understanding of how auto-place works can be useful when making adjustments.

    Vertical collision avoidance

    For most elements placed above or below the staff, collision avoidance works vertically. When an element is being positioned, MuseScore first tries to place it according to the default offset for that element type. If that would result in a collision with another element, then one of the two elements will be moved further from the staff to avoid the overlap. MuseScore follows standard engraving rules in determining which elements to move. For example, tempo markings are placed above trill lines, rather than vice versa.

    NOT FOUND: vertical-collision-avoidance.png

    The Minimum distance style setting determines how much distance MuseScore places between elements when avoiding collisions in this manner. The corresponding setting in the Properties panel allows you to override this for individual elements where necessary. But MuseScore adjusts this value automatically when positioning elements manually, as seen below in the section on manual adjustment.

    Horizontal collision avoidance

    For certain elements such as lyrics or chord symbols, MuseScore will widen measures to avoid collisions rather than displace these elements vertically.

    NOT FOUND: horizontal-collision-avoidance.png

    Vertical alignment

    MuseScore will also try to align certain elements vertically, so that if one element of that type needs to be adjusted vertically to avoid a collision, other elements of that same type on the same system will automatically be adjusted as well. Elements that are always aligned vertically include lyrics and pedal markings. Dynamics and hairpins will be aligned if they are directly adjacent.

    NOT FOUND: dynamics-align.png

    Chord symbols can also be aligned vertically if you enable this in the chord symbol style settings, by setting a Maximum shift value. See Chord symbols for more information.

    Disabling auto-place

    Auto-place normally does a good job of avoiding collisions and of aligning elements. In cases where you wish to position an element manually, you can usually do so directly without the need to disable auto-place (see manual adjustment below).

    However, you may still wish to disable auto-place in some situations. For example, rehearsal markings default to displaying above voltas, but you may wish to reverse this for some specific case where the volta was already displaced higher and there is then room for the rehearsal mark underneath.

    NOT FOUND: disable-autoplace.png

    In this case, disabling auto-place for the rehearsal mark allows it to display underneath the volta, while still allowing the volta to automatically avoid collisions with the notes.

    To disable auto-place for an element, select it and uncheck Auto-place in Properties→General.

    NOT FOUND: auto-place-setting.png

    The element will be returned to its default position (as determined by its style settings) and it will not be included in the detection of collisions with other elements. Disabling auto-place for an element also causes it to be excluded from any vertical alignment that would otherwise have applied.

    Manual adjustment

    Whether auto-place has displaced an element from its default position or not, the position of elements can be adjusted manually either by dragging, using the cursor keys, or the Offset fields in the Properties→General→Appearance. See Adjusting elements directly for more information.

    MuseScore even allows you to perform manual adjustments that would result in collisions. In the example above, if you drag the rehearsal letter below the volta, MuseScore will allow this and will automatically set the Minimum distance for that element to a negative value, thus effectively allowing the collision without disabling auto-place.

    Manual alignment

    Elements of the same type will normally be aligned by default simply because they have the same style settings and therefore the same offset. However, auto-place can result in some of the elements being moved further from the staff than others. As described above under Vertical alignment, MuseScore will automatically align some types of elements. For other elements types, you can align them manually by assigning them the same vertical offset.

    To do this, simply select the elements you wish to align (e.g., click the first, Shift+click the last), then gradually increase or decrease the vertical offset in the Properties panel. For example, to align a series of tempo markings above the staff, you will need to set their vertical offsets to the same value. To make sure they are aligned and also avoid the collisions that cause auto-place to display one or more of them to begin with, you will need to set the offset to a sufficiently large negative value.

    NOT FOUND: align-manually.png

    JAWS+J

    free
    paid
    range selection
    Measure properties
    Staff/Part properties
    Installing MuseScore
    Score setup
    Entering music
    Adding markings
    The user interface

    Select where you want the measure(s) to be inserted from the dropdown menu (or leave it as is to insert the new measure(s) after the selection point)

  • Click the + button

  • Mensural notation and Mensurstrich
    Measure numbering
    Measure and multimeasure rests
    Pickup and non-metered measures
    Measure properties
    Adding measures (animated image)
    Create new score (animated image)
    Choose instruments (animated image)
    Add instruments (animated image)
    Change order of instruments (animated image)
    Deleting instruments (animated image)
    Create score from template (animated image)
    Specify additional score information (animated image)
    Two-measure repeat
    Measure repeats style settings
    Tremolo 1
    Tremolo two note
    Fermata
    Fermata over rest
    Fermata style settings
    Symbols palette
    Adding a harp diagram
    Harp pedal diagram
    Harp text diagram
    Press Alt+1-9
  • from the menu bar, select Add -> Intervals and choose an interval from the list. This will add a note at the indicated interval above the selected note.

  • For tablature, select the grace note in normal mode, then add further chord notes using the method of adding intervals in step 2.

  • Preferences: Shortcuts
    Selecting duration
    Editing notes and rests
    Changing the pitch in normal mode (tablature)
    Notehead properties
    Stem and flag properties
    Acciaccatura
    Appoggiatura
    Grace notes palette

    Muse Guitars (Vols. 1 and 2)

    Slur properties
    Home
    ,
    Score
    and
    Publish
    .

    Home tab

    The Home tab contains the following pages:

    My account

    Create a new MuseScore account, or login to your existing account. With an active account, you can get technical assistance and report bugs in the forums at musescore.org. You can also save your files to the cloud on musescore.com.

    Scores

    This section allows you to set up a new score, or to open an existing one. Learn about creating new scores in Setting up your score.

    Plugins

    This window displays a list of available plugins. See the chapter on Plugins to learn about managing these useful add-ons.

    Learn

    This is where video tutorials are hosted. Clicking on any video tutorial opens it on the official MuseScore YouTube channel.

    Score tab

    This area is where you do most of your work in MuseScore, including adding music notation and listening to playback of your score. The workspace consists of several regions (numbered according to the diagram below):

    Default arrangement of toolbars and panels in the Score tab
    1. Parts button: Located near the top center of the main window, this button opens the Parts dialog, where you can create, edit and delete instrumental part scores.

    2. Mixer button: The button to the right of Parts opens and closes the Mixer panel, where you can control the sound and volume of each instrument individually.

    3. Playback toolbar: Located in the top right, this toolbar enables you to play, pause, rewind and loop playback. Using the mouse, you can drag the six dots grip area (⠿) to undock this toolbar and expose additional options to seek and control playback tempo.

    4. : Extending across the top of the program window, just below the Parts and Mixer buttons, the note input toolbar includes essential notation elements used in score writing. Use it to set note duration, toggle accidentals, apply common articulations, enter tuplets, and switch between voices.

    5. Left sidebar: The area on the left side of the program window contains various panels such as , , and . These can be shown or hidden as desired, or undocked and dragged to the right sidebar; an equivalent area on the other side of the window.

    6. Score view / notation view: This is the main central region that displays the current score or instrumental part as sheet music. This is where notation elements are added, edited, and deleted.

    7. Status bar: This runs along the bottom of the window. The left side displays useful information about whatever elements are selected in the score. The right side contains controls for switching between workspaces, selecting concert or transposed pitch views, and specifying the page display and zoom factor (magnification).

    Keyboard users can press Tab or F6 to navigate between these UI regions. Within each region, navigation is performed with the arrow keys and Tab.

    Almost all panels and toolbars can be un-docked and repositioned according to your project requirements and workflow preferences. Learn more about this in Workspaces.

    Publish tab

    This tab allows you to view your score without the clutter of the note input toolbar or sidebar panels. There are options to print the score, and to export it in a variety of image, audio and document formats. When your score is finished, you can also publish it to musescore.com.

    Menu bar

    Throughout this handbook, you will come across instructions in the form Menu > Item. For example, File > Save is an instruction to open the File menu and select the Save item within that menu.

    On macOS, MuseScore's menus are part of the system-wide menu bar located at the top of the screen. Keyboard users can press Ctrl+F2 to reach this area, and then navigate with the arrow keys or letter keys (e.g. press F for File).

    On Windows and Linux, the menu bar is located at the top of each application window. Keyboard users can reach the menus by pressing the Alt key, optionally followed by a letter or number key (e.g. press Alt+F for File, followed by A for Save as). The relevant letter or number is known as the mnemonic access key; it's underlined in the menu while Alt is held. Arrow keys also work for navigation in the menus.

    MuseScore's menu bar contains the following menus:

    File

    The File menu is used to create a new file, open and save files, import and export various formats, create and edit instrument parts, and print.

    Edit

    The Edit menu provides undo and redo options, copy/cut/paste options, and Find / Go to functionality.

    View

    The View menu is used to show or hide various palettes, dialogs, and other workspace elements.

    Items under the Show submenu adjusts display of non-printing elements:

    • Show invisible: Show/hide elements depending on their Properties panel: Invisible setting. If this option is ticked, invisible elements are shown in the score window as light gray.

    • Show formatting: Show/hide Systems and horizontal spacing: System Breaks or Pages and vertical spacing: Page Breaks symbols.

    • Show frames: Show/hide the dotted outlines of Frames.

    • Show page margins: Show/hide .

    • Show irregular measures: A plus sign or minus sign at the top right of a measure indicates that its duration differs from that set by the time signature.

    Add

    The Add menu is used to add different kinds of elements to the score, such as notes, text, measures, etc.

    Format

    The Format menu is used to adjust global and local formatting of the score. It also allows you to stretch or contract the score, load and save score styles, and much more.

    Tools

    The Tools menu offers commands to manipulate the score or selected regions of it, including transpose, exchange voices, toggle slash notation, etc.

    Plugins

    The Plugins menu is used to run plugins. Plugins must be enabled before they will appear in this menu. Use the Manage plugins option to enable MuseScore's built-in plugins and any new plugins you have installed.

    Help

    The Help menu provides access to this handbook, as well as options to check for updates or restore factory settings. There's also an Ask for help option, which leads to a forum where you can ask questions or report bugs.

    When posting on the forums, it's important to say which version of MuseScore Studio you are using. This can be found via Help > About MuseScore Studio on Windows and Linux, or via MuseScore Studio > About on macOS.

    Context menus

    In certain parts of the application, primarily in the Score tab, context menus are available with additional functionality, such as options to copy, edit, customise, delete, or view the properties of whichever item(s) were selected at the time you opened the menu.

    To open the context menu for a particular item:

    • Right-click on the item with the mouse, or

    • Select the item with the keyboard and press Shift+F10.

      • Some PC keyboards also have a dedicated Menu or Copilot key near to the right Alt key (AltGr). In Windows 11, you may need to press and release this key quickly to avoid activating Microsoft Copilot.

    Outside the score, the presence of a context menu is often indicated by a small button with three dots (⋮) or a settings cog (⛭). Press the button to open the menu. If the button is associated with a nearby item (e.g. in the Palettes), you can also right-click on that item or use Shift+F10.

    Staff/Part/Measure properties

    If you right-click on an empty region within a measure, the resulting context menu contains options for Staff/Part properties (used to rename a staff or replace its instrument) and Measure properties (used to change measure numbering or create incomplete measures).

    To access these options via the keyboard:

    1. Select a note or rest in the relevant staff or measure.

    2. Hold down the Shift key and press Left or Right to create a range selection.

    3. Press Shift+F10 (or the dedicated Menu key if your keyboard has one) to open the menu.

    Simple tuplets

    To create a simple tuplet, such as the one above:

    1. Select or navigate to a note or rest where you want the tuplet to begin.

    2. Specify the duration of the entire tuplet group, by clicking a duration in the top toolbar or pressing the appropriate keyboard shortcut (for example, press 5 for a quarter note).

    3. Specify the number of divisions (between 2 and 9) using one of these methods:

      1. The keyboard shortcuts Ctrl+2–9.

      2. Choose one of the options from the Add -> Tuplets menu.

      3. Click the tuplet icon on the top toolbar and choose an option from the dropdown.

    The note or rest will be divided into the given number of units and you can continue entering notes as required.

    If you need to input a series of tuplets, try this shortcut:

    1. Create the first tuplet.

    2. Select the entire first tuplet as a range selection.

    3. Press R (repeat) as many times as required. Each press will create a new tuplet after the first one.

    Custom tuplets

    More complex tuplets can be created as follows:

    1. Select or navigate to a note or rest where you want the tuplet to begin.

    2. Specify the duration of the entire tuplet group, as described above.

    3. Open the Create tuplet dialog, either from the menu (Add -> Tuplets -> Other...) or by clicking the tuplet icon in the top toolbar and choosing Other... from the dropdown:

    You can then define the properties of the tuplet via this dialog, and click OK to create it.

    Nested tuplets

    Tuplets can be nested within other tuplets:

    To create a nested tuplet:

    1. Create the outer tuplet as described above.

    2. Select a note or rest within the tuplet, and create an inner tuplet in the same way.

    Tuplets can be nested many layers deep, until the durations become too small to represent.

    Tuplet properties

    The appearance of a selected tuplet can be controlled in the Properties panel.

    • Direction: Whether the tuplet appears above or below the staff; if left at Auto (the default), this will be determined by context.

    • Number type: Whether to show just the number of divisions (e.g. '3'), the explicit ratio (e.g. '3:2'), or no number.

    • Bracket type: Whether or not to show a bracket; if left at Auto, this will be determined by context.

    • Line thickness: The thickness of the bracket.

    Tuplet style

    General settings for all tuplets in the score can be configured in Format -> Style -> Tuplets.

    General styles

    • Direction: Whether tuplets should appear above or below the staff.

      • Auto: The direction is determined by context (which is closely connected to the stem direction of the notes under the tuplet, like with slurs).

      • Up: Above the staff.

      • Down: Below the staff.

    • Number type: How to show tuplet numbers.

      • Number: Just show the number of divisions (e.g. '3').

      • Ratio: Show the explicit ratio (e.g. '3:2').

      • None: Show no number.

    • Number alignment: Where to place the number

      • Graphical center: In the graphical center of the bracket

      • Rhythmic center: Over the central rhythmic division of the tuplet (or in the case of an even number of divisions, between the middle two).

    Brackets

    • Bracket type: When to show a bracket over the tuplet.

      • Automatic: A bracket is shown according to context (generally, no bracket is drawn if there is a continuous beam matching the length of the tuplet and connecting the first and last divisions).

      • Bracket: Always show a bracket.

      • None: Never show a bracket.

    • Bracket thickness: The thickness of the line.

    • Bracket hook height: The height of the vertical hooks at either end of the bracket.

    • Extend bracket to end of duration: If unchecked, the bracket will end over the last note or rest inside the tuplet. If checked, the right end of the bracket will be extended to the position where the final division of the tuplet would appear, even if there is no explicit note or rest there. For example:

    Distances

    • Maximum slope: The maximum vertical distance between the left and right ends of the tuplet. If set to 0, all tuplet brackets will be horizontal.

    • Avoid staves: If checked, all tuplet numbers and brackets will stay entirely outside of the stave. If unchecked, they will follow the noteheads, beams and stems more closely, even if they go into the stave.

    The other options in this section should be self-explanatory. The horizontal distance settings all refer to the position of the ends of the tuplet brackets (the vertical hooks).

    Text style

    The text style of tuplet numbers can be configured in Format -> Style -> Text styles -> Tuplet.

    This style has one additional option, Use musical symbols font for tuplet numbers. If checked, the tuplet number symbols from the music font (e.g. Leland) will be used instead of the specified text font, and their size can be controlled via the Musical symbols scale setting.

    Triplet

    Type M to enter Input by duration mode

  • Type A, B, C, D, E, F, or G to select a pitch

  • Press a duration in the toolbar or type a duration shortcut (1–9) to enter a note

  • Entering notes

    MuseScore Studio's default note entry method is Input by note name. If you'd prefer to choose the pitch first and then enter notes into your score by pressing the duration shortcuts or buttons in the toolbar, Input by duration mode is for you.

    Selecting a start point

    To add a note or rest to the score, start by selecting a location to begin entry. You can use the mouse or the keyboard navigation commands.

    Entering Input by duration mode

    Press M to enter Input by duration mode or select the button in the toolbar.

    Selecting pitch

    A preview of the next pitch to be entered is shown on the score in the color of the currently selected voice. On most instruments, this pitch cursor will fall on the middle staff line.

    Enter pitches using the computer keyboard, mouse, MIDI keyboard, or virtual piano keyboard.

    Selecting pitch using the computer keyboard

    • Type A, B, C, D, E, F, or G to select a pitch by name.

    • Use ↑ or ↓ to move the pitch cursor up or down by one staff line or space.

    • Use Ctrl + ↑ or Ctrl + ↓ to move the pitch cursor up or down by one octave.

    Selecting pitch using the mouse

    Hovering over a staff and clicking enters a note at the cursor position. See the main entering notes and rests page for more details.

    Selecting duration

    After selecting pitch using one of the methods above, press a duration in the toolbar or use a shortcut (1–9) to enter a note. See the list of duration shortcuts below:

    Entering chords

    For the purpose of this section, chords are any combination of multiple notes all starting at the same time, all sharing the same duration, and all sharing a single stem.

    To create chords as you enter notes

    • Computer keyboard: Hold Shift while entering the note using A–G

      • The next note will be added above the last note added, so when building a chord it's easiest to start by entering the lowest note first.

    • Mouse: Click the location where you wish to add the note

    • MIDI keyboard: Either play all the notes at the same time, or play them one at a time but do not release one key before pressing the next, then select a duration

    • Virtual piano keyboard: Hold Shift while clicking a key in the piano panel

    You can also add notes to chords by interval.

    To create chords over a previously-entered line of notes

    Notes entered in Input by duration mode that match the duration at the cursor position will form a chord with the existing note rather than overwriting them. There's no need to hold Shift.

    So, use ← or → to move the entry cursor to any location where a note already exists, select a pitch, then enter the corresponding duration to create or add to a chord.

    Preferences

    In Preferences → Note input, you can further customize Input by duration mode.

    • Default input mode: Choose whether Input by note name mode or Input by duration mode is entered when entering a note or double-clicking on a staff.

    • Input by duration mode cursor: Choose whether to show the above staff ruler or the classic note entry cursor when in Input by duration mode.

    tablature
    percussion

    To apply the volta bracket, use one of the following:

    • Select a measure and click on the desired volta in the Repeats & jumps palette, or

    • Drag a volta from a palette onto a measure.

    To change the range covered after the volta has been added, see .

    Changing appearance of voltas

    The appearance of voltas can be changed via the Properties panel. See Volta properties, below. Note that changing the text is purely visual and does not affect playback.

    Changing playback of voltas

    1. Select a volta in the score.

    2. Go the Properties panel and find the Volta section.

    3. Select the Style tab and edit the Repeat list value.

    The Repeat list specifies which times through the music under the volta should be played. For example, a value of 1 means that the passage will be played only the first time, and will be skipped other times. 2 means it will be played only the second time.

    If the volta is to be played more than once, you can enter a series of numbers separated by commas, e.g. 1,2,3. In this case, you must also edit the end repeat's Play count property accordingly. See Changing how often to repeat. The play count is usually the number of Repeat list entries plus 1. For example:

    This example plays back the measures in this sequence: 1–3, 1–2, 4–5, 1–3, 1–3, 1–2, 4–5, 1–2, 6–8.

    To achieve this, the following properties are set:

    • For Repeats:

      • In measure 3, Play count is set to 4

      • In measure 5, Play count is set to 3

    • Voltas:

      • In measure 3, Repeat list is set to 1,3,4 and Beginning text is set to 1., 3., 4.

      • In measures 4–5, Repeat list is set to 2,5 and Beginning text is set to 2., 5.

    To ignore all repeats during playback, see Repeat signs.

    Volta properties

    In the properties panel, there are two tabs for voltas: Style and Text.

    The only option specific to voltas is Style -> Repeat list which is used to specify which repeats the volta applies to. See Changing playback of voltas, above.

    For all the other options in Style, see . For the options in Text, see Entering and editing text and Formatting text.

    Voltas style

    Styles for voltas can be found in Format -> Style -> Voltas:

    • Vertical position: The default position of the horizontal line of the volta.

    • Hook height: The height of the vertical hook (note that if this value is close to or larger than Vertical position then this will determine the position of the whole item, as it will automatically move up to avoid colliding with the staff).

    • Line thickness: The thickness of the line.

    • Line style: Solid, dashed or dotted.

    There are two options to control the alignment of the beginning of the volta:

    • At start of system, start volta: This controls whether the vertical hook should start after or on the key signature. Note that this affects also affects the continuation of a volta line when it continues to a new system.

    • Align start hook: This controls whether the vertical hook should align to the left or right side of the thick barline in a repeat.

    Styles for the text under voltas can be found in Format -> Style -> Text styles under Volta.

    repeat barlines
    1st and 2nd ending

    For repeated sections with multiple endings, use voltas.

    Changing how often to repeat

    Unless indicated otherwise, a repeated section is played through twice.

    To change the number of times a section is repeated:

    1. Select the end repeat barline of the section.

    2. Open the Properties panel.

    3. Change the value of Play count to the number of times you wish the section to be played.

    This will be reflected in playback, and also a textual indication will appear above the barline, for example:

    Customizing play count text

    The text that appears above the repeat can be configured in Format -> Style... -> Repeats -> Repeat play count text:

    • Automatically show text at repeat barlines: This toggle controls whether this text should appear at all in the score.

    • Show for single repeats: If checked, the text will also appear above repeats with a play count of 2.

    • Preset: This dropdown gives several options for the format of the text ('x3', '3x', 'Play 3 times', '3 repeats').

    • The Edit text style button takes you to the page where the Repeat play count text style is configured.

    Play count text is a type of system marking, and can be shown (or hidden) wherever there is a system marking instance in the score.

    You can customize the behavior for any specific end repeat barline in the score via the Properties panel. See Repeat properties, below.

    Ignoring repeats during playback

    To ignore all repeats during playback:

    • Click the cog icon in the playback toolbar.

    • Uncheck Play repeats.

    Repeat properties

    • Repeat style: Either the 'plain' or 'winged' style.

    • Play count: The number of times to repeat (see Changing how often to repeat, above).

    • Play count text (which may be disabled depending on the value of Play count and the score's style settings) has three options:

      • Auto: Whether to show the text, and how to format it, is also determined by the score's style settings.

      • Custom: Provides a text field where you can enter any text you wish, to override the default. You can also directly in the score and Custom will be automatically selected.

      • Hide: Do not show play count text on this repeat.

    For the other settings under Show more, see Barline properties.

    Repeat style

    Style settings for repeat barlines can be found in Format -> Style -> Barlines:

    The settings specific to repeat barlines are:

    • Show repeat barline tips: Adds 'wings' above and below repeat barlines.

    • Repeat barline to dots distance: The distance between the innermost line of a repeat barline and its dots.

    For the other settings, see Barline style.

    barline
    palettes
    Simple repeat section
    Keyboard shortcuts

    To add an articulation with a keyboard shortcut:

    1. Select one or more notes

    2. Apply the relevant shortcut from the list below:

      • Marcato: Shift+O

      • Accent: Shift+V

      • Tenuto: Shift+N

      • Staccato: Shift+S.

    From the toolbar

    Certain articulations (accent, marcato, staccato, and tenuto) can be added from the note input toolbar:

    1. Select one or more notes

    2. Click on the desired icon in the articulations toolbar area.

    Articulations palette

    The Articulations palette

    To add an item to a score:

    1. Select one or more notes

    2. Click on the desired articulation in the Articulations palette.

    Alternatively, drag and drop an articulation symbol from the palette to a notehead.

    Articulations playback

    Certain articulations affect note playback - such as staccato, staccatissimo, louré (tenuto + staccato), and accents. This is handled automatically by the program.

    Articulation properties

    Editable properties of selected articulations on the score are shown in the Properties panel.

    • Placement: This alters the position of the symbol above or below the note.

    Articulation style

    See the main chapter Templates and styles

    • Values of the "Style for Articulations & Ornaments" can be edited in Format -> Style -> Articulations & ornaments.

    Shown below are the result of some options on the score.

    Alignment options

    Align with stem
    Align with notehead
    Center between stem and notehead

    Combined articulation options

    Always keep together
    Prefer closeness to notehead (combined articulations may become separated)
    Entering and editing text
    Idiomatic notation: Guitar
    Arpeggios and glissandi
    Types of tablature staves

    A variety of tablature templates for common instruments are supplied. If this isn't quite what you're looking for, you can easily change the template (see Changing tablature staff type), and/or customize the staff (see Tablature: customization).

    Adding a tablature staff to your score

    There are three possibilities:

    • Create tablature as part of a new score.

    • Add tablature to an existing score.

    • Change an existing staff from standard to tablature.

    Add tablature using the New Score dialog

    To create tablature as part of a new score:

    1. Open the New Score dialog.

    2. Select the required tablature from either the Choose Instruments or Create from template tabs.

    3. Complete the rest of the New Score dialog.

    Add tablature using the Instruments dialog

    To create a tablature staff in an existing score:

    1. In the Layout panel, click on the Add button; or press the shortcut key, I. This brings up the Add or remove instruments dialog.

    2. Click on the Strings – Plucked family and choose the desired tablature from the Instruments column.

    3. Press OK.

    Change an existing staff from standard to tablature

    1. Make sure that the standard staff contains a plucked string instrument;

    2. Use one of the methods described under Changing tablature staff type.

    Creating paired standard and tablature staves

    Music for the guitar (and other plucked-string instruments) is often notated using paired standard and tablature staves. In MuseScore, the staves can be either linked or unlinked.

    • Linked: Any change you make to the notation in one staff automatically updates the other.

    • Unlinked: Each staff is edited independently. To update the other staff, copy and paste the relevant music notation.

    Note : In both cases, the staff/tablature pair shares the same instrument.

    Create paired standard/tab staves using the New Score Wizard

    There are two ways to do this when creating a new score (A or B):

    A. For linked staves only:

    1. Open the New Score Wizard.

    2. In the "Create from template" tab, click on the "Solo" category and choose the "Guitar + Tablature" .

    3. Complete the rest of the New Score wizard.

    4. Change the instrument type, if required, in Staff / Part properties.

    5. Change the tablature type, if required (see ).

    B. For linked or unlinked staves:

    1. Open the New Score Wizard.

    2. In the "Choose instruments" tab, click on the "Strings – Plucked" family, and select a staff option from the "Instruments" column.

    3. Complete the rest of the wizard.

    4. Add the desired staff using the Instruments panel.

    Create paired standard/tab staves using the Instruments dialog

    Use this method when you want to add to an existing score:

    1. Open the Add or remove instruments dialog: press I; or, alternatively, the Add button in the Instruments sidebar

    2. Click on the Strings – Plucked family and choose the desired staff from the Instruments column.

    3. Press OK.

    4. Add the desired tablature from the .

    Note: If you already have one staff of a standard/tab pair in your score, you can simply add the missing staff from the Instruments panel. See Adding and configuring staves.

    Normal staff and tablature combination
    Applying a capo to your score

    The capo element is available in the Guitar palette, which is hidden by default.

    To find the capo element:

    1. Click the Search Palettes button at the top of the palettes, or use the shortcut Ctrl+F9 (macOS: Cmd+F9).

    2. Type "capo".

    Alternatively, to permanently reveal the Guitar palette:

    1. Click Add palettes

    2. Click the Add button next to Guitar

    Note: The Add palettes dialog is not currently accessible to screen readers, so blind users must use the first method (via search).

    To apply a capo to a staff:

    1. In the score, select the note or rest where you want to add a capo marking.

    2. In the Guitar palette, select the Capo element.

      • “Capo 1” text is added to the score, and a Capo settings popup dialog appears next to it.

    3. Adjust the capo's settings in the popup dialog (see below).

    Adjusting capo settings

    The Capo settings popup dialog appears when you add a new capo marking or select an existing capo marking in the score.

    Note: Keyboard users can press Tab to focus the Capo settings popup after it has appeared, and then use the arrow keys to navigate the available settings. If you press Tab a second time the popup will disappear. To get it back, simply deselect the capo marking with Alt+Left, reselect it with Alt+Right, and then press Tab to focus the popup.

    Turning capo on or off

    • Select On at the top of the Capo settings dialog to indicate that a capo should be added to the instrument.

    • Select Off to indicate that the capo should be removed from the instrument and return playback to the original key.

    By default, if you select Off the text in the score will change to read "No capo".

    Setting capo fret position

    The number in the Fret spinner refers to the fret where the capo should be applied. For example, fret 1 transposes the key up by a semitone, fret 2 by a whole tone, and so on. The text label in the score will update automatically.

    For example, if you choose fret 4, the text in the score will say "Capo 4".

    Note: Keyboard focus can get stuck in the fret edit control. If this happens, press Up and Down to change the value of the spinner, then press Right to move to the Apply to string checkboxes below.

    Specifying partial capo placement

    The checkbox switches in the Apply to section let you specify that a capo should be applied only on certain strings. When at least one string is turned off, the text in the score will change to indicate a partial capo.

    For example, if you choose fret 4 and then turn off strings 1 and 2, the text in the score would say "Partial capo: Fret 4 on strings 3, 4, 5, 6".

    Customizing capo text appearance

    To change the wording of the Capo text:

    1. Check the Manually specify instruction text box in the popup dialog.

    2. Type the text you want to appear in the score.

    To place the capo text beneath the staff:

    • Under Position, select Below.

    Changing capo setting mid-score

    Using the steps above, you can, if desired, vary the capo setting at different points in the score. Each capo instance will affect the transposition of all music that follows it, up until the next capo mark.

    Note: It is not possible to apply more than one capo at the same time. This feature is planned for a later release.

    below
  • Select the starting note of the tie

  • Press T or click the tie icon in the toolbar.

  • The tie will be drawn to all valid locations where there is a note of the same pitch to connect to. It is entirely possible for there to be more than one endpoint for a tie, so several segments may appear.

    In the example, adding a tie to the A in the first-time measure will create a partial tie from the note to the end repeat barline, and a partial tie from the start repeat barline to the A in the first measure.

    Adding a tie to the F in the first measure will create a 'normal' tie to the next note, but will also create a partial tie to the F in the second-time measure. This is an example of a tie that has multiple endpoints. If you select such a tie, you will see a popup which lists the places the tie connects to:

    You can select or deselect items in this list and the tie segments will appear or disappear accordingly. You can also select the partial tie segment at any endpoint and delete it.

    Slurs

    Slurs can span any range of notes, rather than only connecting adjacent notes, so MuseScore cannot create these 'automatically' for you. Therefore, you must add the individual segments manually.

    To add a slur segment:

    1. Select the two endpoints of the slur by clicking one and then Ctrl+clicking (macOS: Cmd+click) the other. One endpoint must be a note and the other endpoint must be a repeat barline or a barline which has a jump on it (D.C., D.S., etc.)

    2. Press S or click the slur icon in the toolbar.

    If you have a slur which starts on the first note after a jump, or which ends on the last note before a jump, and you want to move the endpoint next to the jump into the 'hanging' position, you can do this by selecting that endpoint and pressing Shift+Alt+Left/Right (macOS: Shift+Option+Left/Right).

    Lyric lines

    Lyric extension lines and dashes can also be added across jumps; like slurs, the individual parts need to be input manually.

    For general information on inputting lyrics, see Lyrics.

    To add a partial lyric line after a repeat or jump:

    1. Select the first note after the repeat or jump

    2. Type Ctrl+L (macOS: Cmd+L) to enter lyric entry mode

    3. Type _ for an extension line or - for a dashed line (without any other characters before); the line will be drawn starting just after the barline. Repeat the keypress to extend the line across more notes if necessary.

    To delete a partial lyric line of this type, simply select it and press Del. Only partial lines like this (with no preceding syllable) can be selected in this way. Normal lyric lines are dependents of the syllable that precedes them, and cannot be selected directly.

    Lyric lines going into a repeat or jump are added in the 'normal' way during lyric entry: once you get to the last note before a jump, which may either have a syllable on it or have a continuation of a lyric line that started before, simply type _ or - and the line will be drawn up until the repeat or jump.

    A partial lyric line of this type can be selected in order to delete it (press Del). This is in contrast to normal lyric lines, which are dependents of the syllable that precedes them.

    In the example at the top of the page, the lyrics are entered in the following way (these can be done in any order):

    • Select the first A, enter lyric entry mode and type _ once; this creates a partial lyric line starting from the repeat barline

    • Select the first F, enter lyric entry mode and type jump then_ three times; the third press extends the lyric line to the repeat barline

    • Select the second F, enter lyric entry mode and type _ twice.

    Before
    After
    Clef, key and time signature changes

    Changes that apply to both the repeat/jump and the subsequent bar: sometimes a change of clef, key or time signature applies both to the destination of a jump (an end repeat barline or a 'to Coda', for example) and also when continuing on. There are two options for now to notate this:

    • if the option is checked: only show the change once, before the repeat/jump

    • if the option is unchecked: show the change after the repeat/jump, but allow for a courtesy change to also be shown before the repeat/jump. Whether a courtesy is actually shown or not, and whether it is parenthesised if it does, depends on the courtesy settings (see below).

    You can configure this behaviour separately for repeats and for all other types of jump. These examples show illustrate a repeat:

    option checked
    option unchecked

    If you turn off Show at repeats under Courtesies, below, the courtesy will disappear, resulting in the change only appearing after the jump:

    option unchecked and courtesies disabled

    Changes that apply only after repeats and jumps are for when the change only applies when continuing. However, some styles prefer to keep clefs before the barline (in their 'usual' position) even when this applies. For that reason the options Place clefs before repeats and Place clefs after repeats (the default) are provided.

    Finally, Allow changes between end-start repeats will, when checked, allow an end-start repeat barline to be split into an end-repeat and start-repeat, with the changes placed between, if the changes do not apply when going back to the start of the repeat. (Clefs may still go before the end-repeat if Place clefs before repeats is selected.)

    Courtesies

    It is possible to display courtesies before any jump as an indication that the clef, key signature and/or time signature is different at the destination of the jump.

    There are four toggles which form two pairs of options:

    • Show at repeats: show cautionaries, where necessary, before a repeat barline (to indicate that the clef, key or time signature is different back the start of the repeated section)

    • Show at all other jumps: show cautionaries, where necessary, before all other types of jump (e.g. D.C., D.S., To Coda, etc.)

    • Show when cancelling a courtesy before repeats: if a courtesy is shown before a repeat, but it does not also apply after the repeat, show a cautionary to 'cancel' the preceding cautionary

    • Show when cancelling a courtesy before all other jumps: the same as the previous option, but for all other types of jump.

    Each of these toggles also has a Use parentheses checkbox which specifies whether the cautionaries should be enclosed in parentheses. Where several cautionary items appear in the same place (it is possible to have a clef, key signature and time signature all at once), a single pair of parentheses will enclose all the items.

    The Small parentheses option specifies that the parentheses should be drawn to just enclose the height of the items within them (the preview images use this style). If unchecked, the parentheses will be drawn from 1sp below the staff to 1sp above.

    Break a multimeasure rest
    Play count
    Measure properties
    Measure properties
    Cutaway staves

    Clefs

    Clefs are applied to the score from the Clefs palette.

    Setting the initial clef for a staff

    MuseScore automatically applies the most appropriate clef(s) for the instrument when creating a new score. You can easily change this from the score window if needed.

    To change the clef at the very beginning of the score:

    1. Select the initial clef or the first measure

    2. Click the desired clef in the Clefs palette

    Or, drag the clef from the palette onto the first measure of the score (not onto a specific note within the bar).

    Adding a clef change

    To add a clef change anywhere in the score:

    1. Select a note, rest or measure (except for the very first measure)

    2. Click the desired clef in the Clefs palette

    Or, drag the clef from the palette onto a note, rest or measure (except the very first measure).

    It is sometimes desirable to have a clef change immediately after the initial clef, appearing after the time signature before the first note. This is achieved by applying a clef change to the very first note or rest of the score.

    Note that when adding a clef change, any existing music that follows will be repositioned to maintain the same pitches in the new clef.

    Deleting a clef change

    To delete a clef change, select it and press Del.

    Note that initial clefs and clefs at the beginning of systems cannot be deleted.

    Controlling the visibility of clefs

    Most commonly, the prevailing clef is repeated at the start of each new system, except for tab clefs, which normally appear only once at the start.

    This behaviour can be controlled via options in the Style dialog (Format -> Style) in the Clefs, key & time signatures section under Clefs -> Visibility.

    For non-tab clefs, you can choose between the two options:

    • Show all clefs on every system (the default)

    • Hide all clefs after the first system where they appear: only show at their first appearance

    For tab clefs there is a separate checkbox, Hide tab clefs after the first system where they appear, which is checked by default.

    To hide all clefs on a particular staff:

    1. Right-click on the staff

    2. Choose Staff/Part properties... from the menu

    3. In the dialog, uncheck Show clef.

    Courtesy clefs

    Where a clef change falls at the very beginning of a system, the change is shown at the end of the previous system where it is called a 'courtesy' (or 'cautionary').

    To configure whether courtesy clefs should be shown:

    1. From the menu, select Format -> Style and choose Clefs, keys & time signatures

    2. Under Clefs, toggle the Show courtesy clefs checkbox.

    If courtesy clefs are enabled, you can still hide an individual courtesy clef as follows:

    1. Select the clef

    2. In the Properties panel, uncheck Show courtesy clef on previous system.

    To control what happens around repeats and jumps, see .

    Clefs and transposition

    Using octave clefs

    [To be added]

    Using different clefs for transposed and concert pitch

    [To be added]

    Clef position relative to barlines

    When a clef applies from the first note of a measure, the clef is usually drawn before the barline by default, except in certain cases around repeat barlines.

    To change the position of a clef relative to the barline:

    1. Select the clef

    2. In the Properties panel, under Position relative to barline, choose Before or After.

    A clef change which occurs at the same place as a repeat or jump, but which only applies to the music after the repeat or jump (i.e. when continuing, not jumping), is normally placed after the barline. To configure this:

    1. Open the Style dialog (Format -> Style)

    2. Choose Clefs, key & time signatures

    3. Under Clefs, key & time signatures at repeats and jumps then Changes that apply only after repeats and jumps, choose between Place clefs before repeats and Place clefs after repeats.

    In the special case of such a change occurring at the same point as an end-start repeat barline, the change can be placed between the end repeat and start repeat. To enable or disable this behaviour, toggle the Allow changes between end-start repeats checkbox.

    Clef style

    There are some more global style settings for clefs available in the style dialog (Format -> Style):

    • In Sizes, under Cue sizes:

      • Small clef size is the size used for cautionary clefs and clef changes

    • In Clefs, key & time signatures:

    Ornaments

    Ornaments and ornament lines can be applied from the Ornaments palette. If it is not already displayed in the palettes area, see Adding more palettes. Available ornaments include turns, (short) trills, and mordents, are discussed here. See Other lines for ornament lines available including (long) trill lines, upprall, downprall, prallprall.

    Adding an ornament to your score

    Add an ornament

    To add an ornament to the score:

    1. Select one or more notes

    2. Click on the desired ornament in the Ornaments palette.

    For a trill only, it is possible to use a instead at step 2.

    Add an ornament line

    See main chapter of ornament lines .

    The procedure for applying ornament lines is just like any other line, i.e.

    1. Select a start note

    2. Press Shift and click on an end note

    3. Click on an ornament line in the Ornaments palette.

    If you subsequently need to adjust the ornament's length, see .

    Changing ornament intervals (adding accidentals)

    Ornaments are aware of the key signature and of other accidentals in the bar. By default, trills, turns, mordents and other ornaments will display and play diatonic intervals. Use the Properties panel to change the interval, displaying the appropriate accidentals in the score and changing playback.

    To change the interval of an ornament:

    1. Select an ornament

    2. Open the Properties panel

    3. Use the interval selectors to choose the desired interval. The score will display the appropriate accidentals for the chosen interval.

    Trills can be customized by quality (major, minor, augmented, etc.) and interval number from unison to octave. The appropriate accidental or upper auxiliary note will display in the score above or below the ornament. For intervals larger than a second, consider using a .

    Both the upper and lower interval can be set for turns.

    Short trill and mordent intervals can be set to the minor or major second.

    Any accidentals introduced only by an ornament must be confirmed or cancelled later in the measure for clarity, meaning it is not possible to delete accidentals where the note:

    • is after and in the same measure as an ornament with accidentals

    • as the same pitch class as a note with an accidental specified by the ornament (excluding the base note)

    For example, in a measure starting with a chromatic turn on A as seen below, all Gs and Bs later in the measure will have an accidental, even if it is the same as what appears in the ornament.

    While these accidentals cannot be deleted, they can be made invisible. To do so:

    1. Select the accidental

    2. Open the Properties panel

    3. Uncheck Visible.

    Ornament properties

    The following properties of selected ornaments can be edited from the Ornament section of the Properties panel:

    Accidental visibility

    • Default: only show accidentals that have not shown up yet in the measure, or which are not in the key signature

    • Show any alteration: show accidentals again even if they have appeared earlier in the measure (and they are not in the key signature)

    • Always display an accidental: show an accidental regardless of the context.

    Placement

    Use the placement controls to either let MuseScore Studio automatically choose the standard placement, or manually select above or below.

    Accidental properties

    Any accidentals that appear on ornaments can be selected independently and have an option for Bracket type (None, round or square) available in the Properties panel.

    Ornament style

    Default sizing and spacing properties for ornaments can be edited in Format -> Style under Articulations & ornaments:

    Ornaments can be individually repositioned by clicking and dragging in the score or via the Appearance dialog in the Properties panel.

    The Trill cue note setting lets you specify when a bracketed cue-size note should be shown to indicate the trill interval. By default these are only shown for intervals greater than a second; if you want them on trills of a second too, choose Show for all intervals.

    Alternate string tunings

    This page describes features added in MuseScore 4.2. For string tuning in older versions of MuseScore 4, see Customizing a tablature staff.

    Applying string tuning instructions

    To apply a string tuning instruction to a stave:

    1. Go to the Guitar palette

    2. Click and drag the String tunings element to a measure

    A tuning fork icon will appear above your stave.

    Alternatively, first select a measure, then select the String tunings element in the Guitar palette.

    String tuning instructions are added to measures, and affect only the stave to which they have been applied (including any linked staves). You can apply multiple string tunings at different measures in your score. Each string tuning will apply from the start of the measure to which it has been added, up until the next string tuning element.

    Specifying string tunings

    Once you've added a string tuning element to a stave, you can specify the tuning you want for your instrument.

    1. Select the tuning fork icon (outlined in the steps above)

    2. In the widget that appears, choose from the many common tunings in the Preset dropdown

    The tuning fork icon will be replaced with the conventional tuning text instruction, comprising encircled numbers for each of the instrument's strings, and text designations showing the new pitch of each string.

    You can customise the string tuning text to display any number of strings, as well as any pitch you like:

    1. Click on the string tuning text

    2. In the widget that appears, toggle on or off the 'eye' icon to show or hide instrument strings

    3. Adjust the pitch of each string using up and down arrows in the text boxes alongside each string

    Note that the 'eye' icons merely show or hide the text instruction on the score. The actual tuning of each string, insofar as it affects playback and tablature fret positions (see more below), is determined by the pitch indicated in the text field alongside each string – regardless of whether that string's tuning instruction is shown or hidden in the score.

    Alternate tunings affect tablature fret positions

    When an alternate tuning element is applied to a stave, the pitch specified for each string will be shown as an open position ("0") in the tablature stave.

    During playback, the pitch of all fret positions along each string remains relative to the pitch of the open string: For example,

    • If the sixth string is tuned to E, the open position will sound like an E during playback, and the first fret will sound like an F;

    • If the sixth string is tuned down to a D, the open position will sound like a D during playback, and the first fret will sound like an E-flat.

    The notation on any linked standard stave remains unaffected by the presence of alternate string tunings. This allows the player to continue reading the sounding pitches of each string.

    Reading transposed pitches on the standard stave

    Sometimes, especially in cases where every string on the instrument has been uniformly tuned down, it will be preferable for the player to read the standard notation at the ‘regular‘ (i.e. pre-tuned) pitch rather than the sounding pitch. In order to achieve this, the standard stave can be transposed.

    1. Right-click on a measure in the standard stave

    2. Select Stave/Part properties...

    3. In the Transposition dropdown menu, select your desired transposition amount.

    A common example is to want to tune the guitar down a half-step without affecting the standard notation. To achieve this:

    1. Apply an alternate string tuning element to your stave (see steps above)

    2. Select the Tune down 1/2 step preset

    3. Where required, add a key signature that corresponds to the pitch of the song/work (I.e. its concert pitch)

    4. Right-click on a measure and choose Stave/Part properties...

    Both the standard stave and any linked tablature stave (where applicable) will show the fret positions and standard notation at the standard playing pitch (as if no alternate tuning had been specified). Playback will, however, reflect the alternate tuning.

    Toggling on Concert pitch will show the sounding pitches notated on the standard stave.

    [Draft only: more content forthcoming]

    Working with multiple voices

    Overview

    In notation, a voice is a single line of music on a staff. It is possible to notate more than one voice, with independent rhythms, on a single staff. Two voices on the same staff are normally indicated using opposing stems – an upper voice with stems up and a lower voice with stems down:

    In a four-part SATB arrangement on two staves, you would use voices 1 and 2 on the top staff for soprano and alto, and voices 1 and 2 on the bottom staff for tenor and bass:

    The default voice when starting note entry is voice 1. When you need a second voice, normally this will be voice 2. Voices 3 and 4 are less frequently used, but are sometimes necessary in complex polyphonic music or for the inner parts in dense keyboard textures.

    Entering music in multiple voices

    The principles of entering notes and rests are the same regardless of which voice you are in (see ).

    Each voice has its own color in the UI. The note entry cursor changes color to reflect the current voice, and notes and rests (and many other items) will be highlighted in the color of their respective voice when you select them. This is useful when inputting and editing as it gives you an immediate visual indicator of the voice the music belongs to.

    You can change each voice's color in Preferences -> Advanced.

    While you are in note entry mode, you can switch to a different voice by clicking one of the voice selection buttons in the top toolbar:

    You can also use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl+Alt+1–4.

    By default, only the buttons for voices 1 and 2 are shown in the toolbar. To use the others, first reveal them by clicking the cog button in the toolbar and then clicking the eye button next to Voice 3 and Voice 4 in the menu.

    If you select a note or rest before entering note entry mode, you will enter note entry mode in the same voice as that note or rest.

    Editing music in multiple voices

    Moving notes between voices

    To move notes or rests to another voice:

    1. Select the notes you’d like to move (individually, or as a list or range).

    2. Click the button for the voice in which you’d like them to be moved.

    You can also use the shortcuts Ctrl+Alt+1–4 (Win) or Cmd+Alt+1–4 (Mac).

    You can move any number of notes, even from multiple voices at once, into a voice. If there are notes at the same position with the same rhythm they will combine into chords. If there are differing rhythms, some notes may be left in their original voice as MuseScore Studio will not be able to know what you intend.

    Exchanging voices

    You can swap the music of any pair of voices by selecting one of the options from Tools -> Voices (e.g. Exchange voice 1-2). This only works with range selections, and on whole measures (or ranges of measures). If only part of a measure is included in the range, the whole measure will be swapped.

    Adjusting rests

    It is often necessary to remove redundant rests in secondary voices. This can be done in two ways:

    • Hiding the rest, by selecting it and unchecking Visible in Properties (or using the shortcut V).

    • Deleting the rest, by selecting it and pressing Del.

    Voice 1 is the 'reference' voice and must remain rhythmically complete. As such, rests in voice 1 can be hidden, but not deleted.

    In a single voice, rests appear in the middle of the staff, but in multiple voices, rests for voice 1 are moved up at least one space and rests for voice 2 are moved down at least one space. This offset helps to show which voice they belong to. In practice, they are usually displaced further out to avoid colliding with notation in the other voice.

    Where there are rests of the same duration in more than one voice simultaneously, MuseScore Studio can merge them together automatically:

    The behavior of rests in multiple voices can be controlled using these options in Format -> Style -> Rests:

    • Default vertical offset: Choose between 1 space and 2 spaces for the initial displacement of rests when in multiple voices.

    • Merge matching rests: Merge rests of the same duration that occur simultaneously in more than one voice (see image above).

    These options affect all staves in the scores. If you want to turn rest merging on or off for specific staves, you can do this via :

    1. Right-click the staff and choose Staff/Part properties from the menu.

    2. Change Merge matching rests to On or Off. The default, Auto, will follow the score-wide setting.

    'Merged' rests are actually overlaid on top of each other, but they are all still there. If you want to see more than one rest in a specific place you can achieve this by moving them manually.

    Rests can also be moved manually like other items. Just select a rest and press Up or Down, or change Properties -> Appearance -> Offset.

    Stem direction

    When music is in a single voice, the direction of stems varies according to the vertical positions of the notes (see ). When there is more than one voice, all music in voices 1 and 3 will have stems up, and all music in voices 2 and 4 will have stems down.

    You can still change the stem direction of any notes by selecting them and pressing X (or pressing the Flip direction button in the note input toolbar).

    When there are simultaneous notes on one staff in different voices but which have the same stem direction, MuseScore will combine them together so that it looks like they form a single chord, with a shared stem:

    This is achieved by offsetting certain notes and overlaying the stems, but it is still actually two chords. If you want a different arrangement, it can be difficult to undo this. Therefore you can turn this behavior off by unchecking Format -> Style -> Combine voices that share the same stem direction. This will, instead, simply overlay the two chords directly over each other:

    This is not very beautiful, but it is a much simpler starting point from which you can manually offset the voices the way you need them, like this:

    You can also control this for specific chords in the score via Properties (under Note -> Head -> Show more):

    Playback

    Note that it is not currently possible to assign different sounds or VSTs to different voices within the same instrument. If you need to do this, they must be separate instruments.

    Showing staves only where needed

    By default, a score will show all measures of all staves on all pages throughout the score, whether they are empty or not. However, you may wish to have certain staves appear only on systems where they are needed. You may even wish to have a staff appear or disappear mid-system. MuseScore Studio provides a number of controls for this purpose.

    To hide a certain instrument or staff entirely throughout a score, use the Layout panel: see Hiding instruments and staves.

    Hiding staves when they are empty for an entire system

    A staff is considered 'empty' if there are no notes or other markings (with a small few exceptions) on it for an entire system. It is a common practice in many printed ensemble and orchestral scores to hide these empty staves in order to save space:

    Hiding all empty staves

    To hide or unhide all empty staves in the current score automatically:

    1. Ensure that nothing in your score is selected (press Esc if necessary)

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Under Score appearance, click the eye icon next to Empty staves.

    This same toggle is available in Format -> Style -> Score as Hide empty staves within systems:

    It is common, though not universal, to show all staves on the first system of a score even if they are hidden on subsequent ones (in this way, the first page will always show the complete instrumentation). If you wish to hide empty staves even on the first system, untick the Don't hide empty staves in first system toggle.

    If Show brackets when spanning a single staff is unchecked, brackets and braces will be hidden when all but one the staves of a bracketed group are hidden on a system. Check this box if you want these brackets to remain visible.

    Excluding specific staves from being hidden

    The setting just described (Empty staves) applies to all staves in a score, but you can override this setting for specific staves:

    1. Right-click the staff

    2. Select Staff/Part properties

    3. In the dialog that opens, select an option from the Hide when empty dropdown:

      • Auto: follow the score-wide setting (this is the default option)

    The Always setting can be useful for temporary staves, for example a cue staff which appears for a few bars or a third stave for a keyboard part required for a specific passage. See also , below.

    The Instrument option is useful where you have an instrument with multiple staves, such as a piano or harp, but you wish for all of its staves to be shown even if some of them are empty, for example if only the right hand is playing on a given system. In such a case, you probably want to select this option for all staves of the instrument. The instrument will still be hidden if all of its staves are empty.

    Choosing which staff to show when the entire system is empty

    Where all staves of a system are empty, and stave hiding is turned on, the topmost staff will be shown by default. If you wish to choose another staff (or staves) to show in this situation:

    1. Right-click the staff

    2. Select Staff/Part properties

    3. Check the Do not hide if system is empty box in the dialog.

    Note that this setting works independently of all the other settings described here, and only applies when the entire system is empty.

    Hiding empty measures

    Cutaway staves

    There is a style used in some contemporary scores where individual measures are hidden when they are empty. These are sometimes called cutaway staves.

    To use this style for a specific stave:

    1. Right-click the staff

    2. Select Staff/Part properties

    3. Check the Cutaway box in the dialog.

    Note that this hides the staff on a per-measure basis. Even if all measures on the system are empty, vertical space is still reserved for the staff, unless staff hiding is turned on, and the instrument label and brackets may still be shown. To prevent this from happening, it is a good idea to also set Hide when empty to Always for cutaway staves.

    If you wish to use cutaway style for all staves in the score, you need to set it for each staff individually, but this process can be sped up by using the arrow buttons in the Staff/Part properties dialog:

    1. Right-click the topmost staff in the score

    2. Select Staff/part properties

    3. Check the Cutaway box in the dialog

    4. Press the Apply button

    Hiding specific measures

    MuseScore also allows you to make individual measures invisible on any given staff, whether empty or not.

    To set a measure to be invisible on a given staff:

    1. Right-click the measure

    2. Select Measure properties

    3. In the dialog that appears, uncheck the Visible box for the staff or staves in which you wish the measure to be made invisible.

    Note that you cannot make a measure invisible on all staves – it must remain visible on at least one.

    Ossia

    An ossia is where a passage is notated on a small staff above or below the main staff to show an alternative (a different editorial reading, a realization of ornaments, a facilitation, etc.)

    These can be created in MuseScore Studio using a combination of the features described above:

    1. Add a staff as described in ; you may need to move it to the correct position relative to the main stave, and adjust any brackets that are automatically created

    2. Enter the desired notation on the new staff

    3. Right-click the staff

    4. Select Staff/Part properties

    If you wish to hear the ossia play back instead of the normal staff, select the corresponding measures on the normal staff and uncheck the Play box in the Properties panel. If you would rather hear the normal staff, do this for the ossia staff instead.

    You might also want to hide the initial or final barline for the passage. To do this, select the barline and press V or uncheck the Visible box in the Properties panel.

    You may also wish to decrease or fix the distance between the ossia and the normal staff. To do this, use a from the Layout palette.

    Inputting percussion notation

    This section describes note entry for unpitched percussion instruments. For pitched percussion instruments, see Entering notes and rests.

    Overview

    In MuseScore Studio, each unpitched percussion instrument, including combination instruments like drum kits and mixed percussion, comes preconfigured for seamless notation and playback.

    This means that when you add an instrument – whether it be a single cow bell, or a complete drum kit – the notation for each sub-instrument in the kit (bass drum, snare drum, cymbals, etc.), as well as any techniques and variants (hits, rim shots, rim knocks, etc.) is configured automatically. MuseScore Studio takes care of the number of stave lines for the kit, as well as the shape and placement of all noteheads on the stave. What's more, the correct sound is automatically assigned in playback for MS Basic and MuseSounds libraries.

    If you have unique notation requirements, there are of course options to customize the mapping for each instrument (See ).

    Adding a percussion instrument to your score

    You can add a percussion instrument just like any other instrument (see and the ).

    Each unpitched percussion instrument comes with a pre-configured set of sub-instruments, as well as variants and techniques that are determined by the sound library chosen in the mixer.

    In addition to individual orchestral percussion instruments and marching drumlines, MuseScore Studio comes with several combo kits that combine many common sub-instruments onto one stave. These include:

    • Drum kits (common, minimal, large)

    • Mixed percussion

    • General MIDI percussion

    It is possible to customize the stave of any existing unpitched instrument with a unique combination of sub-instruments, although playback support may not always be available. To learn more, see .

    Inputting notes and rests on percussion staves

    There are several ways to enter notation on a percussion stave. We'll cover each one in turn. These are:

    • Using the percussion input panel

    • Input by mouse directly on the stave

    • Keyboard shortcuts

    • Input via MIDI keyboard

    Using the percussion input panel

    To open the percussion input panel:

    • Select the stave of an unpitched percussion instrument, or

    • Select a note or rest on an unpitched percussion stave

    The percussion panel appears at the bottom of the app window. It shows all sub-instruments and variants available on the selected stave, as determined by the sound library assigned in the mixer for that instrument:

    To input notation using the percussion input panel, click on any of the drum pads. Notation will be entered at the note input cursor position, regardless of the voice to which the selected sub-instrument or variant is assigned.

    Write mode will be enabled by default. This means that any click on a drum pad will input notation directly on the stave.

    To hear the sound of instruments assigned to a drum pad without inputting notation:

    1. Click the Preview button in the percussion panel header

    2. Click on a drum pad to hear its sound

    3. Click the Write button again to resume notation

    See for more.

    Input by mouse directly on the stave

    To input percussion notation directly on the stave with your mouse:

    1. Select the stave where you want to input notation

    2. Enter

    3. Hover your mouse pointer over the stave to see a preview note for the instrument or variant assigned to that stave position

    4. (Optional) Hold Shift while hovering to see a popup that labels the instrument at each stave position. Where left/right arrows appear in the popup, click on them to scroll through the available variants at the same stave space or line.

    The preview note shows whatever instrument or variant is available at the stave position where your mouse pointer is hovering. When you move your mouse, the preview note will change to show whatever is available at each new position.

    Keyboard shortcuts

    You can assign a keyboard shortcut to each pad in the percussion panel.

    By default, the first row of pads will take the keys A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H. Any key can be assigned to a pad, although you'll be prompted if your chosen key conflicts with another shortcut command.

    To assign a keyboard shortcut to a drum pad:

    1. Click the bottom grey options section of a drum pad (or navigate to it using the Tab key)

    2. Select Define keyboard shortcut

    Using a MIDI controller

    To add notes to an unpitched percussion stave using a :

    1. Select a note, rest, or measure

    2. Select a

    3. Press a key on your MIDI keyboard to input a note

    4. (Optional) Press 0 to enter a rest of the selected duration

    Notation will be entered on the stave in whatever note input mode has been set as the default in Preferences. For more information on using different note input modes, see .

    Each drum pad on the percussion panel displays the MIDI key assigned to each available sub-instrument or variant. Note that these will change depending on the sound library assigned to that instrument in the mixer.

    Using the on-screen piano keyboard

    To add notes to an unpitched percussion stave using MuseScore Studio's on-screen piano keyboard:

    1. Open the piano keyboard by going to View > Piano keyboard (or use the shortcut P)

    2. Select a measure, note, or rest

    3. Select a

    4. Click a key on the on-screen piano keyboard with your mouse

    Applying additional techniques and variants

    Many sound libraries come with additional techniques and variants that can extend the performance of your instruments. For example, snares can be set to on or off, or different implements can be used, including sticks, brushes, and hot rods.

    These are added using . Note that this feature is currently only available for selected MuseSounds libraries. Options will vary depending on the chosen sound library.

    Learn more about

    Customizing a tablature staff

    Changing tuning

    1. Right-click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties…

    2. Press the Edit String Data… button at the bottom of the dialog box. This opens the String Data dialog:\

    3. Under Strings tuning, click on a string pitch and select Edit String…; Alternatively, just double-click the string pitch.

    4. Select a new pitch in the Note Selection box and click OK. Alternatively, just double-click the new pitch.

    5. Click OK to close the “String Data” dialog box.

    6. Click OK to close the Staff/Part Properties dialog.

    Notes: (1) If the tuning is changed on a tab staff that already contains some notes, fret marks will be adjusted automatically (if possible); (2) Any change of tuning to a particular instrument applies only to the score at hand, and does not change any program default settings.

    Adding or removing strings

    Add a string

    1. Right-click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties…

    2. Click on Edit String Data…

    3. Click on a string pitch and select New String…

    4. Select the new pitch and press

    The new string is inserted below the selected string. You will also need to adjust the number of lines in .

    Delete a string

    1. Right-click on the staff, select Staff/Part Properties…

    2. Click on Edit String Data…

    3. Click on a string pitch and press Delete String.

    Note: After deleting a tablature string you will also need to adjust the number of lines in .

    Mark unfretted string “open”

    For an instrument such as the Baroque lute, this feature is used to mark a bass course as unstopped—i.e. always played open like a harp string. This means that only a fret mark indicating a zero fret can be displayed.

    To mark a bass course as unstopped:

    1. Right-click on the staff, and select Staff/Part Properties...

    2. Click on Edit String Data…

    3. Check the required boxes in the Open column.

    See also .

    Change number of instrument frets

    This property defines the maximum fret number which can be entered on a tablature staff.

    1. Right-click on the staff, and select Staff/Part Properties…

    2. Click on Edit String Data…

    3. Select or enter a new number using the “Number of frets” spinner.

    Changing tablature staff type

    MuseScore provides a range of common tablature types. If you want to change the tablature type, choose one of two options:

    Change staff type from the Layout panel

    1. Ensure that the Layout panel is visible (toggle F7).

    2. Click on the arrow next to the instrument name to reveal the staves.

    3. Click on the edit cog next to the desired staff and choose an option from the "Staff type" dropdown.

    Change staff type from Staff/Part properties

    1. Right-click onto an empty area of the staff and select Staff/Part Properties….

    2. Click on Advanced Style properties, select the desired option from "Template", then press < Reset to Template. You can fine tune the display if necessary using the "Fret Marks" and "Note Values" tabs.

    3. Click OK twice to exit.

    Note: For customization options in detail, see (below).

    You will find the terms "simple", "common" and "full" in the tablature type names:

    • Simple: Displays just fretmarks.

    • Common: Displays fretmarks, rests, stems and beams.

    • Full: Displays fretmarks; rests, stems and beams, half-note stems.

    Customizing appearance of tablature

    Tablature staff properties

    1. Right click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties…

    2. Click on Advanced Style Properties….

    This gives you access to a full range of tablature customization options. See .

    Tablature staff style

    Global settings are set in Format→Style→Tablature styles.\

    Implode and explode

    Overview

    The Implode command is used to take multiple voices or staves and combine them into one. The Explode command, its opposite, is used to take a single voice or staff and decombine it into several. These commands can be very useful when arranging, and can also save time when inputting.

    Implode

    The Implode command allows you to do either of the following:

    • Combine multiple voices on the same staff into one voice

    • Combine multiple staves containing single voices into separate voices on one staff.

    Combine notes from multiple voices in a single staff into one voice

    1. Select a range of measures in a single staff, where there are multiple voices

    2. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Implode.

    All selected notes in the staff are now combined in voice 1. For this to work, all simultaneous notes in different voices need to have the same duration.

    Combine notes from multiple staves into separate voices on one staff

    1. Ensure that there is only one voice in each staff to be imploded

    2. Select a range of measures in the top staff and extend this selection downwards to include up to four staves

    3. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Implode.

    Imploding multiple staves always works upwards, i.e. the topmost staff of the selection is the destination of the combined result. The notes from the uppermost staff of the selection that contains any music will go to voice 1, those from the next staff down to voice 2, and so on. Empty staves are skipped. The lower staves are not automatically cleared.

    Explode

    Explode allows you to do either of the following:

    • Separate multiple voices on one staff into single voices each on their own staff

    • Separate a passage of chords in one voice into single notes on multiple staves

    The two cannot be mixed in a single operation. If the passage contains multiple voices at any point, this will take precedence and it will be split into voices, but chords will remain intact.

    Unlike Implode, Explode will only work on whole measures. If you select part of a measure, the entire measure will be processed.

    This result will be notated on multiple staves, so there are some things to be aware of:

    • Exploding always works downwards, so the result will be notated starting on the stave containing the selected passage and on the staves directly below it. You may therefore need to move the passage to the topmost destination stave before exploding it, or may need to create extra staves to make space, because material may be lost if there are not enough staves available

    • Any existing music on destination staves will be overwritten.

    Separate multiple voices on one staff into single voices

    To separate multiple voices on one staff into single voices each on their own staff:

    1. Select the passage you want to explode

    2. If you wish, extend the selection downwards to include the destination staves desired

    3. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Explode.

    Step 2 is usually not necessary. If you select only the passage on the source stave, MuseScore will determine how many staves are required, which is equal to the number of voices in the passage which contain notes. Empty voices will be skipped.

    If you do extend the selection, but select fewer staves than are required (or, if there are not enough staves available in the score), then MuseScore will only transfer as many voices as it can move to the available staves. For example, exploding a 3-voice passage onto two staves will move voice 2 to the lower stave, and then stop, leaving voices 1 and 3 on the upper stave.

    If you explicitly select more staves than are required, the extra lower staves will be left untouched.

    Separate a passage of chords in one voice into single notes

    To separate a passage of chords in one voice in to single notes on multiple staves:

    1. Select the passage you want to explode, ensuring it is all in a single voice throughout

    2. If you wish, extend the selection downwards to include the destination staves desired

    3. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Explode.

    If you select the passage on the source stave only, MuseScore will determine how many staves are required, which is equal to the largest number of notes in any single chord in the passage. If you explicitly select a range of staves, all the staves will receive notes.

    MuseScore explodes the chords one by one, following this logic:

    • If the number of notes in the chord matches the number of destination staves, the highest note goes to the topmost stave, the second highest note goes to the next stave down, and so on

    • If the number of notes in the chord is greater than the number of destination staves, the chord is split as above, but once the staves run out, any extra notes are lost

    • If the number of notes in the chord is less than the number of destination staves, then:

    Customizing the percussion panel

    You can customize the percussion panel in various ways to best suit your personal preferences and workflow requirements.

    View pad names or notation previews

    By default, the percussion panel shows the names of each sub-instrument and variant in your chosen instrument.

    To instead view a notation preview for each pad:

    1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header.

    2. Choose Notation preview.

    Hover over a pad with your mouse pointer to see a tooltip displaying the name of the instrument or variant assigned to that drum pad.

    To switch back to viewing pad names:

    1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header.

    2. Choose Pad names.

    Your choice of pad names or notation previews is saved to the score, so it won't affect the panel layout in other scores. Moreover, it applies to all unpitched percussion instruments in your score – not just the one you're working on.

    Move drum pads to different positions

    You can change the position of each drum pad to best suit your instrument setup or preferred layout.

    To change the position of a drum pad:

    1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header.

    2. Choose Edit layout. An outline appears around each pad position, indicating you can now edit the drum pad layout.

    3. Click and drag a drum pad to another position.

    4. Release your mouse click to drop the drum pad in its new position.

    You can also move pads to different positions using only your computer keyboard.

    1. Use Tab to focus on a drum pad

    2. Use the arrow keys to shift focus to your desired drum pad

    Delete drum pads

    You can delete drum pads you don't need in order to save on space.

    To delete a drum pad:

    1. Click the grey panel at the bottom of a drum pad (or navigate to it by pressing Tab and then Enter).

    2. Select Delete.

    When a drum pad is deleted, an empty space remains in its place. This can be used either as a spacer, or as the position for a different drum pad (see ).

    Add and remove rows

    Changing the number of percussion panel rows gives you more flexibility to arrange the drum pads in a way that best suits your project and workflow requirements.

    To add rows in the percussion panel:

    1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header.

    2. Choose Edit layout.

    3. Click Add row.

    Drum pads can be moved to empty spaces (see ).

    Rows that are manually added can be deleted by clicking the trash can button to the left of the row.

    Change the number of columns

    1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header.

    2. Hover over 8 columns (this might say another number if you've already customized this).

    3. Choose a new number of columns (4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 20, or 24).

    Save and reuse a custom pad layout

    Once you customize the percussion panel for a particular instrument in your score, you can save all layout changes and keyboard shortcuts to use again when using the same instrument and sound in this score or other scores.

    To save a custom layout:

    1. Make any desired customizations to the pad layout.

    2. Click Customize kit in the percussion panel header.

    3. Click Save as... in the dialog and save it to your computer. This creates a .drm file that you can load in any score.

    To load the saved layout on a different instrument:

    1. Select anything on a staff belonging to the instrument you want to load the saved percussion panel layout onto.

    2. Click Customize kit in the percussion panel header.

    3. Click Load... and then select the .drm file you created above.

    4. Click Apply

    Undock and resize the panel

    Like all panels, the percussion panel can be undocked and resized to create an optimal workspace for your project and setup.

    Learn more about and saving your preferred app layout as .

    Choose when to use the new percussion panel

    Depending on your screen size and the number of drum pads in the instruments you are using, you can choose to use the legacy percussion panel instead of the new one. The legacy panel will continue to be available until further features are added that will better optimize the new panel for large instruments.

    To use the legacy percussion panel:

    1. Open .

    2. Click on Percussion in the navigation panel.

    3. Toggle on Use legacy percussion panel.

    Note that any custom keyboard shortcuts assigned to percussion instruments will apply to both the new and legacy panels.

    Measure numbering

    Showing and hiding measure numbers

    By default, MuseScore shows measure numbers at the start of each system except for the first in a section.

    To turn measure numbers on or off for the whole score:

    1. Go to Format -> Style -> Measure numbers.

    2. Toggle Show measure numbers.

    To configure whether a number should be shown or hidden on a particular measure:

    1. Right-click the measure and choose Measure properties...

    2. Change Measure number mode to Always show or Always hide.

    The default setting for Measure number mode is Auto which means that a number will be shown or not according to the score's settings.

    You can also show a number on a specific measure by applying the 'Measure number' item from the Text palette (under More). This is equivalent to setting Measure number mode to Always show.

    To remove a number from a specific measure, you can select it and press Del. If this is an automatically generated number, this sets Measure number mode to Always hide. If it was an explicitly added measure number (and is not in a measure where a number would be generated anyway) this sets Measure number mode to Auto.

    Changing the measure number sequence

    There are ways to alter the sequence of numbers which can be useful in various circumstances. Note that this affect the visual numbering only. Internally, MuseScore Studio always numbers the bars consecutively through the whole score, starting at 1, and these are the numbers that will be shown in the status bar.

    Excluding a measure from the count

    1. Right-click the measure and choose Measure properties...

    2. Check Exclude from measure count.

    This option is automatically checked for pickup bars when one is specified in the New Score Wizard.

    Altering the numbering of a measure

    1. Right-click the measure and choose Measure properties...

    2. Change the value of Add to measure number.

    Both positive and negative values are accepted. This can be useful when starting a new movement in the same score. If the first movement is 100 bars long, the second will start at bar 101. If you set Add to measure number to -100 on the first bar of the second movement, it will now be numbered as bar 1.

    Resetting measure numbering for a new section

    By default, the numbering of measures always restarts from 1 at the beginning of a new section (after a section break). To prevent this so that the numbering is continuous:

    1. Select the section break.

    2. Go to the Properties panel.

    3. Uncheck Reset measure numbers for new section.

    See for more details.

    Measure number properties

    Measure numbers are text items, so the usual properties for text are available in the Properties panel under Text.

    It is important to note that measure numbers are usually automatically generated items, rather than explicitly entered by the user. As such, while it is possible to make adjustments to them via Properties, these changes may be lost if the layout of the score changes and the numbers are regenerated.

    Measure number style

    This section describes all the options available in Format -> Style... -> Measure numbers.

    Measure numbers

    The top section contains the most general settings:

    • Show measure numbers: Whether measure numbers should be shown at all.

    • Show initial measure number: Whether a number should be shown on measure 1 (unchecked by default).

    • Text style: Which text style to use for measure numbers. 'Measure number' is the default, but there is also a 'Measure number (alternate)' style provided so that you can quickly switch between two different styles. You can also choose any other style from the dropdown, or define your own.

    Frequency

    Here you can specify how often bar numbers should appear. Start of each system is the default.

    Position

    These options specify where the bar numbers should be placed.

    • Align: The numbers can be aligned (via the next setting) relative To the barline or To the measure.

    • Alignment: Left, center or right.

    • Show: At which positions the bar numbers should appear. Choose from:

    The At system marking positions option can be used if you need a more unusual configuration (for example, above certain sections of instruments, or above and below the system). See .

    Measure number range at multimeasure rests

    Here, you can determine if and how measure number ranges are shown next to multimeasure rests.

    • Show measure number ranges: Turn measure number ranges on or off.

    • Text style: Choose the text style used for the range text.

      • The Edit text style button takes you to the page in Text styles where the currently selected text style can be configured.

    Using GitBook

    Overview

    Organization

    User content on GitBook is always owned by an . In our case, that's .

    Barlines

    The Barlines contains a full range of common barlines.

    Adding double and other special barlines

    Editing notes and rests

    Overview

    After you have entered notes into your score, you may wish to change something about them - pitch, duration, time position, etc. MuseScore provides a number of commands for this purpose. Many of the most powerful commands are only available after you leave note input mode and return to normal mode, but there are a number of quick edits possible while still in note input mode.

    Beams

    Overview

    A beam is a line connecting consecutive notes to indicate rhythmic grouping of eighth or shorter notes (). You can change control the presence or absence of beams between notes as well as their appearance.

    Controlling which notes are beamed

    Properties panel

    The Properties panel shows settings for objects you select in the score. It was known as the “Inspector” in MuseScore 2 and 3.

    You can select one object (say, a dynamic mark) or multiple objects at a time (say, a dynamic mark, a notehead, and a hairpin). If any of the objects you have selected contains editable settings, Properties is the place to find them.

    An important thing about Properties is that by default it affects only the object(s) you have selected, so changing how one hairpin looks won’t change all of the hairpins in your score—only those you have selected. However, for most settings, you can .

    Accessing the Properties panel

    Pickup and non-metered measures

    Creating a pickup measure

    A pickup measure, also known as an upbeat or anacrusis, is a partial, or incomplete, measure at the beginning of a score or section.

    Note: By convention, measure numbering starts at the first complete measure.

    Pedal

    For Harp Pedal see instead.

    Types of pedal markings

    This chapter focuses on the types of piano pedal engraving available, for knowledge of various piano pedals see .

    Transposition

    Overview

    Transposition is the act of raising or lowering the pitch of a selection of notes by the same interval.

    In MuseScore, you can transpose your music using keyboard shortcuts, or via the Transpose dialog.

    Fretboard diagram legend

    Overview

    The fretboard diagram legend element is used to present a table of each unique in a given score along with corresponding guitar .

    This is useful for illustrating how to play all the chords in a score in one place without cluttering the notation itself with diagrams.

    From the Transposition dropdown menu, select 1 – Minor second

  • Select the Down radio button

  • Finally, if you are using a linked tablature stave and wish for the tablature fret positions to continue showing the expected standard fingering, select the Don't reflect transposition in linked tablature staves checkbox

  • When you're done, click OK.

  • Making changes in note input mode

    Immediately after entering a note or rest, it is selected, and there are a handful of commands that operate on the selected note or rest while in note input mode. These commands also work if you use the cursor keys to navigate to a previously-entered note or rest.

    Changing duration in note input mode

    There are two commands that alter the duration of an existing note or rest while in note input mode:

    • Shift+W increases the duration

    • Shift+Q decreases the duration.

    Both commands will first add or remove a dot if appropriate, then will move to the next larger or smaller note value. So for instance, pressing Shift+W on a quarter note changes it into a dotted quarter, and pressing Shift+W again changes it to a half note.

    Changing pitch in note input mode

    The commands for changing the pitch of a selected note while in note input mode are:

    • Up - move pitch up a semitone (spells with sharps)

    • Down - move pitch down a semitone (spells with flats)

    • Alt+Shift+Up - move pitch up a step diatonically

    • Alt+Shift+Down - move pitch down a step diatonically

    • Ctrl+Up (Mac: Cmd+Up) - move pitch up an octave

    • Ctrl+Down (Mac: Cmd+Down) - move pitch down an octave.

    Replacing notes and rests in note input mode

    Most note input in MuseScore Studio is in what a word processor might call "replace" or "overwrite" mode. This means that if you wish to replace a note with a different one, you don't need to delete the old note first—just enter the new one directly, and it automatically overwrites what was there before.

    Note: sometimes you may wish to add a new note and move some of the subsequent notes later to make room. In MuseScore, this is done by moving the subsequent notes directly using cut and paste.

    Deleting notes in note input mode

    To delete a note and replace it with a rest, simply press Del.

    Note: if you instead wish to move subsequent notes earlier to take the place of the deleted note, there is no need to first delete the original note - simply move the subsequent notes directly using cut and paste.

    Moving notes in note input mode

    Although for the most part, moving notes to a different time position is done in normal mode, there is one pair of commands that can be used to change the time position of a note or rest in certain cases while in note input. If you have two notes or rests of the same duration and you wish to exchange them while in note input mode, you can use Shift+Left or Shift+Right to exchange a note or rest with its neighbor of the same duration.

    Making changes in normal mode

    Most changes one might want to make to notes and rests already entered are more easily performed in normal mode—the mode you are in when you leave note input or any other mode.

    Except where noted, the methods described below work on either a single selected note or rest, a list selection consisting of multiple notes or rests, or entire range selections. See the page on selections for more information.

    Changing duration in normal mode

    Changing selected notes to a specific note value

    To change the duration of one or more selected notes in normal mode to a specific note value, simply click the appropriate duration icon or use the keyboard shortcuts 1–9.

    Increasing or decreasing the duration of a selected note

    To increase the duration of a selected note, you can use the Shift+W command as described above. This adds an augmentation dot if one is not already present, or changes to the next longer note value if the note is already dotted. For example, an eighth note will be changed into a dotted eighth note, and a dotted quarter will be changed into a half note. You can also use W to double the duration, thus changing an eighth note into a quarter note directly, or a dotted eighth into a dotted quarter.

    The commands Shift+Q and Q perform the opposite operation, decreasing or halving the duration in the same way.

    All of these commands work on only a single selected note.

    Doubling or halving all note values in a range selection

    If you have entered a passage using eighths and sixteenths but wish to double the durations of all notes and rests—thus doubling the duration of the passage itself—see the section on the paste half/double duration commands.

    Changing pitch in normal mode

    The same commands that work to change pitch in note input also function in normal mode, including single, list, and range selections. These commands are:

    • Up - move pitch up a semitone (spells with sharps)

    • Down - move pitch down a semitone (spells with flats)

    • Alt+Shift+Up - move pitch up a step diatonically

    • Alt+Shift+Down - move pitch down a step diatonically

    • Ctrl+Up (Mac: Cmd+Up) - move pitch up an octave

    • Ctrl+Down (Mac: Cmd+Down) - move pitch down an octave

    In addition, when in normal mode, the accidental buttons on the Note input toolbar and corresponding keyboard shortcuts will toggle (add or remove) accidentals on any selected notes, thus potentially changing their pitch. The Accidentals palette can also be used to add accidentals to selected notes.

    Deleting notes and rests in normal mode

    To delete a note and replace it with a rest, simply press Del.

    If multiple notes are selected as a list, Del replaces them each by rests individually.

    If you select a range, Del replaces the entire passage with the correct rests according to the meter.

    Rests cannot normally be deleted completely, as removing them would leave a measure with fewer beats than it should have. However, see the remove selected range command below for information on how to do this when required. Also, rests in voices 2–4 can be deleted without removing time from a measure.

    Removing notes and rests and their associated time

    To completely remove selected notes or rests—thus leaving the piece with fewer measures if entire measures are selected, or fewer beats within the measure if a partial measure is selected—use Tools -> Remove selected range or the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Del (Mac: Cmd+Del).

    Adding ties in normal mode

    Ties can be added in normal mode, but unlike in note input mode where the tie command automatically adds a note and creates a tie, in normal mode, both notes must already exist.

    To add a tie in normal mode:

    1. Select a note that you wish to tie to the next note of the same pitch

    2. Click the tie button or use the shortcut T.

    3. This works even if the next note of the same pitch is in a different voice.

    If you select multiple notes, MuseScore will start a tie from each of them. You can use the technique to tie entire chords at once.

    To enter ties between notes which are not adjacent (such as to show an arpeggiate-and-hold pattern on a keyboard instrument), or which are on different staves, you must explicitly select both notes (click the first and Ctrl+click the second), and then press T.

    Changing voice in normal mode

    A note entered into a given voice may be moved into another voice if this is musically possible, or the contents of two voices may be exchanged.

    Moving selected notes into another voice

    To move a selection of one or more notes into another voice, either press one of the voice buttons on the toolbar or use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl+Alt+1–4 (Mac: Cmd+Option+1–4). Notes will be moved to the extent it is possible without compromising the current content of the destination voice.

    A note can be moved into another voice if there is currently silence (rests, or nothing at all) in the destination voice at that time position for the duration of the note to be moved. In that case, the note will simply be moved to the new voice.

    A note can also be moved into another voice if there is already a note or chord of the same duration starting at that time position. In that case, the note will be combined with the existing note or chord.

    Exchanging the contents of two voices

    MuseScore Studio can also exchange the contents of any pair of voices. These commands work only on full measures (or multiple measures), not on individual notes.

    To exchange the contents of any two voices, use the corresponding command in Tools -> Voices: (Exchange voice 1-2, Exchange voice 1-3, etc.)

    See also

    Entering notes and rests

    Changing tablature staff type
    Layout panel
    Default TAB clef lets you choose between two styles for tab clefs (Standard or Serif)
  • In Measures, under Padding, some settings to configure the distances between clefs and other items:

    • Clef to key signature

    • Clef to time signature

    • Clef to note

    • Clef to barline

  • In Measures, under System header, one more distance setting:

    • Clef/key signature to first note (this only applies at the beginning of a system)

  • Changes and courtesies at repeats and jumps

    Click Finish editing in the percussion panel header to continue writing music.

    Press Space or Enter to select the pad you wish to move
  • Use the arrow keys to move the selected drum pad to a different slot position

  • Press Space or Enter to drop the drum pad in its new position

  • or
    OK
    to apply the changes.
    Move drum pads to different positions
    move drum pads to different positions
    docking and undocking panels
    workspaces
    Preferences

    Always: the staff will always be hidden when empty (even if the score-wide setting is not turned on)

  • Never: the staff will never be hidden when empty (even if the score-wide setting is turned on)

  • Instrument: the staff will only be hidden if all staves of the instrument are empty.

  • Press the ↓ button (at the bottom left) to move to the next staff

  • Repeat steps 3–5 until you have gone through all staves.

  • Check the Cutaway and Small staff boxes

  • Set Hide when empty to Always

  • Press OK.

  • Ossia
    Adding a staff to an existing instrument
    Staff spacer fixed down
    Hiding empty staves
    Empty staves setting in Properties panel
    Hide empty staves style settings
    Cutaway staff
    Ossia
    OK
    ; alternatively, just double-click the new pitch.
    To close, press Esc, or click outside the dialog.
    Staff/Part properties→Advanced style properties
    Staff/Part properties→Advanced style properties
    Period tablature notation
    Customizing appearance of tablature
    Staff properties: Tablature options
    String data dialog
    Instruments panel
    Ms4 tab globalstyle
    if the number of staves is an exact multiple of the number of notes, each note will be repeated an equal number of times; for example, exploding a two-note chord onto four staves, the upper note will go to the top two staves and the lower note will go to the bottom two staves
  • if the number of staves is not an exact multiple of the number of notes, the notes will be distributed one by one, and then the lowest note will be repeated on the remaining staves.

  • Imploding two voices to a single voice
    Imploding two staves to two voices
    Exploding two voices to two staves
    Exploding three voices to two staves
    Exploding three-note chords to three staves
    Exploding chords with different numbers of notes
    Note input toolbar
    Palettes
    Properties
    Instruments
    Score size and spacing: Page margins
    Ms4 irregular
    Home tab
    Score tab
    MuseScore 4 user interface diagram
    Publish tab
    Main menu
    Nested tuplets
    edit the text
    Articulations toolbar
    Articulations palette
    Articulation placement
    Align with stem
    Align with stem
    Align with notehead
    Center between stem and notehead
    Always keep together
    Prefer closeness to notehead
    Apply capo
    Apply capo
    custom shortcut
    Other lines
    Changing the range of a line
    tremolo
    Trill properties
    Turn properties
    Mordent properties
    Ornament accidental behavior
    Articulations, Ornaments style
    Ornaments palette
    Entering notes and rests
    Staff/Part properties
    Rests unmerged (left) and merged (right)
    Default stem direction
    Music using two voices on a single staff
    Multiple voices in an SATB arrangement
    In measure 6, Repeat list is set to 6 and Beginning text is set to 6.
    |: m1 | m2 | (volta 1,3,4) m3 | m4 :| (volta 2,5) m5 | m6 :| (volta 6) m7 | m8 | m9 ||
    Changing the range of a line
    Input using the virtual piano
  • Left-click the notehead to input the note

  • (Optional) To add another note to an existing one, press and hold Shift clicking a different key

  • (Optional) Press 0 to enter a rest of the selected duration

  • Percussion kit customization
    Setting up your score
    Layout panel
    Percussion kit customization
    Customizing the percussion panel
    note input mode
    MIDI keyboard
    note duration
    Entering notes and rests
    note duration
    sound flags
    sound flags.
    Picture of the percussion panelPicture of the percussion panel
    The percussion panel in MuseScore Studio uses a drum pad style layout that makes it easy to see what sub-instruments and variants are available for your instrument.
    The Edit text style button takes you to the page in Text styles where the currently selected text style can be configured.
    Above system: Only at the top of the system (above the top staff).
  • Below system: Only at the bottom of the system (below the bottom staff).

  • At system marking positions: At the positions where system markings are shown.

  • On all staves: On every staff in the score. When this option is selected, an extra Position setting becomes available, to specify whether the numbers should be Above or Below the staves.

  • Offset when above/below staff: The default offset for measure numbers above and below the staff respectively

  • Bracket type: Use square brackets, parentheses, or nothing.
  • Alignment: Left, center or right.

  • Position: Choose whether the range goes above or below the multimeasure rest.

  • Offset: Fine-tune the positioning of the range text.

  • style
    Using sections for multiple movements or songs
    When shown, measure number ranges appear bracketed below their multimeasure rests by default.
    Space

    Within an organization, you can create Spaces for different content. We currently have one space called English (US), which is for the handbook's English source text. We'll add more spaces later; one for each translation, including English (GB) if we want (or we could rename the main one "English").

    Site / Docs site

    To make a space viewable to the public, it must be added to a Docs site (aka 'site'). We currently have one site called MuseScore Studio Handbook. This site will be used for the source space and all translations.

    Now that the handbook site is published, it is available at:

    • https://musescore.gitbook.io/musescore-studio-handbook (canonical site URL)

    • https://musescore.gitbook.io/ (alias because it's set as the default site for this organization)

    • https://handbook.musescore.org/ (because we set up a custom domain)

    While a site is published, live edits on its spaces are disabled, so all changes must be made through change requests (or on GitHub if GitHub sync is enabled).

    GitHub sync

    The content within a space can be synced with a GitHub repository. In the repository, content is stored as Markdown files, with subfolders for each parent page or group.

    The sync is two-way, so edits made in either place will be reflected in the other. This will enable us to:

    1. Edit the source text on GitBook or GitHub.

    2. Upload strings from GitHub to Transifex.

    3. Download translations from Transifex to GitHub.

    4. Sync translations back to GitBook.

    While GitHub sync is enabled, live edits are disabled, so all changes must be made through change requests, or on GitHub via pull requests or direct commits to the repository.

    Navigation

    Summary / Table of contents

    On the left side of the screen is a list of groups, pages and subpages in the current space. This list is the summary or table of contents. If GitHub sync is enabled, the summary appears in a file called SUMMARY.md at the root of the space.

    To prevent a specific page appearing in the summary, go to Page actions (⋮) > Hide page.

    The page will still appear in search results and be accessible to anyone with the URL.

    Page outine / On this page

    On the right side of the screen, under the label "ON THIS PAGE", is a list of headings on the current page. This is the page outline. Only Heading 1 and Heading 2 headings are shown in the outline.

    Heading 3 (not shown in page outline)

    To hide the sidebar for the summary or page outline, go to Page actions (⋮) > Options.

    The summary and page outline will remain visible on other pages.

    Pages

    You're viewing a page now. This page is actually a subpage of the main page. It's also possible to have subsubpages, and so on.

    By default, parent pages are collapsed in the summary, so you can't see their subpages. Subpages become visible when you view the parent page or click the expansion arrow next to it in the summary.

    Groups

    Pages can also be nested under groups. Group names appear in BLOCK CAPITALS in the summary.

    Unlike parent pages, groups are always expanded in the summary and cannot be collapsed. Also, groups cannot be nested under other groups or pages.

    Groups are not pages and so cannot contain content of their own. If you try to visit a group URL, GitBook will redirect you to the first page in the group.

    Editing

    Live edits

    GitBook has a live edit mode where you can edit content directly without creating a "branch" first. In this mode, you can add, move, rename, and delete pages, as well as edit content on existing pages.

    Live edits are disabled while a site is published, or while GitHub sync is enabled.

    If editing is disabled, many of the menus (⋮), options (⠿), and buttons (+) mentioned on this page will not be available until you start making a change request.

    Change request (CR)

    While live edits are disabled, the only way to make changes is via a change request, or ‘CR’. This creates a personal ‘branch’ on which editing is enabled. Your CR branch covers the entire space, so it’s possible to edit multiple files in a single CR if necessary, but this should only be done if the changes are related.

    When you’re done editing, you can submit your CR for review, like a GitHub pull request (PR). Like PRs, change requests should always be given a meaningful title that describes the change made. Ideally, the title should be written in the imperative mood, which means it should complete the sentence “This change request will...”.

    Example CR name
    Rating
    Comment

    "shoogle's Nov 21 changes"

    Default CR name. It's not descriptive enough.

    "Metric modulations"

    Bare minimum.

    "Added images of metric modulations"

    Better, but not in imperative mood.

    "Add images of metric modulations"

    In general, each change request should only do one thing. That thing might be:

    • "Add page: Rhythm"

    • "Rename 'Meters' page to 'Time signatures'"

    • "Installation on Linux: Remove unnecessary detail"

    • "Replace 'MuseScore 4' with 'MuseScore Studio' on all pages"

    In naming your CR, if you can't avoid using the word "and" (as in "Do this and do that"), that's a clue you should consider splitting your edits across multiple CRs instead.

    Resolving conflicts

    While you’re waiting for your change request (CR) to be merged, the content it’s based on could change in the primary space (e.g. if someone else’s CR gets merged before yours). If this happens, GitBook will prompt you to update your change request to reflect the new primary content.

    When you click the Update button in your CR, GitBook will alert you to any conflicts that it is not able to resolve automatically. This happens if you changed a block (i.e. a paragraph) that was also changed in the primary space. In this case, GitBook displays the two versions of the block side-by-side and asks you to pick one to keep: the primary version, or your changed version. If necessary, you can edit the block manually to incorporate elements of both versions.

    Some types of conflict are not identified by GitBook. For example, if your edit refers to other content, such as an existing image or definition higher up the page, you should check that this content still exists after you update your CR. Also, if a page you edited was renamed in the primary space, when you update the CR you might find that you are left with two copies of the page, each with a different name and different content. If this happens, you’ll have to delete one copy of the page and potentially transfer some of its contents to the other copy.

    Each change request should focus on a single topic. This makes it easier to review and merge quickly, which reduces the likelihood of conflicts occuring, and makes it easier to resolve conflicts if they do occur.

    Creating new pages and groups

    If you hover the cursor over an existing page or group in the summary, a More actions (⋮) button appears, which reveals a menu with the option to Insert subpage. This creates a new empty page nested under the parent page or group. Similarly, if you hover between pages in the summary, an Add (+) button appears, which enables you to insert a new page between neighboring pages.

    To create a group, use the Add new option at the bottom of the summary. This button can also be used to create top-level pages (i.e. pages that are not subpages of another page or group). Once created, you can then drag the new page or group to the correct position in the summary.

    If GitHub sync is enabled and you create a new subfolder or Markdown file in the repository, you must manually add it to SUMMARY.md for GitBook to become aware of it.

    Importing pages from the old handbook

    When you hover the cursor over an existing page or group in the summary, the More actions (⋮) menu button that appears also contains an option to Import subpages. Using this option, you can choose a Markdown or HTML file on your computer to upload and turn into a new subpage.

    To create the Markdown or HTML file:

    1. Visit a page of the old handbook and use the option to Edit.

    2. Copy the title and source text and paste them at https://shoogle.github.io/gitbookify/.

    3. Click "Convert" and save the resulting file somewhere on your machine.

    Once on GitBook, the page will likely have problems, such as:

    • Links to other handbook pages are broken.

    • Images are "hotlinked" from MuseScore.org rather than uploaded to GitBook.

    • If importing HTML rather than Markdown:

      • <h1> elements are incorrectly imported as Heading 2. (<h2> and <h3> are imported correctly.)

    These issues must be fixed manually, but we don't need to do it yet because we'll do another import later, after the old handbook has been frozen. Before then, we need to get used to GitBook ourselves and then inform the community about the migration.

    Editing a page

    GitBook uses a block-based editor somewhat similar to Squarespace and recent versions of Wordpress.

    Content blocks

    A new block is created for each:

    • Paragraph

    • Heading

    • List item

    • Table row

    • Etc.

    Expand me

    Some blocks can be nested within other blocks, such as this paragraph, which is nested inside an expandable section.

    If you hover the cursor over an existing block, this reveals a plus (+) button to add a new block, as well as an options (⠿) button with options for the current block. The options button can also be dragged to reposition the block on the page.

    Another way to create a block is to edit an existing block and press Enter or Return. This usually creates a new paragraph block below the first one, but it might create something else, such as a new list item or table row. If it's a list item, you can press Tab and Shift+Tab to change the level of nesting, and Enter or Return to convert it to a normal paragraph (this only work while the block is empty).

    While editing an empty block, you can type a forward slash (/) to quickly convert it to a different type of block. If the block is not empty, typing slash (/) instead reveals options for inserting inline content.

    Organization
    MuseScore
    Changing barline type for all staves
    1. Select one or more barlines in a staff.

    2. Click on the desired barline in the palette.

    Alternatively, you can drag a barline from the palette onto a barline in the score.

    Changes are applied automatically to all barlines at the same point in the score.

    Changing barline type for a single staff

    1. Select one or more barlines in the score.

    2. Hold Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) then click on the desired barline in the palette.

    Alternatively, you can hold Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) and drag a barline from the palette onto a barline in the score.

    Only selected barlines are affected when using this modifier.

    Adding mid-measure barlines

    1. Select a note or rest (or several, as a list selection).

    2. Click on a barline in the palette.

    This will add a barline marking after each selected note. The barline is for visual purposes and does not factor into any measure operations.

    If you wish to divide a measure, inserting a real barline in the process, see Splitting a measure.

    Changing barline length

    Here we are concerned with the vertical extension of barlines in order to link staves together, or their reduction to create partial barlines.

    Extending all barlines in a staff

    1. Select a barline on the 'starting' (topmost) staff.

    2. Do any of the following:

      • Drag the end handle downwards until it meets the destination staff (this method is the best for extending barlines through multiple staves).

      • Select the edit handle and press Down.

      • Check the Span to next staff box in the Barlines section of the Properties panel, then click Set as staff default.

    3. Repeat if required for subsequent staves.

    The barline snaps into place, and all other barlines in that staff follow.

    Extending selected barlines in a staff

    1. Select one or more barlines (and their counterparts in the staves below if there are more than two staffs to join).

    2. Check Span to next staff in the Barlines section of the Properties panel.

    Creating partial barlines

    Partial barlines can be created by adjusting Span from and Span to in the Barlines section of the Properties panel.

    Creating barlines between staves only (Mensurstrich)

    See Working with Mensurstrich.

    Barline properties

    You can edit properties specific to barlines in the Barlines section of the Properties panel:

    • Style: The barline type (single, double, dashed, final, etc.).

    • Span to next staff: If checked, the barline will be extended to reach the next staff down.

    • Span from: The vertical position of the top of the barline.

    • Span to: The vertical position of the bottom of the barline.

    The Span from setting is an offset relative to the top line of the staff. As with most other vertical positioning settings in MuseScore Studio, positive values move down and negative values move up.

    The Span to setting works differently depending on whether Span to next staff is checked. If unchecked, this is an offset relative to the bottom line of the staff. If checked, the barline will be extended down to match the position of the top of a default barline on the staff below (i.e. either the top staff line or, in the case of a one-line staff, 2sp above the staff line). Exceptionally, in this situation, the offset works in reverse: positive values move up and negative values move down.

    One-line staves present one further complication: the default barline, which is drawn when both the Span from and Span to settings are 0, is drawn from 2sp above the line to 2sp below. The span offsets are however still relative to the (only) staff line and, if Span to next staff is unchecked, changing one will also apply the other (even if it is 0).

    Finally, the unit for these offsets is in all cases the half space.

    The Set as staff default button will apply all the Span settings of the currently selected barline to all barlines on the staff.

    The Span presets buttons apply certain presets to the barline:

    When applied, the presets will set Span from and Span to to specific values and, except for Default, will disable Span to next stave.

    Barline style

    Selected properties for all barlines in the score can be changed in Format -> Style -> Barlines:

    • Show repeat barline tips: Adds 'wings' above and below repeat barlines.

    • Barline at start of single staff: Whether a system containing only one staff should have an initial system barline.

    • Barline at start of multiple staves: Whether a system containing more than one stave should have an initial system barline.

    • Scale barlines to staff size: Whether the thickness of barlines should be scaled on resized staves.

    • Mask barlines when intersecting text: Whether barlines should be masked when text crosses over them.

    • Thin barline thickness: The thickness of a 'normal' thin barline.

    • Thick barline thickness: The thickness of a thick barline (for example, the thick portion of a repeat barline or final barline).

    • Thick barline distance: The distance between the thick and thin portions of a repeat or final barline.

    • Double barline thickness: The thickness of the lines in a double barline.

    • Double barline distance: The distance between the two lines in a double barline.

    • Repeat barline to dots distance: The distance between the innermost line of a repeat barline and its dots.

    • Use double barlines before key signatures / time signatures: Lets you choose if and when double barlines are automatically shown before key or time signatures.

    • Left (start) repeat signs contains the following options:

      • Show barline before key and time signatures changes: When turned on, adds an additional barline before key and time signatures that are before a left repeat sign. You can also choose if this is a double barline or not.

    The thickness and distance settings are among those which may change automatically when changing a score's music font, if Style -> Score -> Automatically load style settings based on font is checked (which it is by default).

    See also

    • Fixed measure widths for a workaround to ensure barlines are aligned vertically between systems.

    • Repeat signs

    palette
    Barlines paletteBarlines palette
    The default beaming of notes is determined by properties of the time signature. You can edit those defaults and thus affect the beaming of all notes within that time signature, and you can also override the beaming of individual notes to differ from the time signature defaults.

    Setting the default beaming for a time signature

    See the main chapter Time signatures

    Each time signature has a set of beaming defaults that control the beaming of all notes in that time signature. Since you will normally want the beaming consistent throughout the score, this is usually the place to start when altering the beaming. To edit the defaults for a given time signature, use the Time signature properties dialog.

    Accessing Time signature properties

    1. Select a time signature within the score

    2. Click the Time signature properties button in the Properties panel

    3. Edit the Beam Groups section as explained below

    You can also access this dialog by right-clicking a time signature.

    Note: the settings made in this dialog are per score and also per staff. To apply changes to other staves within the same score, you can Ctrl+Shift+drag the time signature to another staff, which acts similarly to adding it from the palette. To make a customized time signature available to other scores, Ctrl+Shift+drag it back to the palette.

    Beam groups

    To change the beaming of a note of a given duration on a given beat, click the corresponding note in the Beam groups section to toggle the beam into that note on or off. That is, if you click a note that is currently beamed to the previous note, that will break the beam, and if you click a note that is not currently beamed to the previous note, that will join them. You can also drag one of the Beam selector icons to any given note to set its beaming as explained further below.

    If you select the Also change shorter notes option, then changes made to any given note will affect notes on the same beat of shorter durations as well.

    Click Reset to remove all changes made since this dialog was opened. Note that this button does not reset settings back to the original defaults from the palette. To revert all changes made since the time signature was added, use the palette to replace the time signature.

    Overriding the default beaming for a specific note

    The time signature properties control the default beaming for notes in your score, but you can override those defaults on a note-by-note basis, such as to have one measure beamed differently from another. This can be useful when writing certain rhythms that might be more readable beamed in a non-standard manner, or in cases where the options available in Time signature properties are insufficient to create the defaults you want. It is also the only way to create beams over rests.

    Beam properties are set on the notes themselves. To change the beam between two notes, you will normally start by selecting the second of the two notes, as most of the beam properties control the beam into a note. Note that these properties can be set from the Properties panel or the Beam properties palette, but this discussion will focus on the Properties panel.

    To change the beaming of a given note:

    1. Select the note

    2. Select the Beam tab in the Note section of the Properties panel

    3. Select one of the icons to set the appropriate property

    From left to right, the available properties are:

    • Auto: resets the beaming of the note to the time signature default behavior

    • No beam: breaks any beams into or out of the selected note

    • Break beam left: breaks any beam into the selected note

    • Break inner beams (8th): breaks all but one beam into the selected note (for notes that would otherwise have two or more beams)

    • Break inner beams (16th): breaks all but two beams into the selected note (for notes that would otherwise have three or more beams)

    • Join beams: joins a beam from the previous note into the selected note (unless the previous note is set to No beam)

    Beaming over rests

    To extend a beam over a rest:

    1. Select the rest

    2. Apply the Join beams or Break beam left property

    Beaming over barlines

    To extend a beam across a barline:

    1. Select the first note or rest after the barline

    2. Apply the Join beams property

    Controlling the appearance of beams

    While breaking and joining beams is a function of the individual notes, the actual appearance of the beam can be controlled by selecting either the beam itself or any of the notes it joins. Thus, to set these properties, you can either:

    1. Select a note that is currently beamed

    2. Select the Beam tab within the Note section of the Properties panel

    or

    1. Select the beam itself

    Either way, at that point, you will see the options to control the appearance of the beam.

    Feathered beams

    The buttons in the Feather beams section of the Properties panel can be used to indicate gradual slowing down or speeding up of the joined notes (note this is not supported in playback). These options only apply to 16th and shorter durations using multiple beams.

    • None: reset the beam to standard (non-feathered) appearance

    • Decelarate: feather the beams to fan inward to indicate a gradual slowing down

    • Accelerate: feather the beams to fan outward to indicate a gradual speeding up

    Beam angle

    The angle of a beam can be edited directly by selecting it and moving the handles by dragging or using the cursor keys. But you can also use the settings in the Properties panel. You may need to click the More button first to display this section.

    The two settings here correspond to the left and right handles on the beam and allow you to set the height of either side of the beam independently.

    You can also force a beam to be horizontal by enabling the Force horizontal property.

    Beam style

    A few global properties of beams can be set from Format→Style→Beams:

    • Beam distance: Set the vertical distance from one beam to the next.

    • Beam thickness: Set the thickness of all beams.

    • Broken beam minimum length : Set the minimum length of broken beams such as those used in dotted rhythms.

    • Flatten all beams: Check to make all note beams horizontal, regardless of context.

    See also

    • How to add a beam over a rest

    • Using the palettes

    Wikipedia

    Open the Score tab

  • Press the default keyboard shortcut F8, or click on the Properties tab on the left side of the screen.

  • Global settings

    This is what the Properties panel looks like when you have nothing selected in your score. All these settings affect your entire score (not just individual elements):

    Show

    • Invisible hides/shows all invisible objects in your score

    • Frames hides/shows Frames

    • Formatting hides/shows formatting elements added from the layout palette

    • Page margins hides/shows the page margin

    • Sound flags hides/shows sound flag buttons on staff text

    Score appearance

    • Empty staves hides/shows staves that contain no notated music within a system. This setting mirrors the Hide empty staves within systems settings in the Style dialog.

    • Page settings opens the Page settings dialog. Same as Format→Page Settings. See Templates and styles.

    • Style settings opens the Style dialog. Same as Format→Style. See Templates and styles.

    General settings

    These settings are visible whenever something is selected in your score.

    Visible

    Click this box to hide/unhide selected elements, or use the keyboard shortcut V.

    Use this feature to hide elements so they don't appear in your exported or printed score. This can be useful when, for example, applying tempo marks or dynamics solely to affect playback in MuseScore. Use the Invisible toggle in Properties (when nothing is selected) to show or hide these hidden elements in the score view (hidden elements will be rendered in a lighter shade).

    Auto-place

    Usually checked by default, this feature positions the selected object according to MuseScore's vertical and horizontal collision avoidance algorithms. Uncheck Auto-place to have more control over the positioning of certain elements. Learn more about this feature in Positioning elements.

    Cue size

    This feature is used to create small cue notes: i.e. notes provided to assist the performer by indicating what another ensemble/orchestra member is playing at the same time. Checking the box makes any selected notes smaller, including their stems and any attached beams.

    Play

    When checked, this property allows playback of the selected element. Uncheck Play to silence the element.

    Playback settings

    The Playback button displays the editable playback properties of the selected elements.

    Under the Playback button, playback properties are shown if the selected elements have any.

    Velocity

    Only notes have the Velocity property. The valid range is 1 to 127. This property is usable for instruments using Soundfonts.

    This property has no effect on instruments using Muse Sounds. See Dynamics for changing loudness of playback on instruments using Muse Sounds.

    Tuning

    Used to adjust the tuning of notes in cents. Only notes have the Tuning property.

    Appearance settings

    Leading space

    This changes the leading space of selected elements: i.e. the space in front of the element. The leading space adjustment is applied across all staves, so that notes at the same time position remain aligned.

    Measure width

    This changes the width of the measure as a proportion of the original width: e.g. 1.5 = one-and-a-half times the default width.

    Minimum distance

    This is used by the auto-place collision avoidance algorithm and applies only to elements that are applied above/below the staff by default, such as staff text, dynamics, fingerings, lines etc. It sets the minimum distance (in sp.) of the selected objects from other elements that are closer to the staff, or the staff itself.

    Offset

    When newly applied, elements assume a default position. The horizontal/vertical offsets give you a more precise way of positioning an element than dragging it or moving with the keyboard arrows.

    Snap to grid

    This feature allows you to constrain drag operations to increments of a desired distance. First you need to check the Snap to grid box, then press Configure grid and set the desired horizontal/vertical step distances.

    You can switch Snap to grid on/off as required by checking/unchecking the box.

    Arrange

    The four buttons in this section control how overlapping elements are drawn.They work as follows:

    • Forwards moves the selected element in front of the next element

    • Backwards moves the selected element behind the next element

    • To front moves the selected element in front of all other elements.

    • To back moves the selected element behind all other elements, including the staff lines.

    Color

    Click on this button to change the color of selected element(s). Choose a preset or custom color, or create your own by clicking the + button. This is stored for future reference in the list of custom colors to the right.

    Properties for characters inside text objects

    When Text object(s) are selected (the object, not the characters), the Properties panel shows the formatting settings of the Text object. Editing these properties may affect all of the characters inside.

    When character(s) inside a Text object are selected, the Properties panel shows the formatting settings of the characters. Editing these properties only changes the selected characters. See Formatting text.

    Saving and restoring default settings

    After changing any given setting, you can click the "three dots" menu button adjacent to the setting to reveal a menu that allows you to either Reset the setting to the default for the score, or Save as default style for this score. The latter option is only available for properties that correspond to style settings, but this includes many of the properties in this panel.

    save as the default style for the score
    Specifying the pickup duration during score creation
    1. Click on Measures in the "Additional score information" page (page 2) of the New Score dialog;

    2. Check "Create pickup measure";

    3. Choose an underlying time signature using the spin controls below.

    Converting a measure into a pickup

    1. Right-click on the measure and choose Measure properties.

    2. In the Measure duration section, next to "Actual", choose an underlying "time signature".

    3. Click Apply and OK.

      • Alternatively, use the ← (previous) or → (next) buttons to configure an adjacent measure.

    It is accepted musical practice to omit the same duration as the pickup from the final measure of the piece or of the same repeat section. The same method of shortening the measure applies here.

    Creating non-metered measures

    A non-metered measure is one which is less or greater in duration than the indicated time signature.

    A measures of less duration than the indicated signature may be created in exactly the same way as a pickup measure (see above).

    Other ways of creating non-metered measures are described below:

    Inserting notes and rests

    Extra notes/rests can be inserted in a measure with the help of either a keyboard shortcut, or by using a special mode of entry called Insert mode:

    Using a keyboard shortcut

    1. Select the note or rest in the score before which you want to insert notes/rests;

    2. Enter note-input mode;

    3. Select a duration;

    4. Press Ctrl+Shift (Mac: Cmd+Shift) while adding the note/rest from the keyboard or mouse.

    Using Insert mode

    1. Make sure you have the element selected where you want to start inserting notes/rests;

    2. Click and hold the Note input icon, and select Insert (or if Insert is the current default, just press N);

    3. Enter a note or rest as you would in step-time mode. Each note is inserted before the current cursor position;

    4. Move the cursor forward and backward if required (using the arrow keys), to change the insertion point.

    If, at any time, the total duration of the notes and rests within the measure does not match the time signature, a small + or - sign will be shown above the measure.

    Joining measures

    This command joins selected measures into one measure.

    Method A. To join two measures only:

    1. Select the barline between the two measures;

    2. Press Ctrl+Del; or select Tools→Remove selected range.

    Method B. To join any number of measures:

    1. Select the measures you want to join;

    2. From the menu bar, select Tools→Measures→Join selected measures.

    Notes: (1) If you select measures on only one staff in a score with multiple staves, the same measures will be joined in each staff of the system. (2) Beaming may be automatically modified.

    Splitting a measure

    This command inserts a barline before a selected note, splitting the measure into two.

    Use one of the following methods:

    • Select a note; then hold Ctrl and click a barline in a palette.

    • Hold Ctrl and drag a barline (from a palette) to a note.

    • Select a note; then, from the menu bar, select Tools→Measures→Split Measure Before Selected Note/Rest.

    See also

    • Working with non-metered music.

    Other measure-related pages:

    • Measure numbering

    • Measure and multimeasure rests

    • Measure properties

    • Adding and removing measures

    In terms of visual representation

    Supported engravings including:

    • Line at either or both ends, have no hook or hooks at angles of either 45 or 90 degrees, or "T" end;

    • Ped. followed by such a line, or a rosette symbol (*): The line from the built-in Ped. * palette item is invisible and non-printing. Adjust on-screen display with View menu > Show > Show invisible setting accordingly, see The user interface. To convert the line to visible in printing, or style it as dashed, see properties.\

    • Other related symbols and pictogram can be found under Symbols category in Master palette window, see Other symbols. Sost. (sostenuto pedal) marking should not be confused with sost.-- , see also .\

    • Create custom sim. or pedal ad lib marking with .

    • Full pedal is implied for playback, to add pedal strength symbols for engraving need.

    In terms of function inside MuseScore

    There are three different subtypes:

    Type 1 includes:\

    • Line with 45 degree angled End hook or no End hook, with or without Ped. beginning text.

    • Ped. followed by a rosette symbol (*)

    Visually, the line or symbol only extends horizontally to the notehead attached to the end anchor. Functionally, if that note is attached to another marking's start anchor, the following marking will automatically connect and make a shape resembling "-^-", which is indicative of the piano technique "pedal released and pressed again without releasing this note".\

    \ _shown above is the auto connect, their playback are also in line with the piano technique_\ If the instrument use [SoundFonts](../../sound-and-playback/soundfonts.md) such as "MS Basic", or when exported as MIDI file, sustain (MIDI CC 64) is created. When consecutive type 1 markings create a "-^-", playback matches the piano technique, the _first marking_ is interpreted by synthesizer as _released **at** the note attached to the **end anchor**_. Single or trailing type 1 markings creates playback like type 2: _sustain until the note attached to the **end anchor** ends._\

    \ _The last two type 1 markings shown above are single or trailing, they create the same playback as type 2_

    Type 2 includes:\

    • Line other than described in Type 1, with or without Ped. beginning text.

    Visually, the line extends horizontally to an aprpopiate length spanning the full duration of note attached to the end anchor. Functionally, if the instrument use SoundFonts such as "MS Basic", or when exported as MIDI file, sustain (MIDI CC 64) is created. Type 2 always sustain until the note attached to the end anchor ends.

    Type 1 and 2 are interchangable by adjusting properties.

    Type 3 includes the sostenuto pedal marking and custom Staff texts, they are for engraving purpose only and are non-functional.

    Adding pedal markings to your score

    \ _shown above a type 2 marking on score_

    Add pedal markings from Lines palette, see Other lines:Adding a line to your score.

    Adjust with Shift+Left/Right, switch handle with Tab, see Adjusting elements directly: Changing the range of a line.

    Unfortunately, you might need to make compromise with engraving style or not notate at all if you must create a desired playback, because of the functional limitation of Type 1 and Type 2 explained. As of Musescore 4.1.1, pedal marking always create sustain playback only (cannot be turned off), making it impossible to use "add redundant symbol, make it invisible" trick.

    To create shape resembling "-^-" with consecutive Type 1 markings, make sure the end anchor is attached correctly, which is usually to the first note of the next measure instead of the last note of the previous measure. This big picture shows the correct end anchor result.\

    MuseScore 4.1.1 does not offer keyboard shortcut bindings to palette items, the keyboard shortcut key available in Musescore 3 that you can use to re-apply the same (last used) palette item is removed (not reimplemented yet).

    Creating pedal changes

    Not to be confused with Harp pedal change

    Use type 1 markings, explained in "adding marking" section. For issues related to MusicXML direction import / export, there are upcoming changes in Musescore 4.2, see forum discussion https://musescore.org/en/node/356899 [please feel free to update info here]

    Pedal properties

    Select pedal marking(s), in Properties panel Pedal section, Line properties can be set, the extra option available to pedal marking is "Show line with rosette" checkbox under Style tab, tick it to make the default line visible in printing and exporting.

    Pedal style

    See Templates and styles

    Values of the "Style for Pedal" can be edited in Format→Style→Pedal. Values of the "Style for text inside Pedal" can be edited in Format→Style→Text styles→Pedal See also Line style.

    Idiomatic notation: Harp
    wikipedia article
    Transposing with keyboard shortcuts

    To transpose with keyboard shortcuts, first select a range of notes (See Selecting elements). Then use one of the following options, depending on how you need to transpose your music:

    Transpose chromatically

    Press Up or Down to move the selection up/down in semitone steps

    Transpose diatonically

    Press Alt+Shift+Up/Down to move the selection up/down in scale degrees (Mac: Option+Shift+Up/Down).

    Transpose by an octave

    Press Ctrl+Up/Down to move the selection up/down in octave steps (Mac: Cmd+Up/Down).

    Using the transpose dialog

    The Transpose dialog gives you more control over transposition, with options to transpose to selected keys or by specific intervals.

    First select a range of notes you wish to transpose. (See Selecting elements). If no selection is made, the whole score is automatically selected for transposition.

    Then open the dialog by selecting Tools → Transpose...

    Transpose Chromatically

    When this is selected, you can choose to transpose to a specific key, or by specified interval.

    To transpose chromatically to a specific key:

    1. Select To key

    2. Select whether to transpose to the Closest key (relative to the current key signature of the selection), or Up or Down to the destination key signature

    3. Choose your destination key signature from the drop down menu

    4. Leave Transpose key signatures selected to transpose any existing key signatures in your selection (deselecting this will leave any existing key signatures unchanged)

    5. Leave Transpose chord symbols selected to transpose any existing chord symbols in your selection (deselecting this will leave any existing chord symbols unchanged)

    6. Click OK

    To transpose chromatically by interval

    To transpose selected notes up or down in semitone increments:

    1. Select By interval

    2. Select whether to transpose your selection Up or Down by the specified interval

    3. Select the transposition interval from the drop down menu

    4. Select options for Transpose key signatures and Transpose chord symbols as required (see above)

    5. Click OK

    Transpose Diatonically

    Select this to transpose the selection by a specified interval without changing the existing key signature(s). Note: the intervallic relationships between pitches in your selection will change as a result!

    1. Select Transpose Diatonically

    2. Select whether to transpose your selection Up or Down by the specified interval

    3. Leave Keep degree alterations selected to retain any accidentals in the selection (Note: accidentals will be modified relative to the existing key signature. Note also: Deselecting this will remove any existing accidentals upon transposition)

    4. Leave Transpose chord symbols selected to transpose any existing chord symbols in your selection (see above)

    5. Click OK

    Working with transposing instruments

    Transposed and concert pitch

    Transposing instruments (such as the clarinet, French horn, trumpet etc.) are notated at a different pitch (and key signature) to how they sound. The notated pitch is called the written pitch, while the actual pitch is called concert or sounding pitch.

    By default the program is displayed with all the staves at written pitch. However, if you wish to view the score at concert pitch just check the "Concert pitch" box (to the left of the tuning fork icon) in the status bar.

    Setting the interval of transposition

    When you set up a score in the New Score, or Add or remove instruments dialogs, transposed key signatures are automatically applied to any transposing instruments. However if for any reason you need to set up the staff transposition manually, this is how to do it.

    1. Right-click on the instrument staff and select Staff/Part properties;

    2. Next to "Transpose" in the lower part of the dialog, select the interval that the instrument sounds above/below concert pitch. (Music for the Bb clarinet, for example, is written a tone above its sounding pitch and the transpose setting is therefore a major second down.)\

    3. Click OK.

    The correct transposed key signature will now appear on the staff.

    Controlling enharmonic spelling

    The enharmonic spelling of the transposed key signature, whether in sharps or flats, is set in Staff/Part properties (see Setting the interval of transposition ).

    To change the enharmonic spelling of pitches in the score, see Change spelling.

    Adding a fretboard diagram legend

    The most common place to insert a fretboard diagram legend is at the start of the score.

    To add a fretboard diagram legend:

    1. Open a score containing chord symbols.

    2. Add a fretboard diagram legend using one of the following methods:

      • In the Layout palette, drag a fretboard diagram legend onto the measure where you'd like to insert the legend (e.g. the first measure).

      • Select a note or rest in the measure where you'd like to insert the legend, then either:

        • Click the fretboard diagram legend element in the Layout palette.

        • Navigate to Add -> Chords and fretboard diagrams -> Fretboard diagram legend or Add -> Frames -> Insert fretboard diagram legend.

        • Define a keyboard for Insert fretboard diagram legend and run it.

    The legend will be filled with one diagram for each chord symbol in the score in the order in which they appear. If the same chord symbol is used multiple times in the score, it's only represented once in the legend.

    Chord symbols within the score don't need to have fretboard diagrams in order for them to show up in the legend.

    Adding a legend at the end of the score

    If you want to add a fretboard diagram legend after the last measure in your score, you can either:

    • Navigate to Add -> Frames -> Insert at end of score -> Fretboard diagram legend.

    • Define a keyboard shortcut for Insert fretboard diagram legend at end of score and run it.

    Editing a fretboard diagram legend

    Editing individual elements in the legend

    Chord symbols and fretboard diagrams are individually selectable within the fretboard diagram legend.

    You can change the appearance and some other properties of chords symbols in the legend, but you cannot edit the chords themselves.

    You can customize the fretboard diagram that appears beneath each chord by selecting it and editing its properties. See .

    Adding different diagrams for the same chord

    To include different diagrams for the same named chord, you can use special chord symbol syntax:

    1. Add a fretboard diagram legend.

    2. Create two chord symbols in the score, appending type and any number of character by which you want to distinguish them (e.g. Atype1 and Atype2).

      1. See that in the legend, there are now two different A chords.

    3. Select the fretboard diagram for the chord(s) you would like to , and do so in Properties.

    Fretboard diagram legend properties

    To select the legend to edit its properties, click any blank area within the legend's dotted boundary line.

    Chords tab

    Every unique chord symbol in the score is represented in the list of chords in this tab. Use this tab to reorder, hide, or reset chords in the legend.

    Reordering chords in the legend

    Select a chord in the list in the Chords tab, then use the arrow buttons to move it up or down in the list.

    Hiding chords in the legend

    Turn the visibility (eye) button off for chords that you want to hide from the legend.

    You can also select a chord symbol or fretboard diagram in the legend in the score, and either:

    • Press Delete or Backspace.

    • Right-click it and select Hide in the context menu.

    Resetting the legend

    Use the Reset button to make all chords visible and reset the order to the default.

    Frame tab

    Many of these properties are the same as those of Vertical frames.

    • Scale with staff size: When checked on, the contents of the legend will scale in proportion to the Staff space setting in Page settings -> Scaling.

    • Text scale: Adjust the size of all chord symbols in the legend relative to the default.

    • Diagram scale: Adjust the size of all fretboard diagrams in the legend relative to the default.

    • Column gap: Adjust the horizontal space between each fretboard diagram.

    • Row gap: Adjust the vertical space between each row of fretboard diagrams.

    • Chords per row: Set the maximum number of chords and diagrams in each row.

    • Alignment: Choose whether to align the diagram contents to the left, center, or right of the legend's frame.

    • Gap to staff/frames:

      • Above: Set the amount of space above the legend to the bottom of the preceding frame or the bottom staff line of the preceding staff.

      • Below: Set the amount of space below the legend to the top of the following frame or the top staff line of the following staff.

      • Between two adjacent vertical frames or legends, both the first frame's gap below and the second frame's gap above are considered, but only the larger value is applied.

    • Clearance for notation: If the preceding/following staff has notation that extends beneath/above the staff, this sets the amount of space above/below the legend to that notation.

    • Left/right/top/bottom padding: Adjust space from the legend contents to the edges of its containing frame.

      • Left padding is usable when Alignment is set to Align left and Right padding is usable when it's set to Align right.

    chord symbol
    fretboard diagrams

    Adjusting elements directly

    This chapter explains methods to fine tune the literal positioning of elements on a score for layout purpose. The more common musical editing methods are explained in Entering and editing text, and Editing notes and rests chapters.

    Changing the position of elements

    To fine tune the literal positioning of elements on a score, either

    • Drag it, see also Snap to grid chapter, or

    • Select element(s) on a score, adjust their Offset property, see chapter. or

    • Use Edit mode.

      To enter Edit mode, either

      • Right-click → Edit element on an element on a score, or

      • Select an element on a score, use the keyboard shortcut F2, or

    • Edit it directly, this method does not work on notes, rests, and elements added from "Master palette : Symbols" (see chapter). Select element(s) on a score, press the keyboard arrow keys Left Right Up Down to move in small steps (0.1 sp). In combination with Ctrl (Mac: Cmd), they are moved in large steps (1 sp).

    Read more about spatium (sp.) in chapter.

    Changing the shape of elements

    To change the shape of elements such as and after adding them to the score:

    1. Click on the slur or tie to be adjusted

    2. Click and drag the adjustment handles that appear around the element (N.b. red letters in the below diagram are for reference only)\

    Note that:

    • Handles B, C, and D change the shape of the curve at that point

    • Handles A end E adjust the element's length (This can also be achieved by pressing Shift+Left/Right to move the ends one chord/rest at a time)

    • Handle F repositions the whole line without changing its shape or length

    If you wish to change the note to which a slur or tie is connected, the recommended method is to use the keyboard shortcuts described above (Shift+Left/Right). This is the most efficient way of changing both the visual and playback range of notes encompassed by a slur or tie.

    Anchors

    Some types of item – dynamics, hairpins, tempo text, pedal marks – do not have to be attached directly to notes or rests, but can also be attached to rhythmic positions within a duration. We call these anchors.

    In general, items cannot be added directly to an anchor point within a duration, but must be added to a note or rest and then moved into the required position. The keyboard shortcuts to move between anchor points are Shift+Left/Right (the same shortcuts that move other types of item between notes). The anchor positions are stored in the file as real rhythmic positions, so items will stay in the correct place when the score reformats.

    If you select an 'anchorable' item and press Shift, you will see a visualization of the available anchors in that measure as alternating dark and light rectangles. The color is determined by the voice to which the item is assigned (purple for all voices, blue for voice 1, green for voice 2, etc.) Each slice represents a rhythmic subdivision to which you can anchor the item.

    Moving between anchors

    To move an item between anchors, hold Shift and press Left or Right:

    With lines (hairpins, pedal markings), both ends can be moved independently.

    By default, the subdivisions shown are half of the beat as determined by the time signature (so, in this example, half of the quarter beat, i.e. eighth notes). However, anchors will also be shown for notes on other staves which are at rhythmic positions that fall outside of these subdivisions, which means you can align an item to notes on other staves, whatever their position:

    Moving dynamics to the 'end of duration' position

    By using Shift+Alt+Left/Right, you can step not just between rhythmic subdivisions but also the end of each of those subdivisions. This is a special position; for a dynamic, the end of one duration is not the same as the start of the following one (which may have its own dynamic – or may be a rest.) This is most commonly encountered in something like this form:

    To input the dynamics in this example:

    1. Add a f dynamic to the note

    2. Add a hairpin to the note; it will end on the rest

    3. Add a p dynamic to the hairpin (which will put it at the endpoint of the hairpin, i.e. on the rest), or directly onto the rest

    4. Select the dynamic and press Shift+Alt+Left

    Note that hairpins cannot be moved to an 'end of duration' position; if there is no dynamic, then the distinction is meaningless. Therefore, the dynamic should be moved, and any hairpins will follow.

    For clarity, when moving hairpins or other lines, the subdivisions that the item spans are shaded darker so you can see the range it spans:

    Working with lines

    See also the main chapter .

    Changing the range of a line

    To change the start and end points of a line:

    1. Select the line to reveal its adjustment handles\

    2. Press Shift+Left/Right to move the end of the line one step at a time (a step = one note/rest, or one measure—depending on the line type).

      • Note: You can click or use Tab to move the focus between handles when adjusting. Focus on the left handle to move the beginning of the line.

    As with slurs and ties, it is recommended to use Shift when adjusting line length with the arrow keys to ensure that the playback range also adjusts accordingly.

    Creating diagonal lines

    Although lines are horizontal by default, they can be set at any angle simply by dragging the start or end adjustment handles; or by selecting a start/end handle and using the Up or Down arrow keys.

    Editing text of Text line objects

    To edit the displayed text of Text line objects ( such as "system text line", "staff text line", and "barré line", see ):

    1. Select a text line element

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Open the Text tab in the Text line section

    4. Edit these fields

    See also

    Slurs and ties

    A slur is a curved line spanning any number of notes of different pitches and indicates legato articulation, though the exact interpretation depends on the instrument.

    Though they look very similar, slurs should not be confused with ties, which connect notes of the same pitch and extend the duration of the first note to encompass the next note.

    For information on how to input ties in note input mode, see Entering ties.

    For information on how to input ties in normal mode, see Adding ties in normal mode.

    Adding a slur

    After selecting a note, a slur can be created using any of the following:

    • A keyboard shortcut, S. This option is both convenient and fast.

    • The menu option, Add -> Line -> Slur

    • A slur from the Lines palette.

    The exact method of applications depends on whether you are in or modes of operation. The keyboard shortcut method will be used as an example.

    Adding slurs in normal mode

    Method 1

    1. Select the note where you want the slur to start:

    2. Press S to add a slur extending to the next note:

    3. To extend the slur to the next note, hold Shift and press Right, repeating as required:

    Method 2

    1. Select the note where you want the slur to start;

    2. Choose one of the following options:

      • To add a single slur: Hold down Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) and select the last note that you want the slur to cover.

      • To add slurs to all voices: Hold down

    Adding slurs in note input mode

    1. Enter the first note in the slurred section

    2. Press S to create a slur starting on the note just entered

    3. Type in the remaining notes in the slurred section

    4. Press S again to end the slurred section on the last note entered.

    Multi-voice and cross-staff slurs

    Using (above) you can create a slur between notes in the same or different voices. Cross-staff slurs can be created in exactly the same way. e.g.

    You can also adjust the start/end handles of an existing slur to move the start or end to a note of a different voice:

    1. Click on the start or end handle of the slur.;

    2. Press Shift+Up/Down to move the start or end between voices, and from staff to staff.

    Changing the appearance of slurs and ties

    To adjust the shape of a slur or tie, or the range of a slur, see .

    Slur and tie properties

    Some properties of slurs and ties can be adjusted in the Properties panel:

    • Style: solid, wide dashes, narrow dashes, or dotted

    • Position: above or below the notes

    Ties have one more setting:

    • Tie placement: position the endpoints inside or outside of the noteheads

    Slur and tie style

    Default properties for all slurs and ties in the score can be adjusted in Format -> Style under Slurs & ties.

    These options specify how slurs and ties are drawn. They are usually the same for slurs and ties, but they can be styled differently from each other.

    • Line thickness at end and Line thickness at middle: slurs and ties are usually drawn as an arc which is thin at either end and thickens towards the middle. These settings determine the minimum and maximum thickness. Note that not every tie will reach this maximum thickness as some very short ties need to be made thinner for layout reasons. Also, these options are among those which may change automatically when changing a score's music font, if Style -> Automatically load style settings based on font is checked (which it is by default).

    • Dotted line thickness: the thickness of dotted slurs and ties, which are usually drawn thinner

    • Autoplace min. distance: the minimum distance between a slur and another item outside it

    Partial slurs across repeats and breaks controls the slant of partial slurs (which cross a system break or a repeat or jump), and has two options:

    • Follow contour of notes: the slant of each part of the slur will be determined by the notes that it spans

    • Angle away from staff: the 'hanging' end of the slur will always be angled away from the staff, regardless of the contour of the notes.

    These options apply to ties only.

    • Minimum tie length: this enforces a minimum length for ties, useful for ties between short durations and chords

    • Minimum hanging tie length: the minimum length for a hanging or partial tie, for example the two segments of a tie which crosses a system break, or a partial tie at a repeat or jump

    • Placement on single notes and Placement on chords: the default positioning of the tie endpoints relative to the noteheads it connects, as illustrated by the two icons:

    These examples use 'outside' placement:

    Measure and multimeasure rests

    Measure rests

    A measure rest looks like a whole rest, but is centered within a measure and indicates that the entire measure (or a voice within it) is silent:

    It is commonly used in all meters (except 4/2 and 8/4, which often use double whole rests instead).

    To create one or more full measure rests

    Use the following method if all selected measures are 'standard' i.e. with no :

    1. a measure, or of measures

    2. Press Del (Mac: Backspace).

    If one or more of the measures contains a , use the following method instead:

    1. a measure, or of measures

    2. Press Ctrl+Shift+Del (Mac: Cmd+Shift+Backspace).

    To create a full measure rest in a particular voice

    1. In the appropriate voice, enter a rest that extends for the full measure

    2. Make sure the rest is selected, then press Ctrl+Shift+Del (Mac: Cmd+Shift+Backspace).

    If the voice contains only rests you can select the first rest and invoke the conversion keystroke.

    Multimeasure rests

    A multimeasure rest is used to indicate a run of empty measures, the number of measures being shown by a figure above/below the staff. The thick bar drawn on the staff is called an H-bar.

    Enabling and disabling multimeasure rests

    Multimeasure rests can be turned on or off with the shortcut Ctrl+Shift+M (Mac: Cmd+Shift+M), or by checking Multimeasure rests in Format -> Style -> Rests.

    Multimeasure rests can be turned on/off independently in the score and instrument parts. (By default, they are off in scores and on in parts.)

    By default, if multimeasure rests are enabled, any sequence of two or more empty measures is automatically converted to multimeasure rests. You can change the minimum number of empty measures needed before they are combined into a multimeasure rest; see , below.

    Breaking multimeasure rests

    Multimeasure rests are automatically broken at important points, such as double barlines, rehearsal marks, key signature or time signature changes, section breaks etc.

    However, you can opt to break a multimeasure rest elsewhere as follows.

    1. in the score or part

    2. Right-click on the measure where you want the multimeasure rest to break, and select

    3. In the dialog, check Break multimeasure rest

    4. Click OK

    Multimeasure rest properties

    You can edit properties of multimeasure rests in the Multimeasure rest section of the panel:

    • Show number: Whether to show the number of measures

    • Number offset: Adjust the vertical position of the multimeasure number relative to its default position.

    Multimeasure rest style

    Extensive style settings for multimeasure rests are available in Format -> Style under Rests then Multimeasure rests. To change any of the settings, the box next to Multimeasure rests must be checked.

    • Minimum number of empty measures: the number of consecutive empty measures required before a multimeasure rest is created. The default is 1, which may seem illogical, but this is because a single measure rest may still be treated as a multimeasure rest in terms of styling and spacing. If you wish to use multimeasure rests but do not want single-measure rests to be considered multimeasure rests in any way, set this value to 2 (or higher).

    • On single empty measure (these options are only available if Minimum number of empty measures is set to 1):

      • Use normal rest: notate as a normal rest (usually a whole rest). The Show number '1' checkbox specifies whether a '1' should appear.

    Multimeasure rests generally require more horizontal space the more measures they contain. These options give you control over how exactly this should happen.

    • Proportional to time signature: the width of multimeasure rests will vary according to their time signature; for example, a 2-bar rest in 4/4 will require more space than a 2-bar rest in 3/4

    • Fixed, based on time signature of...: the width of multimeasure rests will not vary according to their time signature; for example, all 2-bar rests will require the same amount of space. You can specify the time signature that is the basis for this calculation. The default, 2/4, means that a single measure rest (when treated as a multimeasure rest) will require the same space as an empty 2/4 measure.

    • Minimum width: the minimum width of a multi-measure rest

    • Vertical position: the default vertical position of the number (by default, half a space above the staff)

    • Break H-bar if number overlaps: whether the H-bar should be broken when the number is offset to overlap it

    • Center between staves on multi-staff instruments: if checked, when a multimeasure rest occurs on an instrument with multiple staves the number will appear centered between each pair of adjacent staves (the Vertical position setting will not apply). If unchecked, the number will appear on each stave.

    • Horizontal stroke thickness: the thickness of the horizontal stroke of an H-bar

    • Margin within barlines: the distance between the barline and the vertical stroke of the H-bar, at either end

    • Vertical stroke thickness: the thickness of the vertical strokes that appear at either end of the H-bar

    • Vertical stroke height: the height of the vertical strokes of the H-bar.

    Old-style multimeasure rests are indicated as combinations of whole and double-whole rests. To use this style, check the box, and the following options become available:

    • Maximum number of measures: the maximum number of measures to notate in this manner. After this point, an H-bar will be used

    • Spacing of symbols: the distance between the symbols of the rest.

    See also

    Other measure-related pages:

    Guitar bends

    This page describes features added in MuseScore 4.2. For older versions of MuseScore 4, see Guitar techniques. For other types of bends, see brass or woodwind instrument bends.

    Adding bends to your score

    From MuseScore 4.2 onwards, four types of guitar bends can be added to your score:

    • Standard bend

    • Pre-bend

    • Grace note bend

    • Slight bend

    These bends can be found in the Guitar palette

    General points about bends in MuseScore

    In general, bends in MuseScore connect two notes together: a ‘starting note’ and an ‘arrival note’.

    Bends are contextual, meaning if the arrival note is higher than the starting note, an upward bend will be created. Conversely, if the arrival note is lower than the starting note, a release will be drawn.

    Whenever a bend is added to a tablature stave, both the starting and arrival notes will be entered as a fret positions. The arrival note, however, will be hidden by default. This allows you to create sequences of multiple bends (such as bend-release combinations) using only the tablature stave, without needing to input notes in the standard stave. If you're working mainly in the standard stave, you may find it more convenient to hide these fret positions via the Invisible setting in the panel.

    In all cases, the bend amount, being the intervallic distance between the starting and arrival notes, is reflected by the notated pitches on the standard stave, allowing you to see the shape of a melodic line, as it is affected by the presence of bent notes. On the tablature stave, the bend amount is given by a numerical indicator: "1" for a whole tone, "1/2" for a half-tone (semitone), "1/4" for a quarter-tone, etc.

    Applying a bend

    To apply any type of bend to your score:

    • Select one or more notes and click the desired bend symbol in the Guitar palette

    • Drag the bend symbol from the Guitar palette on to a note

    • Select one or more notes, and enter the required keyboard shortcut (see details below)

    Standard bends

    Windows Alt+B | macOS Option+B

    A standard bend connects two notes together: a ‘starting note’ and an ‘arrival note’. Standard bends are mostly used when it is desired to clearly specify the rhythm of the bend pattern.

    When a bend is added to a note, it will automatically be drawn to the next note in the score (the arrival note). If a rest follows the starting note, MuseScore will replace the rest so that the bend has an arrival note to connect to.

    Grace note bends

    Windows Ctrl+Alt+B | macOS Cmd+Option+B

    Grace note bends can be used to indicate bends that don’t have a defined rhythmic duration; they are generally played quite quickly before the beat.

    When you apply a grace note bend to a note, it will automatically be entered one diatonic step lower than the note it precedes.

    Pre-bends

    No default keyboard shortcut: set your own shortcut in

    Pre-bends indicate a string that has been bent prior to being struck. On the standard stave, it is represented as a stemless, parenthesised grace note. On the tablature stave, it is illustrated with a straight, rather than curved arrow.

    Slight bends

    No default keyboard shortcut: set your own shortcut in

    Slight bends are the only bend type in MuseScore that do not connect to an arrival note.

    They are always set to a pre-defined amount of a ¼ of a tone, and always bend upwards from the starting note.

    Holds

    A hold is indicated by a dashed horizontal line between two bends. It is only ever shown in the tablature stave.

    Hold lines are drawn automatically where a bent note is subsequently tied to one or more notes.

    In addition, you can manually show or hide hold lines where it makes sense to do so.

    1. Select a bend in your score

    2. Open the panel

    3. Under Hold line, select either Show or Hide to force a hold line to be drawn, or to be hidden, respectively

    Modifying bends

    Both the intervallic amount and playback speed of bends can be adjusted in MuseScore, either by modifying the pitch of bent notes on the standard stave, or adjusting the bend curve in the Properties panel.

    Modifying bends in the standard stave

    To change the bend amount of a standard bend, grace note bend, or pre-bend in the standard stave, simply raise or lower the pitch of either the starting or arrival note in your score. The fractional indicator in any linked tablature stave will be adjusted automatically.

    Modifying bends in the Properties panel

    Both the bend amount and its playback speed can be adjusted via the Properties panel.

    To adjust the bend amount:

    1. Apply a bend to your score, using any of the methods outlined above

    2. Select the bend

    3. Open the panel

    4. In the Customize bend graph, click and drag the end point of the curve up or down

    The left-most point of the bend curve corresponds to the starting note in a bend. The right-most point corresponds to the arrival note.

    Dragging the right-most (end point) of the curve upwards raises the arrival note in ¼-tone steps. In the same way, dragging the end point downwards lowers the pitch of the arrival note. The fractional indicator in the tablature stave, and the notated pitch in the standard stave, will be updated accordingly.

    To adjust the playback speed of a bend:

    1. Select a bend in your score

    2. Open the panel

    3. In the Customize bend graph, click and drag the start and end points of the curve left or right

    Dragging a curve point horizontally changes only its playback speed, including the duration for which the starting and arrival notes are held (indicated with a horizontal line). It does not affect rhythmic notation in your score.

    Adding bends to chords

    MuseScore also makes it possible to apply bends to chords, and to create unison bends.

    To apply bends to chords:

    1. Create a chord of two or more notes

    2. Select the note(s) to which you want to apply a bend

    3. Add the desired bend (see steps above)

    To create a unison bend:

    1. Create a chord containing two notes in unison (Add a unison interval to an existing note using Alt+1 on Windows, or Option+1 on macOS)

    2. Select the note to which you wish a bend to apply

    3. Add the desired bend (see steps above)

    In the case of unison bends, it can be helpful to apply the bend in the tablature stave, where it can be easier to see which string exactly is being bent.

    Customizing bends styles

    To customize the appearance of bends across an entire score:

    1. Go to Format in the menu bar

    2. Select Style...

    3. In the dialog that appears, choose Bends from the list of categories on the left

    In this dialog, you can modify:

    • Line thickness: the thickness of all bend lines in both standard and tablature staves

    • Arrow width and Arrow height: the width and height of the arrow heads on bend curves in tablature staves

    • Label for full bends: choose from displaying "1" or the word "full" to indicate a whole-tone bend in the tablature stave

    • Tablature fret numbers

    Arpeggios and glissandos

    Arpeggios, strum arrows, glissandi (slide), portamento (glide), brass or woodwind instrument bends and Guitar techniques: Slide in and slide out can be applied from the Arpeggios & glissandos palette:

    Many have an adjustable playback effect (see below).

    Arpeggios

    Adding an arpeggio/strum to your score

    To add an arpeggio/strum to a score:

    1. Click on any note in a chord (multiple selection is possible)';

    2. Click on an arpeggio/strum symbol in the palette.

    Alternatively you can drag an arpeggio/strum symbol from a palette onto a notehead.

    Adjusting the height of an arpeggio/strum

    Click on an arpeggio and two adjustment handles will appear at the top and bottom of the symbol. You can move either up or down by dragging, or by selecting a handle and using the up/down keyboard arrows.

    Creating multi-voice or cross-staff arpeggios

    Arpeggios only span the voice to which they are input initially, but then can then be adjusted to span multiple voices in the same instrument, even across multiple staves.

    To adjust an arpeggio to span multiple voices:

    1. Select either the top or bottom handle of the arpeggio

    2. Press Shift+Up or Shift+Down to move the handle up or down to the next adjacent voice

    The handle will jump to the next voice above or below that has any notes at that point. This includes voices on staves above or below, in the case of multi-staff instruments.

    The arpeggio is considered to 'belong' to the uppermost voice that it spans, and will be coloured accordingly.

    Changing playback of arpeggios

    To change the speed of a selected arpeggio:

    1. Go to the Properties panel

    2. Click Playback

    3. In the popup, adjust the Spread delay property.

    If you want to turn off playback altogether:

    1. Go to the Properties panel

    2. Untick the Play checkbox.

    Arpeggio style

    Default properties for all arpeggios in the score can be adjusted from the style menu at Format -> Style -> Arpeggios:

    Portamento

    To add a slide or portamento between two notes, add a line and and .

    To add a slide or portamento before or after a note before a note (a string instrument or guitar technique), add either or a , see also . Alternative wavy symbols are found in , those do not affect playback.

    Glissandos

    Note: Guitar slides are covered in .

    Adding a glissando to your score

    1. Select one or more start notes;

    2. Click on the desired glissando icon in the palette. A glissando is created extending to the next note in the same voice:

    Alternatively you can drag a glissando symbol from the palette onto a notehead.

    Glissandos can cross staves if needs be:

    Editing range of a glissando

    If required, you can change the start or end position of a glissando as follows:

    1. Select the edit handle whose position you want to change;

    2. Press Shift+Up/Down/Left/Right to move the handle in the specified direction, one note at a time.

    This method can also be used to move the edit handle between voices and across staves.

    Changing appearance of glissandos

    The line type of a selected glissando - whether straight or wavy - and any text associated with it, can be changed in the Glissando section of the panel. You can also turn off text by unchecking the Show text box.

    Changing playback of glissandos

    To change the playback of a glissando:

    1. Go to the Properties panel

    2. Click Playback

    3. In the popup, select an option from the Style dropdown.

    The available options are Chromatic, White keys, Black keys, Diatonic and Portamento. This last option creates a portamento between two notes; to add other types of slide see , above.

    To turn off playback off the glissando entirely:

    1. Go to the Properties panel

    2. Untick the Play checkbox.

    Glissando properties

    The following properties are available in the Glissando section of the Properties panel:

    • Line type: either Straight or Wavy. For a straight line, the following additional options are available:

      • Thickness: the thickness of the line

      • Line style: continuous, dashed or dotted

    Text will only appear if there is sufficient space for it, i.e. if the glissando line is long enough.

    The default style of glissando text is defined in Format -> Style -> Text styles under Glissando.

    Bends

    Not to be confused with .

    The Arpeggios & glissandos palette also contains bend symbols for brass or woodwind instruments:

    These have a playback effect on the score.

    Types of bends

    The four icons represent fall, doit, plop and scoop. (If you are not sure which are which, hovering over the palette icon will display a tooltip with the name of the symbol.) Falls and doits come after the notehead, plops and scoops go before it.

    Adding a bend to your score

    1. Select a notehead

    2. Click on the desired bend symbol in the palette.

    Alternatively, drag a bend symbol onto a notehead in the score.

    Changing appearance of bends

    To change the shape of the bend, click on it and four adjustment handles become visible. Drag the handles, or click on them and press the keyboard arrows, until you get the shape you want.

    Entering notes and rests

    This page explains music creation on standard staves. See also the and pages.

    MuseScore Studio supports inputting music via the computer keyboard, mouse, a MIDI keyboard, and the in-app virtual piano keyboard.

    The simplest way to start entering notes or rests is to first choose a duration in the toolbar, then either:

    • Click on the staff to enter a note

    Jumps and markers

    Jumps and markers are used to create repeat structures in a score. They can be found in the Repeats & jumps palette.

    Types of jumps and markers

    Jumps

    Time signatures

    Overview

    Time signatures are applied from the Time signatures palette:

    When creating a new score, the initial time signature can be set on the second page of the . The default is 4/4, which will be used if you skip this page.

    Key signatures

    Overview

    Key signatures are applied from the Key signatures palette.

    When creating a new score, the initial key signature can be set on the second page of the . The default is C major/A minor, which will be used if you skip this page.

    Parts

    Opening a part

    MuseScore 4 automatically creates a separate (default) part for every instrument in your score.

    To open all parts at once:

    1. Click Parts in the toolbar (This will open the Parts dialog)

    Alternative note input methods

    Accessing alternative note input methods

    In addition to the default note entry method, there are several other methods by which notation can be entered in MuseScore.

    To enter these alternative note input methods:

    1. Click and hold the Note input button in the Note input toolbar.

    Percussion kit customization

    Overview

    You can customize the name, notehead style, stave position, stem direction, keyboard shortcut, and default voice assignment for each sub-instrument and variant in an unpitched percussion instrument.

    To access these options, click Customize kit from the percussion panel header.

    Selecting elements

    You can select elements in MuseScore using the keyboard or mouse. Selections can consist of a single element, a list of individual elements that may possibly be discontinuous, or a range of measures and staves that includes the elements within it. Certain commands work only on single elements or lists; some work only on ranges; others work on any type of selection. The documentation for any given command should explain which types of selection are allowed.

    When selected, elements display in blue (or whatever color is defined for the the element belongs to).

    For range selections, a blue rectangle appears around the entire range.

    Entering and editing tablature notation

    Computer keyboard entry

    1. In , select a measure, or note/rest.

    2. Switch to : the cursor appears as a small “blue rectangle” on the currently "active" string.

    This is in the imperative mode.

    "Tempos: Add images of metric modulations"

    In imperative mood and identifies the topic being edited.

    Mensural notation and Mensurstrich
    Select an element on a score, use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+E (Mac: Option+Shift+E)

    Then, in Edit mode, press the keyboard arrows Left Right Up Down to move the object in step of 0.5 sp, or

    , which will move the dynamic to the end of the last subdivision of the previous note

    Fine-tune the position of handles using the Left or Right arrow keys if required. Note that this does not affect the playback range of the line.

    Beginning text

  • Text when continuing to a new system: the text to display if the object spans more than one system (page layout concept), see Page layout concepts chapter.

  • Properties panel
    Other symbols
    Page layout concepts
    slurs
    ties
    Other lines
    Entering and editing text
    Other lines: Line properties
    Positioning of elements
    Adjust shape
    Anchors visualisation
    Moving between anchors
    Anchors visualisation other staves
    End of duration
    Hairpin anchors
    Adjust line
    : selecting the checkbox in this section makes all fret positions for grace note bends in tablature staves appear as cue sized numbers (by default, fret position numbers for grace note bends are the same size as fret position numbers for other types of bends).
    Properties
    Preferences
    Preferences
    Properties
    Properties
    Properties
    Image of a half bend
    Image of a grace note bend
    Image of a pre-bend
    Image of a slight bend
    Image of a held bend
    Changing the pitch of the bend curve in Properties (animated image)
    Changing the playback speed of the bend curve in Properties (animated image)
    Image of a half bend
    Beam groups
    Beam type   properties
    Beam over rest
    Beam over barline
    Feathered beam
    Feathered beams   properties
    Beam angle
    Beam height   properties
    Image of Properties panel with mouse cursor
    Image of Properties panel with nothing selected
    Image of Properties panel when element is selected
    Image of Properties panel showing playback settings
    Image of Properties panel showing appearance settings
    Tempo markings
    discussion on steinberg.net
    Staff text
    embed images
    Ms4 pedalpic
    Ms4p pedalast
    Ms4p type1
    Ms4p auto
    Ms4p type1 playback singletrailing
    Ms4p type2
    Ms4p type2enter
    Ms4p type1range
    Ms4p style2
    Ms4p globalstyle
    Transpose dialog
    Concert pitch check box
    Transposition part properties

    Re-enable multimeasure rests.

    Use H-bar: use an H-bar instead. This option will be unavailable if Old-style multimeasure rests is turned on.

    Cap width after: multimeasure rests will stop requiring any extra space once they exceed this number of measures.

    Mensural notation and Mensurstrich
    custom durations
    Select
    range
    custom duration
    Select
    range
    Multimeasure rest style
    Disable multimeasure rests
    Measure properties
    Properties
    Measure numbering
    Pickup and non-metered measures
    Measure properties
    Adding and removing measures
    Multimeasure rests
    An example of an old-style multimeasure rest
    Measure rest
    Show text: whether to show text over the glissando
  • Text: the text to show (by default, "gliss.").

  • glissando
    change its appearance
    playback setting
    one of the four brass or woodwind instrument bends
    Guitar techniques: Slide in and slide out
    Guitar techniques
    the Symbols category in Master palette
    Guitar techniques
    Properties
    Portamento
    Guitar techniques: Bends
    Arpeggio style settings
    Glissando
    Cross staff glissando
    Brass bends
    Arpeggios and Glissandi palette
    shortcut
    customize
    Customizing a fretboard diagram
    Managing system markings
    Line properties
    Layout stretch
  • As you extend the slur to cover more notes it may flip direction. To manually flip the direction, press X:

  • Press Esc to exit edit mode:

  • Shift
    and select the last note that you want the slurs to cover.
  • Press S.

  • 'inside': the tie starts just to the right of the first notehead and ends just to the right of the second notehead, vertically slightly above or below its center (according to its direction)

  • 'outside': the tie starts just above or below the noteheads (according to its direction), horizontally just right of the center of the first notehead and just left of the center of the second notehead

  • Placement of inner ties with respect to augmentation dots: this specifies where the left endpoint of inner ties should go when the note has any augmentation dots ('inner ties' are all ties when 'inside' placement is used, or ties to the inner notes of chords when 'outside' placement is used):

    • Auto: start the tie before the dot if there is space; in chords, this may mean that the startpoints of the ties may not align, as the layout of each tie is considered separately

    • Always before dots: start all ties before the dots; this may result in collisions with the dots, which should be avoided via manual adjustments

    • Always after dots: start all ties after the dots, in alignment.

  • note input
    normal
    method 2
    Adjusting elements directly
    Adding slur, step 1
    Adding slur, step 2
    Cross-staff slur
    Auto
    Always before dots
    Always after dots

    Type a pitch letter (A–G) to enter a note

  • Type 0 to enter a rest

  • Note input modes

    This page explains the default note input mode, Input by note name. In this mode, you choose a duration first, then select a pitch to place notes in the score.

    In Input by duration mode, the steps are reversed: first, you choose a pitch, then select a duration to place notes in the score.

    For more entry modes, see Alternative note input methods.

    Entering notes

    Selecting a start point

    To add a note or rest to the score, start by selecting a location to begin entry. You can use the mouse or the keyboard navigation commands.

    Entering note input mode

    Next, enter note input mode by pressing N or clicking the pencil icon in the toolbar. The note input cursor appears, indicating where the next note will be added in the score.

    If you don't select a starting location first, MuseScore places the cursor at the last input position, or in some other logical place, so be sure the cursor is where you intend.

    Enter notes left to right by first selecting a duration and then entering a pitch or rest. When you are done entering notes in this location and are ready to do something else—for example, entering notes at a different location, adding other markings, or performing other operations like copy and paste—you can exit note input mode by clicking the Input by note name button, pressing N again, or pressing Esc.

    MuseScore Studio has virtually unlimited undo history, so you don't have to worry about making mistakes. Just click the Undo button on the far right of the toolbar, or use the standard keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Z (Mac: Cmd+Z).

    Selecting duration

    While in note input mode, select a note value for the next note to be entered by:

    • Clicking a corresponding note icon in the Note input toolbar (directly above the score window), or

    • Entering the keyboard shortcut 1–9 corresponding to the desired duration

    The keyboard shortcuts are designed to be efficient and easy to remember. The most common note values—eighth, quarter, and half—are assigned to the keys 4, 5, and 6 respectively (the middle row of a numeric keypad). Shorter note values are represented by smaller numbers, and longer values by larger numbers. The full list is as follows:

    Other durations, including double dots and 128th notes, can be selected by customizing your toolbar or defining your own keyboard shortcuts.

    Selecting pitch

    Once you've selected a duration, enter pitches using the computer keyboard, mouse, MIDI keyboard, or virtual piano keyboard.

    Use ↑ or ↓ after entering a note to move it up or down by a half step.

    Selecting pitch using the computer keyboard

    This is generally the most efficient way to enter notes in MuseScore.

    Simply press the letter (A–G) on your computer keyboard that corresponds to the pitch you want to enter.

    Notes entered this way will replace any rests or notes that were already present at the cursor location. To add a note to an existing note or chord, hold Shift while pressing the letter of the new note. See the section on chords below for more information.

    When entering notes by letter name, MuseScore will choose the octave that is closest to the previous note on that staff. This works well for passages that move mostly by steps and small leaps. If you need to change the octave for a larger leap, use Ctrl+↑ and Ctrl+↓ (Mac: Cmd+↑ and Cmd+↓) to raise or lower the pitch of the previously-entered note by an octave.

    Selecting pitch using the mouse

    To enter a note using the mouse, position your mouse on the desired line or space in the staff, then click. The mouse cursor will show you a preview of the note you are about to enter to help you place it accurately.

    If any notes already exist at the point where you are entering a new note, clicking will add notes to the chord. To replace existing notes instead, hold Shift while entering the new note.

    It can be difficult to enter notes very far above or below a staff with this method, because MuseScore may interpret clicks far from the intended staff as an attempt to add notes to the staff above or below. Instead, try entering the note an octave lower or higher, then raise or lower the pitch by an octave using Ctrl+↑ and Ctrl+↓ (Mac: Cmd+↑ and Cmd+↓).

    Note: Although one would normally enter notes left to right, the mouse entry method allows you to enter a note at any location where there is an existing note or rest to replace.

    Selecting pitch using a MIDI keyboard

    If you have a MIDI keyboard connected, enter notes while in note input mode by simply pressing the corresponding keys.

    When playing notes on a MIDI keyboard, they are entered consecutively so long as you release each key fully before pressing the next. Create chords by pressing multiple MIDI keys at the same time.

    Notes entered via MIDI keyboard that are outside of the current key signature will have accidentals applied automatically, but the spelling of the accidental may not be what you intend. To change the enharmonic spelling of a selected note, press J.

    You can select duration using a MIDI keyboard if you set up the keys you wish to use for this in advance in Preferences → MIDI mappings.

    Selecting pitch using the virtual piano keyboard

    You can also input notes using the on-screen Piano keyboard panel. To display this, use View → Piano keyboard or press the shortcut P. The panel can be closed the same way.

    To enter a note, simply click the appropriate piano key with your mouse.

    As with the computer keyboard, notes entered in this way replace any existing notes or rests. To create chords instead, press and hold Shift while entering notes.

    To resize the keyboard, position the mouse within the panel and hold Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) while scrolling up or down.

    Entering chords

    For the purpose of this section, chords are any combination of multiple notes all starting at the same time, all sharing the same duration, and all sharing a single stem.

    If you wish to enter notes that sound together but start at different times, have different durations, or have separate stems, see Voices. For chords represented as text, like Dm7, see Chord symbols.

    Just as for individual notes, chords can be entered by computer keyboard, mouse, MIDI keyboard, or virtual piano keyboard. Except for MIDI keyboard (where you can enter multiple notes at once), notes are entered one at a time, but in a way that tells MuseScore to combine them into a chord rather than add them sequentially.

    Adding by pitch name

    To add a note to a chord by pitch name:

    • Computer keyboard: Hold Shift while entering the note using A–G

      • The next note will be added above any notes already present at the cursor location, so when building a chord it's easiest to start by entering the lowest note first.

    • Mouse: Click the location where you wish to add the note

    • MIDI keyboard: Either play all the notes at the same time, or play them one at a time but do not release one key before pressing the next

    • Virtual piano keyboard: Hold Shift while clicking a key in the piano panel

    Adding by interval

    You can also specify the note to be added based on the interval above or below the currently-selected note.

    • To add an interval above the selected note, use one of the following:

      • Press Alt+1-9 (Mac: Opt + 1-9), or

      • In the Note input toolbar, select Add → Intervals and choose an interval from the list

    • For intervals below the selected note, you can apply a custom shortcut of your own in → Shortcuts (search "interval" to see the relevant actions)

    Entering rests

    Rests can be entered using the computer keyboard or mouse. First, select a duration (e.g., using the toolbar or by pressing 1–9), then instead of entering a pitch as you would for a note, do one of the following options:

    • From the computer keyboard: Press 0

    • From the note input toolbar: Click the rest icon, then click in the score

    • Using a mouse: Right-click in the score

    Applying accidentals

    Standard accidentals (flat, natural, sharp, double flat, double sharp) can be entered either by selecting one in the toolbar before entering the pitch it applies to or by adding them to a note already entered.

    Selecting an accidental before entering a pitch

    To specify an accidental to be applied to the next note entered, you can use the buttons on the Note input toolbar above the score or the corresponding keyboard shortcuts. This can be done either before or after selecting the duration.

    The default accidental shortcuts are:

    • Flat: -

    • Sharp: +

    • Natural: =

    By default, accidentals are applied to the next note entered. So for example, if you want to enter a B♭, first press - then press B. You can change this behavior in Preferences → Note input → Apply accidentals, augmentation dots, and articulations.

    The usual rules of music notation apply, so if you apply a flat to a note, any subsequent notes you enter of that same pitch within the same measure will be flatted as well, even though no explicit flat sign will be added in front of them.

    Adding an accidental after entering a pitch

    Appropriate accidentals are automatically added to a note when you increase or decrease its pitch:

    • Move pitch up a semitone (spells with sharps): ↑

    • Move pitch down a semitone (spells with flats): ↓

    You can also apply an accidental to a note by clicking the appropriate icon in the Accidentals palette. This palette also contains a large number of microtonal and other special accidentals.

    Adding courtesy/cautionary accidentals

    Although the rules of music notation say that a barline cancels an accidental, and that any note on the same staff line or space in the next measure returns to the pitch indicated by the key signature, it is considered good practice to add a courtesy (also called cautionary) accidental anyway. These do not change the pitch of the note, so they cannot be added with the ↑ and ↓ keys. However, any of the other methods described above work.

    While parentheses or brackets are not required for courtesy accidentals, some editors choose to use them. To add parentheses or brackets around an accidental, you will need to temporarily leave note input mode, select the accidental, then either use the Properties panel to select a bracket type, or click the parentheses or brackets in the More section of the Accidentals palette.

    You can also use the Courtesy Accidentals plugin that comes pre-installed with MuseScore Studio to automatically add courtesy accidentals where appropriate.

    Entering ties

    A tie is a curved line between two notes of the same pitch which indicates that they are to be played as one combined duration. Though they look similar, ties are not to be confused with slurs, which join any number of notes of any pitches and indicate legato articulation.

    Because ties are always between notes of the same pitch, you do not need to enter the pitch for the second note. After entering the first note:

    1. Select the duration for the second note, (either by clicking the duration on the top toolbar or using the keyboard shortcuts 1-9)

    2. Click the tie button on the toolbar or type T.

    The tie command creates the tie and adds the second note at the same time. If the first note you entered is part of a chord, the tie command creates an entire second chord with the same pitches as the first and ties all of the notes together.

    Ties normally connect adjacent notes in the same voice, but MuseScore also supports ties between non-adjacent notes and between notes in different voices as described in the section on editing. Ties can also be entered across repeats and jumps.


    See also

    • Editing notes and rests

    • Voices

    • Tuplets

    • Alternate note input modes

    tablature
    percussion
    Jumps are items that indicate a jump from one point in the score to somewhere else.

    D.C.

    Repeat from the beginning (stands for for da capo).

    D.S.

    Repeat from the segno marker (stands for dal segno).

    D.C. al Fine

    Repeat from the beginning until 'Fine'.

    D.S. al Fine

    Repeat from the segno marker until 'Fine'.

    D.C. al Coda

    Repeat from the beginning until 'To Coda', then jump to the coda.

    D.S. al Coda

    Repeat from the segno marker until 'To Coda', then jump to the coda.

    Markers

    Markers are labelled positions in the score. Coda and segno markers indicate the destination of a jump:

    Coda

    (with or without additional text)

    Segno

    Fine and To Coda indicate the place where something should happen after a jump has been made:

    Fine

    End the piece or section. This must be used together with a 'D.C. al Fine' or 'D.S. al Fine'.

    To Coda

    Jump to the coda. This must be used together with a 'D.C. al Coda' or 'D.S. al Coda'.

    Though the 'To Coda' item is effectively both a marker and a jump, internally it is treated as a marker and has the corresponding properties. The destination of the jump to the coda is specified in the 'D.C. al Coda' or 'D.S. al Coda' item (see Jump properties, below).

    Adding a jump or marker

    To add a jump or marker to your score:

    1. Select a measure, or an item within the measure.

    2. Click the desired item in the Repeats & jumps palette.

    Alternatively, drag an item from the palette and drop it onto the measure.

    Coda and segno are placed at the beginning of the measure, and all other jumps and markers at the end.

    Changing appearance of jumps and markers

    Jumps and markers are text, so they are edited like any other text objects.

    Markers often also contain music symbols (e.g. for segno and coda), which are taken from the musical text font the score is using. The size and alignment of these symbols can be controlled independently of the rest of the text in their properties.

    To enter music symbols into these items, use the Special characters dialog (Properties -> Text -> Insert special characters).

    Changing playback of jumps and markers

    Using labels to define the flow of playback

    Jumps and markers are connected using labels, which are simple text identifiers that define the flow of playback. For most scores, you should not need to change the default labels of jumps and markers that are added from palettes. See Example of how labels control playback flow.

    To indicate the beginning or end of the score, this specific syntax must be used:

    • start is the beginning of the score or section.

    • end is the end of the score or section.

    Otherwise, the labels can be whatever you like, as long as they match up correctly. If you are creating more elaborate structures than the defaults allow, you can customize them in properties.

    Labels do not display on the score and have no inherent relationship to the text that the item on the score may contain.

    Ignoring jumps and markers in playback

    To ignore repeats, jumps, and markers in playback:

    1. In the playback toolbar, open the cog menu

    2. Uncheck Play repeats

    Jump properties

    Default settings for 'D.S. al Coda'
    • Jump to: The label of the marker that playback should jump to, once this jump is reached.

    • Play until: The label of the marker where playback should continue until.

    • Continue at: The label of the marker to jump to once the label specified in Play until is reached. If this field is blank, playback will stop at the Play until label.

    • Play repeats: Whether to play repeats after the jump happens.

    Example of how labels control playback flow

    The image above shows the default settings for a 'D.S. al Coda'. It describes that the following should happen once it is reached:

    1. Jump to the marker with the label segno (which is the default label of the segno item from the palette).

    2. Play from that label until the marker with the label coda (which is the default label of the 'To Coda' item from the palette).

    3. Then jump to the marker with the codab (which is the default label of the coda item from the palette).

    Since Play repeats is unchecked, any repeats encountered after the initial jump will be ignored.

    Marker properties

    Default settings for 'Segno'
    • Marker type: The type of marker (non-editable).

    • Label: The marker's label. This should match one of the labels referenced in a jump, according to what purpose the marker serves.

    • Symbol size: The size in points of any musical symbols (coda, segno, etc.) used as part of the text on the score.

    • Align symbol with barline: If checked, and if the item contains a symbol, the entire item will be positioned such that the symbol is centered over the barline. If unchecked, the alignment buttons below become enabled and the desired alignment can be chosen.

    Jump and marker style

    The text styles for repeats and jumps can be configured in Format -> Style -> Text styles -> Repeat text left and Repeat text right. The Repeat text left style is used for markers which go at the start of the bar (coda, segno), and the Repeat text right style is used for markers which go at the end (everything else).

    The musical text font, used for the symbols, can be changed in Format -> Style -> Score -> Musical text font.

    Adding a time signature

    To add a time signature, or replace an existing one:

    1. Select a measure, note or rest, or time signature in the score

    2. Click a time signature in the Time signatures palette.

    Alternatively, drag a time signature directly from the palette onto the measure where you want it to appear.

    Currently, time signature changes can only occur at the beginning of a measure.

    Changing a time signature will cause any existing music that follows to be re-barred, and some items may be lost in this process, so the changes should be checked carefully.

    Deleting a time signature

    To delete a time signature, select it and press Del.

    If you delete the time signature at the beginning of the score, the music is treated as though it is in a nominal 4/4 and re-barred accordingly.

    Creating a custom time signature

    If you need a time signature that is not available in the palette, you can create your own using the Create Time Signature dialog. You can access this dialog from the Time signatures palette:

    1. In the Time signatures palette, click More

    2. Click the Create time signature button in the popup

    Or, from the Master Palette:

    1. Select View -> Master palette from the menu bar, or press Shift+F9

    2. Choose Time signatures from the list in the left of the dialog.

    To create your time signature in this dialog:

    1. In Value, enter the numerator and denominator

    2. If you want the time signature to be displayed differently than its real value, enter the text you wish to see in the Text fields

    3. If necessary, adjust the beaming in the Beam groups section (see below)

    To add the new time signature to the Time signatures palette, click the Add button. You can now add it to the score from the palette in the usual way.

    Controlling time signature visibility

    To toggle whether time signatures are to be shown on a particular staff (throughout the score):

    1. Right-click the staff and choose Staff/Part properties... from the context menu

    2. Check/uncheck the Show time signature box.

    To hide a specific time signature on all staves:

    1. Select the time signature

    2. In the Properties panel, under General, uncheck the Visible toggle (or simply press V).

    For controlling visibility of courtesies, see Courtesy time signatures, below.

    Adding a local time signature

    Sometimes there may be different time signatures on different staves simultaneously. In this example, the global time signature is 3/4, but the right hand staff is notated in 18/16:

    Bach: Goldberg Variations, no. 26

    We refer to this as a 'local' time signature, i.e. one which applies only to a single staff, rather than to all staves.

    To add a local time signature, add it (either by dragging from the palette to the required staff, or selecting the measure and clicking a time signature in the palette) while holding Ctrl (Mac: Cmd).

    Local time signatures always result in bars of the same length as the global time signature; you can think of them as putting an invisible tuplet over each bar (in the Bach example above, an 18:12 tuplet). It is not yet possible to have bars of differing lengths.

    It is also not possible to add a local time signature on a staff where there is any existing music following it.

    Resizing a time signature

    1. Select a time signature

    2. In the Properties panel, under Time signature, adjust the Scale values. The horizontal and vertical scale can be modified separately.

    Changing the scale affects the time signature on all staves where it appears.

    Time signature properties

    To open the Time Signature Properties dialog, either:

    • Right-click on a time signature and select Time signature properties from the menu

    • Select a time signature and click the Time signature properties button under Time signature in the Properties panel.

    Appearance

    These options let you change the appearance of the time signature without affecting its underlying rhythmic value. Choose between:

    • Text: Insert the nominal numerator and denominator that you wish to appear on the score (if empty, the real values will appear in the score)

    • Common time

    • Cut time

    • Other: a dropdown containing Medieval and Renaissance prolation symbols.

    Beam groups

    Here you can customize how groups of notes are beamed together. See Setting the default beaming for a time signature.

    Courtesy time signatures

    Normally, when a time signature change falls at the start of the system, a courtesy (also called cautionary) is shown at the end of the previous system.

    To disable or re-enable all courtesy time signatures throughout the score:

    1. Select Format -> Style from the menu bar and

    2. Select Clefs, keys & time signatures from the list on the left

    3. Under Time signatures, check/uncheck the Show courtesy time signatures box.

    To hide or show an individual courtesy time signature:

    1. Select the parent time signature (i.e. not the courtesy itself)

    2. In the Properties panel, under Time signature, check/uncheck the Show courtesy time signature on previous system box.

    To control what happens around repeats and jumps, see Changes and courtesies at repeats and jumps.

    Time signature styles

    There are three options for time signature position available in the style dialog (Format -> Style -> Clefs, key & time signatures) under Time signatures -> Position:

    • On all staves: show the time signature on each stave (this is the default, and most common style)

    • Above staves: show the time signature above specific staves only, usually at a larger size

    • Across staves: show the time signature across the staves, usually at a much larger size

    For the 'Above staves' and 'Across staves' options, time signatures are treated as system markings and will appear at the positions you specify for system markings in the Layout panel. See Managing system markings for more information.

    This is followed by settings for Style and size, which are somewhat different for each of the three Position settings, and can be set independently for each style:

    • Numeral style, with three options:

      • normal

      • narrow (often used for 'Above staves' and 'Across staves' styles)

      • narrow sans-serif (often used for the 'Across staves' style, especially in band and film scores)

    • Alignment with barlines (for 'Above staves' only): whether the time signatures should be left-aligned or centered over barlines

    • Alignment across staves (for 'Across staves' only): whether the time signatures should be aligned to the top of the group that they apply to, or vertically centered

    • Scale: the size of the time signatures as a multiple of their 'normal' size; the horizontal and vertical settings are linked, but if you want to adjust them independently, click the lock icon to the right

    • Gap between numbers (scaled): the vertical distance between the top and bottom numbers in the time signature, scaled to the vertical Scale setting

    • Vertical placement: offset from the default vertical position

    If Show courtesy time signatures is turned on, the 'Above staves' style also has options for End-of-staff alignment:

    • Hang into page margin: allow the time signature to hang into the margin (only available if Alignment with barline is set to centered)

    • Inset time signature: right-justify the time signature to the margin, without moving the barline

    • Inset barline: right-justify the time signature to the margin, moving the barline inward to maintain the required alignment

    There are some more global style settings for time signatures available in the style dialog (Format -> Style):

    • In Measures, under Padding, some settings to configure the distances between time signatures and other items:

      • Clef to time signature

      • Key signature to time signature

      • Barline to time signature

      • Time signature to barline

    • In Measures, under System header, one more distance setting:

      • Time signature to first note (this only applies at the beginning of a system)

    • In Barlines, Use double barlines before time signatures has three options:

      • Always: always use a double barline

      • Never: always use a single barline

      • Only before courtesy time signatures: use a double barline before courtesies, but a single barline otherwise.

    New Score dialog
    Time signatures palette
    Adding a key signature

    To add a key signature, or replace an existing one:

    1. Select a measure, note or rest, or key signature in the score

    2. Click a key signature in the Key signatures palette.

    Alternatively, drag a key signature directly from the palette onto the measure where you want it to appear.

    Currently, key signature changes can only occur at the beginning of a measure (except for local key signatures).

    Though they most commonly appear at the start of a measure, key signature changes can occur on any note or rest within a measure.

    Note: It is also possible, though uncommon, to add a key-signature mid measure by selecting a note then clicking a palette key signature, or dragging the key signature to a note.

    Deleting a key signature

    To delete a key signature, select it and press Del.

    You cannot delete the key signature at the very beginning of a score, and MuseScore Studio will give an error if you try. This is because it is impossible to know whether you want a C major/A minor key signature, or an 'open/atonal' one. Instead, add the key signature you want to the first bar from the palette.

    Controlling key signature visibility

    To toggle whether key signatures should be shown on a particular staff (throughout the score):

    1. Right-click the staff and choose Staff/Part properties... from the context menu

    2. Click the Advanced style properties... button

    3. Check/uncheck the Show key signature box.

    Note that the music is still notated as though the key signatures are in effect, even though they are not drawn. To remove a key signature from a particular staff and notate the pitches with accidentals instead, apply a local key signature of the open/atonal type to that staff instead.

    Usually, key signatures are repeated at the start of each system after the point where they first appear. To change this:

    1. Open the Style dialog (Format -> Style)

    2. Select Clefs, key & time signatures from the list on the left

    3. Under Key signatures, select an option for Visibility:

      • Show on every system is the default behaviour

      • Hide after the first system where they appear will suppress the automatic restatement of key signatures on subsequent systems.

    To hide a specific key signature on all staves:

    1. Select the key signature

    2. In the Properties panel, under General, uncheck the Visible toggle (or simply press V).

    Note that the key signature will still appear on subsequent systems, unless you disable this behaviour (see above).

    For controlling visibility of courtesy key signatures, see Courtesy key signatures, below.

    Adding a local key signature

    Sometimes you may need a different key signature to the global one on certain staves. We refer to this as a 'local' key signature.

    Unlike global key signatures, local key signatures can be applied to any note or rest within the measure, not just to the beginning.

    To add a local key signature, add it (either by dragging from the palette to the required place, or selecting the measure, or a note or rest within it, and clicking a key signature in the palette) while holding Ctrl (Mac: Cmd).

    Deleting a key signature on a single staff

    If you have a global key signature but do not want the change to apply to a specific staff, you can delete it on that staff only:

    1. Hold Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) and click the key signature on the desired staff

    2. Press Del.

    Courtesy key signatures

    Normally, when a key signature change falls at the start of a system, a courtesy (also called cautionary) is shown at the end of the previous system.

    To disable or re-enable all courtesy key signatures throughout the score:

    1. Open the Style dialog (Format -> Style)

    2. Select Clefs, key & time signatures from the list on the left

    3. Under Key signatures, check/uncheck the Show courtesy key signatures box.

    To hide or show an individual courtesy key signature:

    1. Select the parent key signature (i.e. not the courtesy itself)

    2. In the Properties panel, under Key signature, check/uncheck the Show courtesy key signature on previous system box.

    To control what happens around repeats and jumps, see Changes and courtesies at repeats and jumps.

    Key signatures and transposing instruments

    When working with a transposed score or part (i.e. with Concert pitch turned off), care must be taken when applying key signatures. All key signatures are 'sounding pitch', so, for example, if you wish to achieve a 'written' D major key signature in a B flat clarinet part, you need to apply a C major key signature (since the clarinet is written a tone higher than it sounds).

    Open/atonal key signature

    Some instruments (e.g. French horn, timpani) are conventionally written with no key signatures. To achieve this, add an open/atonal local key signature to the staff. This is already done in scores created from templates.

    An open/atonal key signature looks like a C major/A minor one, but unlike all the other key signatures it is unaffected by transposition.

    Creating a custom key signature

    If you need a key signature that is not available in the palette, you can create your own using the Create Key Signature dialog. You can access this dialog from the Key signatures palette:

    1. In the Key signatures palette, click More

    2. Click the Create key signature button in the popup

    Or, from the Master Palette:

    1. Select View -> Master palette from the menu bar, or press Shift+F9

    2. Choose Key signatures from the list in the left of the dialog.

    To create your key signature in this dialog, simply drag accidentals from the bottom of the dialog onto the staff above as required. Note:

    • To adjust the vertical position of an accidental on the staff, simply drag it up or down

    • The accidentals are automatically spaced from left to right in the order you add them. If you want to move them horizontally, hold Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) and drag them left or right

    • To remove an accidental, select it and press Del

    • To remove all accidentals, click the Clear button.

    To add the new time signature to the Key signatures palette, click the Add button. You can now add it to the score from the palette in the usual way.

    Key signature mode

    You can set the mode of a key signature (major, minor, Dorian, etc) if required:

    1. Select a key signature

    2. In the Properties panel, under Key signature, select an option from the Mode dropdown.

    MuseScore Studio does not currently do anything with this information, and the default setting is Unknown. However, it is included when exporting to MusicXML, where it may be relevant.

    Key signature style

    There are some more global style settings for key signatures available in the style dialog (Format -> Style):

    • In Measures, under Padding, some settings to configure the distances between key signatures and other items:

      • Clef to key signature

      • Key signature to time signature

      • Barline to key signature

      • Key signature to barline

    • In Accidentals:

      • Naturals in key signatures lets you specify when cancelling naturals should be shown in key signature changes

    • In Measures, under System header, one more distance setting:

      • Clef/key signature to first note (this only applies at the beginning of a system)

    • In Barlines, Use double barlines before key signatures has three options:

      • Always: always use a double barline

      • Never: always use a single barline

      • Only before courtesy key signatures: use a double barline before courtesies, but a single barline otherwise

    See also

    • Transposition

    New Score dialog

    Click Open all

    To open an individual part:

    1. Click Parts in the toolbar

    2. Click a part to select it

    3. Click Open selected

    You can also select specific parts to open at once. Do this by holding Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) while selecting the parts you’d like to open, then click Open selected. You can also select a range of contiguous parts by clicking the first and holding Shift while clicking the last.

    Closing a part

    Click the X close button in a part tab to close a part.

    Note that changes you make to a part will be saved with that part and retrievable the next time you open it from the Parts dialog.

    Creating custom parts

    The Parts dialog is tightly integrated with the Layout panel. This integration makes it easy for you to create parts with any combination of instruments from your score.

    There are two ways to customize parts in MuseScore 4: using the default (i.e. ready-made) parts to reveal other instruments, and creating entirely new parts.

    Reveal instruments in default parts

    As we’ve already seen, MuseScore 4 automatically creates a new (default) part for every instrument in your score. All you have to do is open the part from the Parts dialog.

    In fact, each default part already contains all of the instruments in your score – they’re simply hidden from view (except, of course, the chosen part instrument).

    This means you can “reveal” other instruments within any of the default parts. To do this:

    1. Open a part (as described above)

    2. Select the Layout panel

    3. Click the eye icon next to another instrument

    This instrument will now be visible in the chosen part.

    This makes creating custom parts an incredibly flexible process. Revealing or hiding other instruments is completely non-destructive, meaning you can customize every instrument in every part, and hide or show only what you want to reveal to different players (or for different musical projects) without having to create entirely new parts each time.

    Create a new part

    You can create a completely "blank" part from scratch, allowing you full control over which instruments it shows. To do this:

    1. Click Parts in the toolbar to open the Parts dialog

    2. Click Create new part

    3. Give your new part a name

    4. Click Open selected

    Your new part will now be open in the Score tab, but it will appear to contain no instruments. To add instruments to this part:

    1. Go to the Layout panel

    2. Click the eye icon next to each instrument you’d like to appear in your part

    Choose which voices appear in each part

    Sometimes it will be necessary to create individual parts from staves that contain multiple voices. You might, for example, want to extract separate parts for orchestral players who share a staff in the main score (E.g. Flute I and Flute II). Or you might wish to create individual vocal parts from choral scores where, for example, four voices are notated across two staves.

    You'll need to first create (see above) or duplicate (see below) a part. To then select which voices will appear in a part:

    1. Open a part (see above)

    2. Go to the Layout panel

    3. Expand an instrument by clicking on the triangular dropdown icon

    4. Click the settings icon next to the staff name

    5. Select which voice(s) you want to appear in your part by ticking/un-ticking the checkboxes under Voices visible in the score

    Applying styles to parts

    Style settings for a wide range of engraving elements can be applied specifically to parts without affecting the main score.

    To change style settings for a specific part:

    1. Ensure a part has been opened and is currently selected in the Score tab

    2. Go to Format → Style...

    3. Make your desired style settings changes (applicable changes will be visible in the score in real time)

    4. Click OK to confirm your changes

    Changes you make in this dialog will affect only the part selected in the Score tab. If you want changes to affect all parts (but not the main score), select Apply to all parts before clicking OK.

    Learn more about saving and loading default style settings in Templates and styles.

    Managing synchronisation of score and parts

    (This section describes features that are new or considerably enhanced in MuseScore 4.2.)

    When you make changes to the content of the score - adding or deleting an item, or changing pitches and durations of notes, for example - these changes are always reflected in the parts, and vice versa.

    However, just as you can apply different styles to score and parts, you may want the properties (position, style/appearance) of certain items to differ between score and parts. Therefore:

    • When you change any property of an item in a part, that change will not be reflected in the score and the item will be marked as 'desynchronised' from the score, if it is not already;

    • When you change any property of an item in the score, that change will be reflected in the part, unless that item is already desynchronised.

    When an item in a part is desynchronised, its colour when selected changes to orange and, according on which properties have been changed, the toggles which appear in the Properties panel under Score and part synchronisation will switch off:

    Position refers to offset, leading space, minimum distance, autoplace, direction (up/down, above/below), alignment, and a few other properties specific to certain types. Style/appearance is, essentially, all other properties.

    If you have made changes to an item in the part but wish to resynchronise that item with the score, you can turn these toggles back on to reset those properties to match the score.

    Text items have a third toggle, Text, which allows you to control synchronisation of the content and formatting of a text item. Unlike other properties, this must be manually switched off before you make changes to a text item in a part which you do not want to be reflected in the score.

    Excluding items from parts or score

    In some cases you may wish certain items to be in the score but not to appear in the parts at all, or to appear in a part but not in the score. This is not the same as simply making the item invisible, as invisible items sometimes affect the layout.

    This option is available for frames, clef changes, ottava lines, staff text and system text. In the case of clefs and ottavas, excluding these items from one view will cause the notes there to be repositioned accordingly.

    To exclude an item from parts:

    1. Select the item in the score

    2. Open Properties

    3. Under Score and part synchronisation, check Exclude from parts

    To exclude an item from the score:

    1. Select the item in the part

    2. Open Properties

    3. Under Score and part synchronisation, check Exclude from score

    Renaming, duplicating and deleting parts

    This all takes place in the Parts dialog (accessible from the Parts button in the toolbar).

    Simply click the "three dots" menu icon next to a selected part to reveal its options. Note that only newly created parts (created by clicking the Create new part button) can be deleted. All parts can be duplicated or renamed.

    To duplicate any part:

    1. Select a part in the Parts dialog

    2. Click the "three dots" menu icon for the selected part

    3. Select Duplicate from the context menu that appears

    4. Enter a new name for the part (or leave the default name as is)

    5. Hit Enter, or click anywhere in the Parts dialog

    To rename any part:

    1. Select a part in the Parts dialog

    2. Click the "three dots" menu icon for the selected part

    3. Select Rename from the context menu that appears

    4. Type your new part name

    5. Hit Enter to confirm the new name

    Note you can also double click on any part in the Parts dialog to rename it.

    To delete a newly created part:

    1. Select a newly created part in the Parts dialog

    2. Click the "three dots" menu icon for the selected part

    3. Select Delete from the context menu that appears

    When a part is deleted, its tab in the Score tab (if already opened) will be closed. Any customizations made to that part will also be lost. The part will also no longer appear in the Parts dialog.

    Exporting and printing parts

    To export parts:

    1. Click File → Export... (alternatively, select the Publish tab and click Export...)

    2. Check the box next to the part(s) you want to export, or click Select all to choose all parts at once

    3. Select whether to export all parts combined in one file, or leave the default export setting as each part to a separate file

    4. Click Export...

    5. Select your destination file and name your score in your operating system's Export dialog

    6. Click Save

    Parts will be exported in the PDF format by default. To change the export format, select your preferred format from the dropdown menu in Export settings. You can export your parts in a range of image and audio formats, as well as the braille format for compatible printers. For more information, see File Export.

    To print parts:

    1. Ensure the part you wish to print is selected in the Score tab

    2. Click File → Print

    3. Use your operating system's print dialog to print the selected part

    Note that parts can currently only be printed one at a time.

    Select from one of the available note input methods.

    Keyboard users can get to the Note input button by pressing Shift+Tab or Shift+F6 a few times from the score. Screen readers will say something like "Note input toolbar: Default (step-time)". Press Space on this button to open a menu that contains all the available note input methods.

    Each note input mode can also be activated directly using an assigned keyboard shortcut (See Keyboard shortcuts to learn how to assign these).

    Note that the selected note input method remains in effect even when you leave note input mode and will be enabled the next time you enter note input mode. So if you change to the Re-pitch method for a single passage, be sure to change back to the Step time method when you are done.

    Rhythm only

    The Rhythm note input method allows you to enter durations with a single keypress. This is especially useful for unpitched percussion instruments that use a single sound. In addition, you can combine Rhythm and Re-pitch methods for an efficient workflow in certain circumstances.

    1. Select your starting point in the score.

    2. Select the Rhythm note input method as described above.

    3. Select a duration from the note input toolbar, or use the keyboard shortcuts 1-9, to add a note of the selected duration.

    4. Add a dotted duration by pressing . and selecting/typing your desired duration. In this mode, the duration dot is toggled on/off for all subsequently entered durations. It's worth noting that the duration dot needs to be activated prior to entering the note value, rather than afterwards.

    5. Enter rests by clicking the rest icon in the note input toolbar and select/type your desired duration. When the desired duration already has been selected (from the previous entered note), pressing 0 will enter the rest. Click the rest button to return to entering notes.

    6. Continue pressing duration keys to enter notes with the chosen durations.

    By default, notes are entered onto the middle staff line. You can use the cursor keys to change the pitch of the note just entered, and subsequent notes will also be entered using that pitch. You can also use Re-pitch mode to quickly enter pitches for a passage after entering the rhythm.

    Re-pitch

    The Re-pitch note input method allows you to change the pitches of a sequence of notes while leaving their durations unaltered.

    1. Select your starting point in the score.

    2. Select the Re-pitch note input method as described above, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+I (Mac: Cmd+Shift+I).

    3. Enter pitches using the computer keyboard, MIDI keyboard or virtual piano keyboard. Note: you cannot use the mouse to input notes in the Re-pitch method.

    The Re-pitch method can be an extremely efficient way of entering notes in music with repeated rhythmic patterns. Simply copy and paste an existing passage that uses the same rhythm as your new passage, then use re-pitch mode to alter the pitches. The same technique can be used to enter multiple instrumental or vocal parts that share the same rhythm but different pitches.

    Real-time

    The real-time note input methods basically allow you to perform the piece on a MIDI keyboard (or MuseScore's virtual piano keyboard) and have the notation added for you. However, you should be aware of the following limitations which currently apply:

    • You must pre-select the shortest duration you wish to use.

    • You cannot enter tuplets in Real-time note input.

    • You must enter notes onto a single staff and in a single voice, just as with other note input modes.

    • It is not possible to use a computer keyboard for Real-time note input.

    These restrictions mean that MuseScore has very little guessing to do when working out how your input should be notated, which helps to keep these methods accurate.

    Real-time (metronome)

    With the Real-time (metronome) note input method, you play at a fixed tempo indicated by a metronome click. You can adjust the tempo by changing the delay between clicks from the menu: Edit→Preferences...→Note Input (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...→Note Input).

    1. Select your starting position in the score.

    2. Select the Real-time (metronome) note input method as described above.

    3. Select a duration from the note input toolbar to represent the metronome click.

    4. Press and hold a MIDI key or virtual piano key to enter a note of the selected duration.

    5. Listen for the metronome clicks—with each click the note grows by the selected duration.

    6. Release the key when the note has reached the desired length.

    The score stops advancing as soon as you release the key. If you want the score to continue advancing, which is necessary to enter rests, then you can use the Real-time Advance shortcut to start the metronome. The same action will stop the metronome again.

    Real-time (foot pedal)

    With the Real-time (foot pedal) note input method, you indicate your input tempo by tapping on a key or pedal. You can play at any speed you like, and it doesn't have to be constant. The default key for setting the tempo (called "Real-time Advance") is Enter on the numeric keypad (Mac: Fn+Return), but it is highly recommended that you change this to a MIDI key or MIDI pedal (see below).

    1. Select your starting position in the score.

    2. Select the Real-time (foot pedal) note input method as described above.

    3. Select a duration from the note input toolbar to represent the metronome click.

    4. Press and hold a MIDI key or virtual piano key.

    5. Press the "Real-time Advance" shortcut with each press, the note grows by the selected duration.

    6. Release the note when it has reached the desired length.

    Real-time Advance shortcut

    The "Real-time Advance" shortcut is used to start the metronome with the Real-time (metronome) method or to tap beats with the Real-time (foot pedal) method. It is called "Real-time Advance" because it causes the input position to move forward, or "advance", through the score.

    The default key for Real-time Advance is Enter on the numeric keypad (Mac: Fn+Return), but it is highly recommended that you assign this to a MIDI key or MIDI pedal via MuseScore's MIDI remote control. The MIDI remote control is available from the menu: Edit→Preferences...→MIDI mappings (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...→MIDI mappings).

    Alternatively, if you have a USB footswitch or computer pedal which can simulate keyboard keys, you could set it to simulate Enter on the numeric keypad.

    Insert

    Insert note input method allows you to insert and delete notes and rests within measures, automatically shifting subsequent music forward and backward within the measure. The measure duration is automatically updated as you go.

    To insert a note:

    1. Select your starting position in the score.

    2. Select the Insert note input method as described above.

    3. Enter a note or rest as you would in Step time mode. Each note is inserted before the current cursor position, and the measure duration is increased to compensate.

    When the notes are entered they will be placed just before the selected starting element, which will be highlighted with a square blue marker. The start element and any subsequent notes or rests within the same measure will be shifted forward. You can move the insertion point forward and backward using the Right or Left arrow keys, and the new insertion point will then be highlighted.

    Alternatively, if you have only one or two notes to insert, you can do this directly with the default Step time note input method. Press Ctrl+Shift (Mac: Cmd+Shift) while adding the note by mouse or keyboard shortcut (A-G).

    To insert a rest, first insert a note of the desired duration, then press Backspace or Del.

    To delete a note or rest, use the shortcut Ctrl+Del (Mac: Cmd+Backspace). The measure duration is decreased to compensate. The shortcut works with both the Step time and Insert note input methods.

    Because inserting and notes may cause the measure duration to increase or decrease beyond what is specified by the time signature, a small "+" or "-" sign will be shown above the measure when this happens.

    step-time
    Customizing percussion notation

    Using the options in the Customize kit dialog, you can:

    • Rename sub-instruments and variants

    • Customize noteheads

    • Assign a default voice

    • Change stave positions

    The Customize Kit dialog allows you to edit the appearance of all sub-instruments and variants in your kit.

    In the panel on the left, you can sort the list of sub-instruments and variants in the following ways:

    • Click the No. column header to sort by MIDI number

    • Click the Note column header to sort by pitch

    • Click the Shortcut column header to sort by keyboard shortcut

    • Click the Name column header to sort by name

    Sorting by MIDI number allows you to see the names of sub-instruments and variants in same order as they appear in the percussion panel as drum pads.

    Any customizations made in this dialog will be immediately shown in the preview panel. Changes will also be automatically shown in the score, however these will only be committed when you click OK. These changes are undoable.

    Rename sub-instruments and variants

    To rename a sub-instrument or variant:

    1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left

    2. Type your desired label in the field next to Name.

    The corresponding drum pad label in the percussion panel will be updated when you click either Apply or OK.

    Customize noteheads

    To customize the noteheads assigned to a sub-instrument or variant:

    1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left

    2. Click the dropdown next to Notehead group

    3. Choose from the large range of noteheads in the dropdown menu

    Each notehead group comes with up to four possible style variants for different durations (quarter note, half note, whole note, double whole note). These come pre-defined, but can be edited if you have specific requirements.

    To edit noteheads for individual durations within a notehead group:

    1. Click the Edit noteheads checkbox

    2. Choose your required notehead for each duration in the corresponding dropdown menus

    Assign a default voice

    To change the default voice to which a sub-instrument or variant is assigned:

    1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left

    2. Choose from either voice 1, 2, 3, or 4 in the dropdown next to Default voice

    Changing a voice assignment affects all future notation for the selected sub-instrument or variant but does not alter existing notation.

    Change stave positions

    To change the stave line or space at which a sub-instrument or variant is positioned:

    1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left

    2. Move its notehead up or down by clicking the arrows in the spin box next to Stave line

    Assign a keyboard shortcut

    To assign a keyboard shortcut for a sub-instrument or variant:

    1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left

    2. Click the button next to Shortcut

    3. Type a key to set a shortcut

    4. Click Save to confirm your selection

    A message will appear if your chosen shortcut conflicts with another assignment. Clicking Save at this point will trigger a prompt asking you to confirm your choice.

    In some cases, it may be okay to assign a shortcut already in use. MuseScore Studio can recognize when a shortcut is being used for percussion notation input and when it applies to something else outside the percussion system.

    Should a change in shortcut render an existing function no longer possible, either choose a different shortcut, or remove the shortcut by clicking Clear in the Define percussion keyboard shortcut dialog.

    This dialog allows you to define or clear a shortcut assignment for each percussion sub-instrument or variant.

    Choose the default stem direction

    To change the default stem direction for a sub-instrument or variant:

    1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left

    2. Choose from either Up, Down, or Auto in the dropdown next to Stem direction

    Changing the stem direction affects all future notation for the selected sub-instrument or variant but does not alter existing notation.

    Saving changes and using them in other scores

    When you've finished making customizations, press OK to commit your changes. These are saved to your score file.

    It's also possible to save all your customizations, as well as the drum pad layout in the percussion panel, for use in other scores.

    To save your percussion kit for use in other scores:

    1. Save your setup as a drumset file (.drm) by clicking Save as... in the bottom left corner of the dialog

    2. Choose a file location on your computer. By default, the file will be saved in MuseScore Studio's Styles folder

    3. Click Save

    When loading your drumset file into another score, bear in mind that, while a drumset file can technically be loaded onto any unpitched percussion instrument, playback will only work correctly if the right sound library is chosen in the mixer.

    When setting up your score, it's safest to add an instrument that matches the one you've previously customized.

    To load your percussion kit in another score

    1. Create or open another score containing an unpitched percussion instrument

    2. Select the instrument's stave

    3. Click Edit kit in the percussion panel header

    4. In the Customize kit dialog that appears, click the Load... button in the bottom left corner

    5. Locate your saved drumset (.drm) file

    6. Click Open

    Your customizations, including any changes made to the layout of the percussion panel, will now be ready to use in your new score.

    Selecting a single element

    To select a single element with the mouse, simply click it.

    To select a single element with the keyboard, use the cursor keys to navigate to the element. Note that there is no separate concept of a “cursor” in MuseScore that is separate from the selection, except while in Note Input mode. In Normal mode, the left and right cursor keys select elements one by one as you navigate, so even though there is technically not a cursor, the selection itself acts in a similar way.

    By themselves, the cursor keys navigate through notes and rests only. When combined with Alt, they navigate through all elements, including articulation, dynamics, and other markings.

    Notes

    A note normally consists of multiple elements: the notehead, stem, flag, dot, accidental, etc. Most commands that operate on a single note expect you to select the notehead itself.

    Chords

    The notes of a chord share a single stem and flag. Even a single note can be considered a “chord” in the sense that it consists of these multiple elements.

    To select a complete chord (all noteheads plus the stem and other elements), first make sure nothing is currently selected (you can press Esc to be sure) and then Shift+click the chord. This creates a range selection that encompasses the chord.\

    Note that the selection may also include content in other voices if present, but see the section on excluding elements from range selections for information on how to avoid that if necessary.

    Overlapping elements

    If multiple elements overlap, clicking selects the topmost element. To select the element underneath a currently-selected element, Ctrl+click it. This deselects the currently-selected element and selects the next element beneath it, if any. Thus, repeated Ctrl+click operations cycle through a set of overlapping elements.

    Selecting a list of individual elements

    You can select a list of elements manually by selecting each individually or automatically by using commands to select elements that are similar to a given element.

    Selecting multiple elements manually

    To add an element to the list of selected elements, Ctrl+click it. If an element is already selected, Ctrl+click removes it from the list of selected elements.

    You can also use Ctrl+click to add or remove individual elements from a range selection. In the process, this converts the selection into a list selection.

    If the elements you wish to select are outside of the staff and clear of other elements, you may be able to create a list selection by using Shift+drag to draw a selection box around the desired elements. If any notes or rests are included, however, a range selection is performed instead.

    Selecting similar elements automatically

    To select all elements of a given type in the entire score or in a given staff:

    1. Right-click one such element

    2. In the resulting menu, click Select→Similar or Select→Similar on this staff as appropriate

    To select all elements of a given type within a range:

    1. Click the first such element

    2. Shift+click the last such element

    —OR—

    1. Perform the range selection using the techniques described below

    2. Right-click one element within the range

    3. In the resulting menu, click Select→Similar in this range

    To create more complex selections of similar elements:

    1. (Optional) Perform a range selection

    2. Right-click an element

    3. In the resulting menu, click Select→More

    4. Check the desired boxes within the resulting dialog (see below)

    The options available in the select dialog will depend on the type of element you right-clicked.

    The selection options specific to notes are:

    • Same notehead: notes with the same notehead group (normal, cross, slash, etc.)

    • Same pitch: notes with the same pitch name, accidental, and octave

    • Same string: notes with the on the same string (tablature only)

    • Same type: notes of the same type (normal, acciaccatura, appoggiatura)

    • Same note type: notes of the same duration, not considering presence of dots or tuplets

    • Same duration: notes of the same actual duration

    • Same note name: notes with the same pitch name and accidental, not considering octave

    • Same staff: notes in the same staff

    • Same voice: notes in the same voice

    • In selection: notes within the current selection

    • Same system: notes in the same system

    In addition to the type-specific selection options, there are action options at the bottom of the dialog that are common to all element types. These control what happens to the selected elements, and only one of these can be chosen at a time:

    • Replace selection: if checked, this action selection replaces an existing selection

    • Add to selection: if checked, this action adds elements to an existing selection

    • Subtract from selection: if checked, this action removes elements from an existing selection

    Selecting a range of measures and staves

    A range selection includes all elements from a given beginning and ending time position across a given set of staves. It is the usual starting point for operations such as copy and paste.

    Selecting a range by dragging

    To select a range of measures and staves with the mouse alone, use Shift+drag to draw a rectangle around it. Note that this is only feasible for relatively small selections that fit on screen at once.

    Selecting a range by clicking

    A more flexible method for making selections uses a combination of mouse and keyboard:

    1. Click the first note or rest of the desired selection

    2. Shift+click the last

    In between the click and Shift+click, you can use navigation commands to position the score. This allows you make selections that span several pages.

    This method works just as well if you first click the last note/rest then Shift+click the first.

    Selecting a range using the keyboard

    You can also make range selections using the keyboard alone or primarily:

    1. Select the first note or rest using keyboard navigation or by clicking

    2. Hold Shift while using keyboard navigation to extend the selection as you navigate

    The available commands include:

    • Shift+Left and Shift+Right to extend the selection one note or rest at a time

    • Shift+Ctrl+Left and Shift+Ctrl+Right to extend the selection one measure at a time (Mac: use Cmd instead of Ctrl)

    • Shift+Up and Shift+Down to extend the selection one staff at a time

    • Shift+Home and Shift+End to extend to the beginning or end of the system

    • Shift+Ctrl+Home and Shift+Ctrl+End to extend to the beginning or end of the score (Mac: use Cmd instead of Ctrl)

    Special range selections

    MuseScore includes some special commands to make command selections:

    • Edit→Select all or Ctrl+A (Mac: Cmd+A) to select the entire score

    • Edit→Select section to select the current section of the score (everything between the previous and next section breaks)

    Excluding elements from a range selection

    For certain operations involving range selections, you might want to exclude elements of a given type from the selection. For example, you may wish to copy the notes, rest, and most other markings in a phrase, but skip the lyrics. Or in a passage with multiple voices, you may wish to delete everything not in voice 1. To exclude elements of a given type from a range selection:

    1. Perform the range selection normally

    2. Open the Selection Filter with View→Selection filter

    3. Remove the checkmarks next to any element types you want excluded from the selection

    Note that if you exclude voice 1, you will not be able to select any measures that lack content in other voices. So be sure to restore voice 1 after performing the operation for which you are excluding voice 1. For example, if you wish to copy and paste only voice 2, make your range selection, use the Selection Filter to exclude voice 1, use Edit→Copy or Ctrl+C, then restore the checkbox next to voice 1 before attempting to select the destination to paste.

    voice
    Single selection
    Range selection

    Select the duration (see below) of the note or rest to be entered.

  • Press arrow keys to navigate:

    • Up and Down moves the cursor between strings.

    • Left and Right moves through the score.

  • Type digits to enter fret numbers from 0 to the maximum set in the Edit String Data dialog.

    • Fret numbers 0 to 9 can also be entered with the letter keys A to K, skipping I. This is useful when writing French-style period tablature notation.

    • Values higher than 9 must be typed as numeric digits. For example, type 1 0 for 10, which appears as l (lowercase L) in French tablature.

  • Press ; (semicolon) to enter a rest of the selected duration.

  • To enter grace notes, see Grace notes.

  • You can enter notes in different voices if required—just as you would in a standard staff.

  • See also, Editing notes and rests (below).

    Mouse entry

    1. Enter note input mode and select the note or rest duration (see below).

    2. Click on a string and MuseScore will enter a 0 (zero), which means "open string".

      • For French-style period tablature notation, MuseScore enters an a (lowercase A) instead of 0.

    3. Type digits to replace 0 with any fret number up to the maximum set in the .

      • Fret numbers 0 to 9 can also be entered with the letter keys A to K, skipping I. This is useful when writing French tablature.

      • Values higher than 9 must be typed as numeric digits. For example, type 1 0 for 10, which appears as l (lowercase L) in French tablature.

    4. You can increase/decrease the fret mark using Alt+Shift+Up or Alt+Shift+Down.

    5. You can enter notes in different voices if required—just as you would in a standard staff.

    See also, Editing notes and rests" (below).

    Selecting note duration

    Whether you are using a keyboard or mouse, you can set note duration using one of the following:

    • Press Shift+0 up to Shift+9: to set duration from a 128th note to a longa (availability of these shortcuts may depend on the platform and/or keyboard layout);

    • Press NumPad 0 to 9: to set duration from a 128th note to a longa (if a numeric keypad exists and NumLock is on);

    • Click on the desired note duration icon in the Note Input toolbar above the document window;

    • Press Q to decrease the selected duration and W to increase it.

    Note: This applies to note input mode only. If you want to change the duration of a selected note in normal mode see Changing duration in normal mode.

    Period tablature notation

    MuseScore also supports tablature notation for period instruments such as the renaissance and baroque lutes, Theorbo etc. There are a number of notation systems in use (French, Italian, German, Spanish), but the most common is French.

    French tablature features 6 lines representing the top 6 courses. Instead of numbers, fretmarks are indicated by letters—as explained above. Any notes on bass courses below the 6th string (fretted or unfretted) are represented by symbols in the space underneath the 6th line of tablature.

    To enter symbols below the 6th course:

    1. In note input mode, move the cursor until it is in the space below the 6th line. Press Down to move the cursor to the next lowest course and so on. As you do so a "cue mark" appears at the left side of the cursor to show you which course is active:

    Cue mark
    Number of course
    Fretmark entered automatically for unstopped course

    no cue

    7

    a

    /

    8

    /a

    //

    9

    //a

    ///

    10

    Conversely you can return to a higher course by pressing Up, and the cue mark changes accordingly. 2. If the selected course is fretted simply enter a fretmark in note input mode (as shown above). If the selected course is unstopped press any note key in note input mode and MuseScore will automatically enter the correct zero fretmark (see table above).

    Editing tablature notation

    Changing the pitch

    In note input mode:

    1. Position the cursor over the fret mark and type the desired number.

    2. Increment or decrement the fret mark using Alt+Shift+Up; or, Alt+Shift+Down (The fret mark automatically changes strings, if necessary, to achieve the lowest possible fret position).

    In normal mode:

    1. Select one or more fret marks.

    2. Use any of the following commands:

      • To increment or decrement, without changing the string: Press Up/Down.

      • To increment or decrement, changing strings, when possible, to minimize the fret number: Press Alt+Shift+Up/Down.

    Note: The fret mark cannot be higher than the “Number of frets” value set in the Edit String Data dialog.

    Moving the fretmark to a different string

    To move the fret mark to an adjacent string without changing the pitch:

    In note input mode:

    • Position the cursor over a fret mark, and press Ctrl+Up/Down (Mac: Cmd+Up/Down).

    In normal mode:

    Use one of the following methods:

    • Select one or more fret marks, and press Ctrl+Up/Down (Mac: Cmd+Up/Down).

    • Drag a fret mark up or down to an adjacent string.

    Note: This operation can only proceed if the relevant string is free and can produce that note.

    Changing the duration

    See Changing duration in normal mode.

    Crosshead/Ghost notes

    To change a fret mark to a crosshead/ghost note:

    1. Select one or more fret marks (in normal mode).

    2. Press Shift+X to toggles ghost noteheads on/off.

    normal mode
    note input mode
    Barline style settings
    Barline style settings

    Braille

    Overview

    MuseScore Studio's braille panel displays the current measure in braille music notation. It can also be used to enter notes and some musical symbols using Perkins-style 6-key braille input.

    The content of the braille panel is similar to what you get if you export braille via the File menu, but the braille panel updates live as you navigate through the score.

    Terminology: braille vs. print

    On this page, we refer to braille music notation as "braille", and ordinary stave notation as "print".

    Print music is simply the traditional music notation that sighted musicians use on paper and electronic devices (i.e. sheet music). Braille can also be used on paper, but it's not printed with ink. Instead, it's embossed as raised dots that blind musicians read by touch. It's common in accessibility circles to use the word "print" to mean non-braille notation.

    Output to a physical braille display

    The contents of the braille panel can be displayed on a braille terminal connected to your computer (e.g. via Bluetooth or USB).

    The following limitations apply when using a physical braille display:

    • NVDA must be used as the screen reader.

    • MuseScore’s braille panel must have keyboard focus.

      • When the score has focus, the braille terminal will just show ordinary status text from the screen reader.

    • Braille navigation and 6-key input must be performed with the computer keyboard.

    Please let us know in the if you discover a way to bypass any of these limitations.

    Viewing braille

    To open or close the braille panel

    1. Go to Preferences > Braille.

    2. Check (or uncheck) the Show braille panel box.

    The braille panel appears directly below the score in MuseScore’s main window.

    To focus the braille panel

    With the braille panel open, press the Tab key while the score has focus. A caret (text cursor) will appear in the braille at the position of whatever element was selected in the score. For example, if a note was selected in the score, the text caret will appear on that note in the braille.

    Press Shift+Tab at any time to leave the braille panel and return to the score. The braille panel will remain open so you can navigate to it again with Tab.

    Navigating the braille

    While the braille panel has focus, you can move the text caret around using the arrow keys. As the caret moves through the braille, the element to the right of the caret becomes selected in the score. If that element is a note, MuseScore will play the sound of the note.

    The braille panel only shows one measure at a time, but it shows that measure for all instruments in the score. Each line of braille corresponds to a staff in the print notation, so grand staff instruments like the piano get two lines of braille, and the organ gets three lines.

    If a staff has lyrics, these are written on another line of braille immediately below the line corresponding to that staff. If there are multiple lines of lyrics (e.g. for multiple verses), each line of lyrics is written on a separate line in the braille.

    Shortcuts for navigation

    The following keyboard shortcuts are available for navigating the braille.

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Writing braille

    Notes and certain musical symbols can be entered in the braille panel using a 6-key method of braille input similar to that of the .

    Turn braille input mode on or off

    While the braille panel has focus, press N to toggle braille input mode on or off.

    Constructing a braille cell

    While in braille input mode, six letter keys on the computer keyboard are used to represent the six braille dots that make up a single braille cell (⠿).

    The keys used are F, D, S for dots 1, 2, 3 down the first column of the cell, and J, K, L for dots 4, 5, 6 down the second column. The Space key is used to represent an empty braille cell (⠀), sometimes referred to as dot 0.

    Up to six of these keys can be pressed in combination to construct any pattern of raised dots. For example, to enter a quarter note C, which in braille is ⠹ (i.e. dots 1, 4, 5, 6), press and hold F+J+K+L, then release these keys to confirm the pattern. The keys can be pressed and released in any order, providing at least one key is held at all times, until you have completed the pattern.

    When the final key is released, MuseScore reads your braille pattern. If your pattern corresponds to a recognized note or musical symbol then this element is entered directly in the score, not in the braille panel, because print notation is the "ground truth" for MuseScore. Once the element is in the score, the braille panel automatically updates to reflect this change.

    Sometimes in music braille, the same information can be expressed in multiple ways. For the sake of consistency, MuseScore always picks the same way regardless of how you entered the notation. Therefore, the braille that appears in the braille panel may not exactly match the pattern(s) you entered with the six keys, though it will have the same meaning.

    Entering notes

    Basic notes

    In braille, eighth notes (quavers) and 128th notes are written as:

    Note
    Braille
    Dots
    Keys

    Additional dots are added to the above sequences to create other durations:

    Duration
    Braille
    Dots added
    Keys added

    Hence a quarter note C is ⠹ (dots 1, 4, 5, 6) and is entered with F+J+K+L. This pattern is also used for a 64th note C.

    16th notes and smaller

    As mentioned above, 16th notes and smaller use the same dot patterns as larger durations. When reading braille, you can work out whether the shorter or longer duration is being specified by looking at the time signature as well as other notes in the measure. However, when writing braille, you need to tell MuseScore which durations you want to use.

    ⠤
    ⠄
    ⠠
    ⠀
    Dots to select
    Keys to select

    By default, MuseScore enters group 1 durations (whole, half, quarter, eighth). To switch to group 2, enter dots 0, 2 (i.e. press Space+D). Nothing will appear in the braille panel, but any notes or rests you write from now on will be in group 2 (16th, 32nd, 64th, 128th). To switch back to group 1 durations, enter dots 0, 1 (i.e. press Space+F).

    It's not currently possible to enter durations of 256th and smaller, or breve (double whole) and larger, via the braille panel.

    Dotted notes

    Braille uses ⠄(dot 3) to represent an augmentation dot, which is added in a new braille cell immediately following a note. No other cells are allowed to come between the note and its augmentation dot.

    To create a dotted note in the braille panel, first write the main note duration using the rules above, then follow it with dot 3 (i.e. press S).

    For example, a dotted quarter note C is ⠹⠄, which can be stated as dot pattern 1456-3, where the dash means to start a new cell. In terms of keys, this is F+J+K+L, S.

    It's not currently possible to enter multiple dot 3s to create double and triple dotted notes via the braille panel.

    Octave marks

    Octave marks in braille serve a similar purpose to clefs in print music. If you see a note in print, you don't know what pitch it is until you look at the preceding clef. In braille, if you see ⠙ (dots 1, 4, 5) then you know the note is a C, but it could be a C in any octave. To determine the octave, you need to look at the preceeding octave mark (and also at any notes between that octave mark and the current note).

    A standard 88-key piano has 7 complete octaves. Starting on the lowest C, which is called C1 in braille as well as in scientific pitch notation, the first complete octave of white notes is C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, A1 and B1. After B1 comes C2, which is the start of the second complete octave. This scheme continues up to the final complete octave, which starts with C7 and ends with B7.

    In this system, C4 is middle C, and A4 is "concert A" (i.e. the note that the orchestra tunes to at the start of a performance). Enharmonic spelling is important, so B♯3 sounds the same as C4 despite being notated in a different octave, and C♭4 sounds the same as B3.

    Even standard 88-key pianos have a few notes outside the range C1 to B7. Braille refers to the C0 octave as the "sub" octave, and the C8 octave as the "super" octave. These simply double the markings used for the first and seventh octaves.

    Octave
    Marks
    Dots
    Keys

    When specified, octave mark are placed immediately prior to a note. So a middle C quarter note is ⠐⠹, or dots 5-1456, which is entered as K, F+J+K+L. No other cells are allowed to go between the octave mark and the note it belongs to.

    Octave marks don't have to be given before every note. Octave marks are only required for the:

    • First note on each line of braille.

    • First note after a double bar line, number sign, word indicator, and certain other markings.

    • Second of two notes separated by a melodic interval of a sixth or more, regardless of their octaves.

    • Second of two notes separated by a melodic interval of a fourth or more, only if their octave numbers are different.

    Copy and paste

    The cut, copy, and paste commands can be used to reproduce entire passages of music, to move music earlier or later, to copy text or other markings between staves, to exchange the content in different measures, and more.

    Accessing the commands

    In all cases, the first step is to select what you want to cut or copy.

    As with other programs that support cut, copy, and paste, you can access these commands from the Edit menu, from a context menu that appears upon right-click or related gesture (e.g., Ctrl+click, or two-finger tap), or via the standard keyboard shortcuts.

    Command
    Shortcut (Windows)
    Shortcut (Mac)
    Context menu
    Main menu

    Note: When using the context menu, take care to always right-click on a selected item; if you right-click on an empty space by mistake your selection will be lost!

    Copying a range selection

    To copy a range&mdash;whether a single chord, a single measure, several measures on one staff, or multiple measures across multiple staves—do the following:

    1. you want to copy

    2. Use the Copy command from the menu or press Ctrl+C (Mac: Cmd+C)

    3. Select the first note or rest of the destination

    Copied music will replace the existing content of the destination. All elements in the selected range will be copied, with the exception of system-wide elements such as tempo text, key and time signature changes, and repeats. You can use the Selection Filter to from the operation.

    Copying a single element or a list selection

    MuseScore also allows copying a single element, or a list selection of multiple lyrics, chord symbols, dynamics, articulation, or other markings from one place to another, while keeping the content such as notes in the destination intact. Multiple notes list selection cannot be copied.

    MuseScore preserves the relative time positions of the markings based on literal note value distance if possible, measure rhythm is not taken into account. This includes case of copying chord symbols and dynamics. Valid note or rest anchors are required at the destination music when pasting lyrics and articulations.

    1. you want to copy

    2. Use the Copy command from the menu or press Ctrl+C (Mac: Cmd+C)

    3. Select the first note or rest of the destination

    Moving elements

    Cut and paste commands can be used to

    • move a passage to another staff, such as music on flute to clarinet, or

    • shift a passage earlier or later. This method is especially useful as a way to insert or delete a note or rest and also shifts existing notes and rests to create or trim silence.

    Measures (their rhythmic structure) cannot be moved, but see and chapters. When moving list selection, its elements' relative positions are preserved if possible, see section.

    To move a selection:

    1. what you want to move

    2. Use the Cut command from the menu or press Ctrl+X (Mac: Cmd+X)

    3. Select the first note or rest of the destination

    Swapping a selection with the clipboard

    The swap with clipboard command combines two operations into one: (1) First it overwrites a selected part of the score with the contents of the clipboard, just like the paste command; (2) Second, it transfers the overwritten part of the score back to the clipboard, just like the copy command.

    It can be used, for example, to swap two equal-length sections of a score, A and B:

    1. Select section A

    2. Apply the command

    3. Select section B

    4. Apply the command to paste A over the contents of B while moving the contents of B to the clipboard

    Like the other commands discussed here, you can access the swap with clipboard command from the menu or via a keyboard shortcut—in this case, it is Ctrl+Shift+X (Mac: Cmd+Shift+X).

    Repeating a selection

    A common use for copy and paste is to duplicate a given passage (including notes, chords etc) immediately after the original. Use the special repeat selection command to simplify this process.

    1. a single element or range to be repeated

    2. Press R

    This does not work on list selection. It works on a single chord, either on a range selection of it, and when exactly one note of that chord is selected. See chapter. In note input mode, this command repeats the entire chord that contains the current note. This is useful for creating a series of repeated chords.

    Copying a range selection to multiple staves

    If you wish to copy a passage to multiple staves—for instance, to double music of flute with oboes and clarinets—you can use the command:

    1. Select the passage you wish to copy

    2. Extend the selection to include the staves below (e.g., by pressing Shift+Down)

    3. Use Tools→Explode

    This copies the original selection, assuming it contains only single notes—no chords and no multiple voices. If there are chords or multiple voices, then these are distributed among the remaining staves as described in the .

    Paste half/double duration

    If you have entered a passage using mostly eighth notes but wish to halve the entire passage to using mostly sixteenth notes, or double it to quarter notes, MuseScore provides a pair of special commands to accomplish this. You can either modify the durations of a selection in place or create a separate copy of the passage with the modified durations. To halve or double the duration of a passage:

    1. Select a range to modify

    2. Use the command

    3. If you wish to create a separate copy of the passage with the modified durations, select the destination

    4. Use the or command Ctrl+Shift+Q/

    Duplicating individual elements

    Individual elements—even those that are not selected automatically in a range selection, like time signatures or voltas—can be selected and then duplicated using the mouse.

    1. While pressing Ctrl+Shift (Mac: Cmd+Shift), and click and hold on an element

    2. Drag it anywhere in the score

    3. When you release the mouse button, the selected element is copied to the new location

    See also

    Fretboard diagrams

    Overview

    Fretboard (or chord) diagrams usually appear above the staff on lead sheets and piano scores.

    They are commonly used for guitar chords, but MuseScore Studio allows you to create and customize diagrams for any stringed instrument.

    MuseScore Studio comes with a library of common fretboard diagrams which can be accessed by first creating chord symbols and then adding fretboard diagrams to them.

    Adding a fretboard diagram to your score

    The quickest way to add a fretboard diagram to your score is the following:

    1

    Press Ctrl + K to enter a chord symbol at a selected nore or rest (Mac: Cmd + K).

    2

    Type in any chord name.

    3

    Right-click on the chord symbol and select Add fretboard diagram

    You can also use any of these other methods:

    • Select one or more in the score, then either:

      • In the Properties panel, click the Add fretboard diagram button in the Chord symbol section.

      • Set a keyboard shortcut for the Add fretboard diagram action in Preferences -> Shortcuts and run it.

    To create a grid of fretboard diagrams summarizing every chord symbol in your score, see .

    How do chord symbols and fretboard diagrams interact?

    Fretboard diagrams and chord symbols on the same beat position and staff are considered linked.

    Autofilling fretboard diagrams

    When you change the name of a chord in a chord symbol, its linked fretboard diagram will update automatically to match it.

    Once you customize a diagram, to prevent it from being overwritten, it won't automatically update when you edit its linked chord symbol. If you never want fretboard diagrams to change when editing chord symbols, go to Preferences -> Note input -> Fretboard diagrams and turn on 'Never autofill fretboard diagrams when changing chord symbols'.

    Placement

    You can control the default distance between chord symbols and fretboard diagrams using the 'Minimum space from fretboard diagram' property found in Format -> Style… -> Chord symbols -> Positioning. You can further control individual chord symbol and fretboard diagram positioning using their properties.

    A linked chord symbol can be deleted independently of its fretboard diagram and vice versa. You can also add a new linked chord symbol to a fretboard diagram by right-clicking on the diagram and choosing Add chord symbol, or using the Ctrl + K shortcut.

    Neither fretboard diagrams nor their linked chord symbols are affected by commands.

    Fretboard diagrams palette

    The Fretboard diagrams provides some basic fretboard diagrams to get started with (major, minor, and 7th chords). To see the associated chord name, hover the cursor over a diagram.

    When any fretboard diagram from Palettes is added to the score, a chord symbol is automatically placed above it.

    The Blank diagram element lets you add a blank diagram, though when placed in the score you can immediately type in a chord symbol to fill the diagram automatically.

    You can save any in-score fretboard diagram to any palette by holding Shift + Ctrl (Mac: Shift + Cmd) and dragging the diagram from the score into the desired palette.

    Customizing a fretboard diagram

    To make your own custom fretboard diagram, or edit one that's been automatically filled:

    1. Add the Blank diagram from the Fretboard diagrams palette (or select a diagram that's already in your score).

    2. Open the Properties panel (toggle F8).

    3. Edit the properties in the tab as required.

    4. In the tab, use the interactive fretboard diagram editor to customize the diagram as described below:

    See also (below).

    Fretboard diagram properties

    When a fretboard diagram is selected, its properties are viewable in the as follows:

    General (tab)

    At the bottom of the Fretboard diagram properties section is an interactive editor of the selected fretboard diagram. The General tab contains tools for using the interactive editor, though the editor is also functional in the Settings tab.

    • Barré: Check on if you want to add or delete finger barrés with one click on the fretboard diagram editor below. Barrés can also be added by holding Shift while clicking instead.

    • Multiple dots: If unchecked you can only add one finger dot per string. If checked you can add multiple dots per string.

    • Marker type: When you click on the fretboard diagram editor, the shape of the dot added is determined by this property. The default shape is a round black dot, which suffices for standard chord (and scale) diagrams. A cross, square and triangle are provided to enable other .

    Settings (tab)

    • Scale: Makes the fretboard diagram larger or smaller.

    • Strings: The number of strings to be displayed.

    • Visible frets: Specifies the number of displayed frets (these are added or removed from the bottom of the diagram, or the right if oriented horizontally)

    • Fret number: Specifies the starting fret of the diagram, displayed next to the topmost fret (or the leftmost fret, if oriented horizontally)

    Appearance

    Edit a fretboard diagram's color, offset, and more by clicking on Appearance in the Properties panel. See for more details.

    Fretboard diagram style

    Global fretboard diagram properties can be set in Format -> Style… -> Fretboard diagrams:

    Alternative notation styles

    Some arrangers and educators have extended the basic form of the fretboard diagram, incorporating finger dots of various shapes (see ), and allowing multiple dots per string. Jazz guitarist Ted Greene and his successors are notable examples.

    Multi-dot notation style

    With this approach, the chord signified by round dots on the fretboard diagram is played first (see image below). Then, on successive beats marked by chord symbols, the chord fingering is modified to incorporate other shapes on the same diagram. The usual playing order is: dot -> X -> square -> delta, but this can vary.

    Optional-note notation style

    Another use of multiple dots per string allows other symbols to show optional notes, rather than delayed notes:

    See also

    Guitar techniques

    Adding a tremolo bar symbol to your score

    Tremolo bar symbols are available from the Guitar palette (look for the oversized "V") and are applied and adjusted in a similar way to bend symbols (above)—with a similar graphical interface in the "Tremolo" bar section of Properties.

    You can choose from a range of presets in "Tremolo bar type", or create your own custom one.

    Adding a slide to your score

    Slides can be found in the Arpeggios and glissandi palette. They are of two types:

    • Glissando-type slides: these run from one note or chord to the next.\

    • In / Out slides: played before or after a note; these can be slide-up or slide down.\

    By default, slides have a playback effect on the score. You can turn this off by unchecking "Play" in the General section of the panel.

    Add a slide

    Use one of the following methods:

    • Select one or more notes as start points, then click the desired slide icon in the palette.

    • Drag the desired slide from the palette onto a note.

    In the case of in-between slides going from one chord to the next, the program will attempt to link the correct notes where possible. If further adjustment is required, see .

    Edit properties

    For in-between slides, the following properties can be adjusted in the Glissando section of the Properties panel.

    • Type: Choose between Straight or Wavy.

    • Show text: Tick this box to display text. Note: If there isn't enough room between notes, the text is not displayed.

    • Text: The wording displayed above the slide (if any).

    Adjust start and end points of a slide

    In-between slides:

    To move an end handle vertically or horizontally, from one note to the next:

    1. Select the slide.

    2. Click on the start or end handle.

    3. Hold Shift and press an arrow key (Up, Down, Left or Right) to move the handle to the nearest note in that direction.

    Slides in/out:

    To adjust the position of the end handle:

    1. Select the slide.

    2. Click on the adjustment handle.

    3. Drag the handle, or use the keyboard arrows.

    Adding a barre line to your score

    A Barre lines is a drawn above a guitar staff to indicate that the passage requires a full or half barre. Symbols such as the following are commonly found in guitar music:

    Full bar (2nd fret):\

    Half barre (2nd fret):\

    The C before the roman numerals can be omitted and other variations in line style and text are possible—according to the publisher.

    To apply a barre:

    1. Click on the start note for the barre, then shift click on the end note to establish the range.

    2. Click on the "Capo Line" symbol in the Guitar palette.

    3. Customize the line and text as required. See (Other lines).

    To adjust the length of a line, see .

    Adding hammer-on and pull-off symbols to your score

    Hammer-ons and pull-offs are notated by . If you need text annotations as well, create them using ; they can be saved to a palette for future use (see ).

    Notating harmonics

    Standard staff

    A natural harmonic can be notated in one of three ways:

    • At the pitch of the open string on which it is produced. For example, harmonics on the third string appear as:\

    • At the pitch of the string fret at which it is produced. The same harmonics now appear as:\

    • At concert pitch. The same harmonics now appear as:\

    An annotation, such as "Nat. Har.", "N.H.", "Har.", is usually attached, as well as string and fret numbers; the notehead may be standard or diamond-shaped, and rendered clear rather than black; fret numbers may be Arabic or Roman, and so on.

    Fixing Playback: If harmonics do not play back at the correct pitch, mute them and create a hidden voice containing the harmonics at concert pitch.

    See also, (douglasniedt.com).

    Tablature

    A natural harmonic in tablature may be rendered simply as a fretmark, or may be followed by a dot, or enclosed in a diamond, or a pair of angled brackets. e.g.

    To create a pair of angled brackets:

    1. Select a harmonic and add staff text.

    2. Enter a "single left-pointing angle quotation mark" (U2039), then a space, then a "single right-pointing angle quotation mark" (U203A).

    3. Move the text so it sits over the fretmark;

    4. Adjust the font size of the staff text and the space inside it to just enclose the harmonic.

    Staff/Tablature pairs

    You should ensure that the staff/tab pairs are not linked, since you need to be able to edit each staff independently of the other.

    Notating guitar fingering

    The types of guitar fingering and how to apply them are explained in .

    Adding a bend symbol to your score

    Not to be confused with . This section shows old instructions for using Bends in MuseScore 4.0 to Musescore 4.1. For users of MuseScore 4.2 and above versions, see the chapter.

    Apply a bend

    Bends are created with the Bend Tool located in the Guitar palette. To apply one or more bends to the score, use one of the following options:

    • Select one or more notes and click the bend symbol in the palette.

    • Drag the bend symbol from the palette on to a note.

    A default bend is created in the score. You can modify this bend or choose from a range of alternatives using “Bend type” in the Bends section of the panel.

    Edit a bend

    Bend shape and length can be edited in the graphical display in the Bends section of the Properties panel:

    Each red line segment between blue nodes represents one step in the bend, and each step extends horizontally for 1 in the score. The slope of any line shows whether it is an up-bend, a down-bend or a hold. So the above graph describes an up bend, then a hold—total length 2sp.

    The vertical axis of the graph represents the amount by which the pitch is bent up or down: one unit (the side of a small square) equals a quarter-tone, 2 units a semitone, 4 units a whole-tone, and so on.

    To add another step to a bend

    • add another node by clicking on the appropriate line intersection.

    To delete a bend step

    • click on the relevant node to remove it.

    Adjust bend height

    The height of the bend is automatically adjusted so that any text appears just above the staff. This height can be adjusted, if necessary, with a workaround:

    1. Create another note vertically above the note (shortening the height) or below the note (extending the height) at which you want the bend to start.

    2. Apply the bend to the new note.

    3. To adjust the height of the bend move this created note vertically so that the bend symbol gets the desired height.

    4. Drag the bend symbol to the correct position (to the original note).

    Reposition bend

    Bends can be freely repositioned using the methods shown in .

    Staff/Part properties

    Overview

    The Staff/Part properties dialog allows you to change display properties of a staff and the properties of the instrument it belongs to.

    To open the dialog:

    1. Right-click either an empty area in a staff, or the instrument label in the score.

    Instruments and system markings

    Overview

    The Layout panel (formerly called Instruments) gives you control over your instruments, the position of system markings, and some basic staff properties without having to leave the score view. All of the instruments in your score will appear in this panel.

    Other lines

    Overview

    Musescore Line is a type of object capable of attaching (anchoring) to a of more than two notes or rests, or vertical collection of notes (chord). A Musescore Line object contains a length of string or arc, and optionally a text. These objects can functionally affect the score, and share similar configurable , , and .

    Musescore Line objects include these subtypes, follow the hyperlink on text to read their dedicated main chapters, or "jump to section" on this chapter:

    ///a

    4

    11

    4

    5

    12

    5

    6

    13

    6

    7

    14

    7

    Edit String Data dialog

    Save it to a palette for future use.

    Mark the created note invisible and silent (using the Properties panel).

    Properties
    below
    text-line
    Line properties
    Changing range of a line
    slurs
    staff text
    Adding elements from your score
    How to Read Harmonic Notation on the Classical Guitar
    Fingering
    brass or woodwind instrument bends
    Guitar bends
    Properties
    sp.
    Changing position of elements
    Slides
    Full barre
    Half barre
    Natural harmonics on 3rd string
    Natural harmonics at string fret
    Natural harmonics at concert pitch
    Harmonics in tablature
    Bend graphical display
    Adding slur, step 3, extending it to next note
    Adding slur, step 4, flipping direction
    Adding slur, step 5, exiting edit mode
    Coda sign, which looks like an O with a plus sign drawn over it.Coda sign, which looks like an O with a plus sign drawn over it.
    Segno sign.Segno sign.
    Example: Goldberg variation
    Time signature properties
    Create key signatures dialog
    Entering alternative input modes (animated image)
    Assign a keyboard shortcut
    Choose the default stem direction
    Picture of the Customize Kit dialog
    Picture of the "Define keyboard shortcut dialog"
    Selection of a chord
    List selection
    Select dialog
    Selection filter
  • Physical buttons on the braille terminal are not used, except to scroll within a measure that is too long to fit on your display.

  • Go to next measure

    Ctrl+Right

    Cmd+Right

    Go to previous measure

    Ctrl+Left

    Cmd+Left

    Go to beginning of score

    Ctrl+Home

    Cmd+Fn+Left

    Go to end of score

    Ctrl+End

    Cmd+Fn+Right

    Toggle braille input mode on/off

    N

    N

    F

    ⠛

    1, 2, 4, 5

    F+D+J+K

    G

    ⠓

    1, 2, 5

    F+D+K

    A

    ⠊

    2, 4

    D+J

    B

    ⠚

    2, 4, 5

    D+J+K

    32nd

    64th

    128th

    0, 2

    Space+D

    3

    ⠸

    456

    J+K+L

    4 (middle)

    ⠐

    5

    K

    5

    ⠨

    46

    J+L

    6

    ⠰

    56

    K+L

    7

    ⠠

    6

    L

    8 (super)

    ⠠⠠

    6-6

    L, L

    Go to next braille cell

    Right

    Right

    Go to previous braille cell

    Left

    Left

    Go to braille line above

    Up

    Up

    Go to braille line below

    Down

    Down

    C

    ⠙

    1, 4, 5

    F+J+K

    D

    ⠑

    1, 5

    F+K

    E

    ⠋

    1, 2, 4

    Quarter (crotchet) and 64th notes

    ⠠

    6

    L

    Half (minim) and 32nd notes

    ⠄

    3

    S

    Whole (semibreve) and 16th notes

    ⠤

    3, 6

    Group 1

    whole

    half

    quarter

    eighth

    0, 1

    Space+F

    Group 2

    0 (sub)

    ⠈⠈

    4-4

    J, J

    1

    ⠈

    4

    J

    2

    ⠘

    45

    Documentation forum
    Perkins Brailler

    F+D+J

    S+L

    16th

    J+K

    Swap with Clipboard

    Edit -> Swap with clipboard

    Paste half duration

    Ctrl+Shift+Q

    Ctrl+Shift+Q (as of 4.2)

    N/A

    Edit -> Paste half duration

    Paste double duration

    Ctrl+Shift+W

    Ctrl+Shift+W (as of 4.2)

    N/A

    Edit -> Paste double duration

    Use the
    Paste
    command from the menu or press
    Ctrl
    +
    V
    (Mac:
    Cmd
    +
    V
    )
    Use the
    Paste
    command from the menu or press
    Ctrl
    +
    V
    (Mac:
    Cmd
    +
    V
    )
    Use the Paste command from the menu or press Ctrl+V (Mac: Cmd+V)

    Select section A again (or just the first note, rest, or measure)

  • Apply the paste command

  • W

    Cut

    Ctrl+X

    Cmd+X

    Cut

    Edit -> Cut

    Copy

    Ctrl+C

    Cmd+C

    Copy

    Edit -> Copy

    Paste

    Ctrl+V

    Cmd+V

    Paste

    Edit -> Paste

    Swap with clipboard

    Ctrl+Shift+X

    Select the range
    exclude other elements of a given type
    Select the elements
    Adding and removing measures
    Time signatures
    "Copying a list selection"
    Select
    cut
    swap with clipboard
    Select
    Selecting elements
    explode
    section on the explode command
    copy
    paste half duration
    paste double duration
    Selecting elements
    Implode and explode
    Duplicating a hairpin

    Cmd+Shift+X

    .

    A fretboard diagram corresponding to the chord symbol will automatically populate in the score.

    Select one or more notes, then click a fretboard diagram in Palettes -> Fretboard diagrams.
  • Drag and drop a fretboard diagram from a palette onto a note.

    • Finger dots (markers)

      • To add a dot: Click on a fret. The shape of the dot is determined by the Marker type setting. If Multiple dots is checked you can add more than one dot per string.

      • To delete a dot: Click on an existing dot/marker.

    • Barrés

      • To add a barré: Hold Shift and click on the fret where you want the barré to begin. Or, with Barré checked, simply click on the fret.

      • To add a partial barré ending before first string: Create a standard barré first (see previous instruction). Then shorten it by Shift clicking (or clicking with Barré checked) where you'd like the barré to end.

    • Open / Mute strings: Click just above each string in the diagram to toggle between:

      • No symbol

      • Open (O)

      • Mute/Unplayed (X)

    Show fingerings: When turned on, you can specify a number to indicate which finger should be used to fret each string.

  • Clear: Clears everything, leaving a blank fretboard.

  • Show nut: Can be turned off to hide the emboldened line at the top of diagrams. Applies to first position diagrams only.

  • Orientation: Vertical draws diagrams top-to-bottom; Horizontal draws them left-to-right.

  • Position: Positions the diagram above or below the staff.

  • Exclude from vertical alignment: Turn on to exclude this fretboard diagram from automatic alignment of chord symbols and fretboard diagrams on the same staff. This checkbox syncs to the same checkbox in the properties of chord symbols linked to fretboard diagrams.

  • chord symbols
    Fretboard diagram legend
    Appearance
    transposition
    palette
    Settings
    General
    Fretboard diagram properties
    Properties panel
    notation styles
    Marker type
    Customizing palette contents
    Fretboard diagram propertiesFretboard diagram properties
    Fretboard diagram style settingsFretboard diagram style settings
    Fretboard diagram, multiple dots 1Fretboard diagram, multiple dots 1
    Fretboard diagram, multiple dots 2Fretboard diagram, multiple dots 2
    Appearance settings
    Fretboard diagram examples

    Select Staff/Part properties…

    The up/down arrow buttons in the bottom left of the window will move between staves in the score. Note that any changes you have made to the current staff will be lost unless you click Apply first.

    There are four different types of staff, called Style group in the dialog:

    • Standard, the most common type, which has two variants:

      • One for pitched instruments except for fretted, plucked string instruments.

      • One for fretted, plucked string instruments, which has additional options for setting the number of strings and their tuning.

    • Tablature, also used for fretted, plucked string instruments, with the same options for configuring strings.

    • Percussion, used for unpitched percussion instruments.

    An example of each of the basic staff types

    For each type, there are pre-defined templates to choose from in the Advanced style properties dialog (see below).

    Replacing an instrument can change the staff type, but be aware that doing this may sometimes create an undesirable result with incorrect playback – for example, when replacing a Standard type staff (e.g. Flute) with a Percussion type (e.g. Drum Kit).

    Staff properties

    The top section of the dialog allows you to customize the appearance of the staff. These options are common to all staff types.

    Note that all these settings apply only to the specific staff being edited.

    First column:

    • Style group: Shows the staff type (Standard, Tablature, Percussion).

    • Lines: The number of staff lines. Most pitched instruments use a 5-line staff, but percussion staves may have a different number, and most (though not all) tablature staves will have the same number of lines as the instrument has strings.

    • Line distance: The distance between lines, in spaces; 1 is 'normal'. Do not change this to make a larger or smaller stave; use Scale instead.

    • Extra distance above staff: Increases or decreases the minimum distance between this staff and the one above. This setting has no effect on the topmost staff of a system. It also affects all systems in the score. To change the spacing on a single system, use a .

    • Scale: The size of the staff, and its contents, as a custom percentage. To change the scale of all staves in a score, use .

    Second column:

    • Hide when empty: This setting overrides the score-wide settings for staff hiding for the current staff. See Excluding specific staves from being hidden for details.

    • Show clef: Whether clefs will appear on the staff.

    • Show time signature: Whether time signatures will appear on the staff.

    • Show barlines: Whether barlines will be drawn on the staff.

    • Hide system barline: Whether the initial barline at the left edge of the system should be hidden.

    • Merge matching rests: When checked, simultaneous rests in multiple voices will be merged (drawn on top of each other). This can save time hiding or deleting extra rests:

    Merge matching rests off (left) and on (right)

    Third column:

    • Do not hide if system is empty: Specifies that this staff will be shown when all other staves in a system are empty (see Choosing which staff to show when the entire system is empty).

    • Small staff: Makes the staff small (cue-sized), following the size defined in Format -> Style -> Sizes -> Small staff size. For a custom size, use Scale, in the first column.

    • Invisible staff lines: Makes staff lines invisible.

    • Staff line color: Change the color of the staff lines.

    • Cutaway: Suppress the drawing of staff lines in empty measures (see ).

    • The Advanced style properties... button opens a separate dialog, described below.

    Advanced style properties

    Some settings in this dialog are common to all staff types. Those in the first two rows are simply duplicates of settings found in the main Staff/part properties dialog (Lines, Line distance, Show clef, Show time signature, Show barlines).

    The Template dropdown, at the bottom of the window, lets you apply a a predefined template style to the staff. For tablature staves, the templates include various numbers of staff lines and notation styles. For percussion staves, the templates include settings for different numbers of staff lines.

    To apply a template:

    1. Make a selection from the Template dropdown list.

    2. Press the < Reset to template button.

    3. Press OK.

    For all styles except percussion, the Preview shows a rendered example of notation that reflects the settings in the dialog, so you can see the effect of the changes you make.

    The remaining settings differ according to the current staff type.

    Standard and percussion staff styles only

    These settings are also duplicated from the main Stave/Part properties dialog.

    • Show key signature, Show ledger lines: Control whether key signatures and ledger lines should be drawn.

    • Stemless: Will draw notes without stems, flags or beams.

    Standard staff style only

    • Notehead scheme: Specifies which type of noteheads to use (e.g. pitch names, shape notes). See Notehead schemes.

    Tablature staff style only

    • Upside down: When unchecked (default), the top staff line will refer to the highest string, and the bottom line is the lowest string. When checked, this is reversed (used, for example, for Italian-style lute tablature).

    The remaining settings are split into two separate tabs.

    Fret marks

    To choose the font for fret marks, there are two options:

    • Text style: Use a text style. This provides a dropdown from which you can select which text style to use (by default, Tablature fret number). The Edit text style button will take you to the page for the chosen style in Text styles, where you can configure it like any other.

    • Tab font preset: Use one of eight built-in fonts, which support all the necessary symbols for various different styles, both modern and historic. This provides three sub-options:

      • Font: Which of the built-in fonts to use.

      • Size: Font size for fret marks. The built-in fonts usually look good at a size of 9–10pt.

      • Vertical offset: Applies a vertical offset to the symbols. Positive values move them down, negative ones move them up. It should not normally be necessary to change this, but it may be useful when encountering a font with unconventionally aligned symbols.

    The remaining options configure the notation style:

    • Marks are: Either Numbers (1, 2, 3...) or Letters (a, b, c...). When letters are used, 'j' is skipped.

    • Marks are drawn: Either On lines (i.e. vertically centered on the lines) or Above lines.

    • Lines are: Either Continuous (the lines will pass straight through fret marks) or Broken (lines will be masked when crossing fret marks).

    • Show fingering in tablature: Sets whether fingerings added from the Guitar palette should be drawn or not

    Note values

    These settings configure how rhythms are indicated on tablature staves.

    The Shown as setting is actually the most important, as it determines which of the other options are relevant or enabled. There are three options:

    • None: No rhythm is indicated; all the other options in this tab will be disabled and/or ignored.

    • Note symbols: Rhythm will be indicated with symbols in the shape of notes above the staff.

    • Stems and beams: Rhythm will be notated using stems, flags and beams, just as on a standard staff.

    If Note symbols is selected, these settings apply:

    • Font: The font used to draw the note duration symbols. Currently five fonts are provided, supporting all the necessary symbols in five different styles (modern, Italian tablature, French tablature, French baroque (headless), French baroque).

    • Size: Font size for the note duration symbols. The built-in fonts usually look good at a size of 15pt.

    • Vertical offset: Applies a vertical offset to the symbols. Positive values move them down, negative ones move them up.

    • Repeat: By default, note duration symbols are only shown when the duration changes. This setting specifies when they should be repeated:

      • Never: Symbols are never repeated.

      • At new system: Always draw the duration symbol at the start of a new system.

      • At new measure: Always draw the duration symbol at the start of a new measure.

      • Always: Draw a duration symbol for every note.

    • Show rests: Whether note duration symbols should also be drawn for rests. If shown, they are drawn at a slightly lower position than those for notes.

    If Stems and beams is selected, these settings apply:

    • Stem style: Stems and beams can be drawn either Beside staff (always outside the staff, above or below) or Through staff (being drawn through the staff to reach the fret marks, just as stems go to noteheads on normal staves).

    • Stem position: Whether stems and beams are drawn Above or Below the staff; this is only available if Stem style is set to Beside staff (if Through staff is selected, stems and beams are always drawn below the fret marks).

    • Half notes: How half notes are indicated. On a normal staff, this is done by changing the notehead, which is not an option in tablature. The options are:

      • None: Do not draw a stem.

      • As short stem: Draw a shortened stem (only available when Stem style is set to Beside staff).

      • As slashed stem: Draw a stem with a double tremolo slash through it.

    Part properties

    This section of the dialog should more properly be called Instrument properties. The current wording is leftover from earlier app versions.

    Instrument identifies which instrument is assigned to the staff. To change the instrument, click the Replace instrument button and select an instrument from the Select instrument dialog that appears. This replaces the instrument for the staff, including changing playback, staff name, transposition, etc. If there are existing Staff type change items on the staff, these may now cause unpredictable results.

    The default values for all the other settings in this section are taken from MuseScore Studio's instrument definitions.

    Long instrument name and Short instrument name are the labels which can be shown to the left of the staves on the score. To configure which are shown where, go to Format -> Style -> Score -> Instrument names.

    Usable pitch range defines the usable range for the instrument. By default, MuseScore will highlight notes which fall outside of these ranges. (The highlighting only affects the display on screen, and does not affect printing or exporting.) To disable or re-enable this functionality:

    1. Select Edit -> Preferences (Mac: MuseScore -> Preferences) from the menu bar.

    2. Select Note input.

    3. Toggle Color notes outside of usable pitch range.

    There are two ranges defined:

    • Amateur: A more limited range which can be assumed to be practical for non-professional players. Notes outside this range are colored olive green/dark yellow.

    • Professional: The full range of the instrument which is accessible to professional players. Notes outside this range are colored red.

    Many of these range limits are subjective and open to discussion. If you wish to adjust them in your score, click the pencil icons next to each pitch name.

    Transposition specifies the instrument's transposition, i.e. the difference between how the pitches are notated and how they actually sound, when the score is not shown in concert pitch. This is specified as a combination of:

    • Octave(s): The number of octaves.

    • An interval between 0 and 12 semitones, selected from the dropdown.

    • Up/down: The direction of the transposition.

    For transpositions other than simple octave transpositions (i.e. where an interval other than Perfect unison) is chosen from the dropdown), an additional dropdown will be shown, Prefer sharps or flats for transposed key signatures, which specifies which key signature to use where there are two enharmonic equivalents available, for example B major and C flat major:

    • None: Match the type of accidental of the untransposed key signature, when possible.

    • Flats: Use the version of the key signature with flats, when one exists.

    • Sharps: Use the version with sharps, when it exists.

    • Auto: Use whichever version has fewer accidentals; if there is no difference, match the accidental of the untransposed key signature.

    Additional settings for fretted, plucked string instruments

    There is a final row, only shown for fretted, plucked string instruments (on both Standard and Tablature stave styles):

    • Number of strings shows the number of strings for the instrument.

    • Edit string data…: This button opens a dialog where you can change the number of strings and their tuning. See Changing tuning for details.

    • Don't reflect transposition in linked tablature staves: If turned off, any tablature staves linked to this stave will not reflect the transposition of the main stave.

    Accessing the panel

    Open the panel by clicking on the Layout tab:

    If the tab is not visible, show it by selecting View -> Layout, or by pressing F7.

    Managing instruments

    Adding instruments

    Open the Instruments dialog:

    1. Click the Add button at the top of the panel.

    2. Choose Add instrument from the popup.

    You can also open this dialog by pressing I.

    See Choose instruments for information on using the dialog.

    Deleting instruments

    Select an instrument and click the remove button at the top of the panel, or press Del. This removes the instrument entirely, along with all the music it contains.

    Reordering instruments

    Select an instrument and click the up/down arrow buttons at the top of the panel to change its position in the score. Alternatively, drag the instrument up or down using the mouse.

    Renaming instruments

    Click the cog button to the right of an instrument to show instrument name settings. Name on main score is the long name, usually used at the beginning of a score, and Abbreviated name is the short one, often used after the first system of a section. These can also be edited via Staff/Part properties. Part name is used at the top of a part.

    To hide instrument labels entirely or control where the long and short names are used, use the settings in Format -> Style -> Score -> Instrument labels, rather than deleting the names here.

    Replacing instruments

    To replace an instrument in the Layout panel:

    1. Click the cog button to the right of the instrument's name.

    2. In the popup that appears, click Replace instrument.

    3. Select your desired replacement instrument in the dialog that appears.

    4. Click OK.

    Managing staves

    The Layout panel can also be used to add staves to an existing instrument and configure some of their basic properties.

    Initially, the panel only shows an entry for each instrument. To show the individual staves of an instrument, expand the instrument by clicking the small black triangle to the left of the instrument name. Staves are usually labelled according their default clef (for example, a piano will have a 'Treble clef' and 'Bass clef')

    Adding a staff to an existing instrument

    1. Expand the instrument by clicking the arrow button to reveal its staves.

    2. Click Add staff.

    The new staff is part of the same instrument but its notation is completely independent of its other staves. To create a staff which stays in sync with the notation of an existing staff, add a linked staff instead.

    Adding a linked staff to an existing instrument

    Staves that are linked together will keep their notation synchronized, so any change on one staff will be reflected on the other(s). However, the staves can have different staff styles, which makes this useful for creating staff notation alongside tablature notation for guitar, banjo, ukulele, etc.

    To create a linked staff:

    1. Expand the instrument by clicking the arrow button to reveal its staves.

    2. Click the cog button to the right of the staff's name.

    3. Click Create a linked staff.

    4. Click the cog button on the newly-added staff to configure it, for example to change the Staff type, if required (see Configuring staves, below).

    Deleting staves

    1. Expand the instrument by clicking the arrow button to reveal its staves.

    2. Select the staff you wish to delete.

    3. Click the remove button at the top of the panel, or press Del.

    This will only work when an instrument has more than one staff. To delete the last staff, select and delete the instrument itself.

    Reordering staves

    To change the order of staves within an instrument, select a staff and click the up/down arrow buttons at the top of the panel to move it, or drag it up or down using the mouse. Staves cannot be moved between instruments.

    Configuring staves

    You can configure some properties of individual staves by clicking the cog buton to the right of the staff name:

    • Staff type allows you to choose between a Standard staff and a variety of predefined tablature types.

    • Small staff makes the staff small ('cue-size'). The size for small staves can be configured in Style -> Sizes.

    • Hide any measures that do not contain notation (cutaway) will prevent the staff from being drawn for any measures which are empty. See Cutaway staves for more details.

    For more information about staff customization, see Staff/part properties.

    Managing system markings

    System markings are items like tempo marks, rehearsal marks, voltas and jumps, which apply to all instruments in the score. By default they are shown at the top of the system, but in larger scores are often duplicated at least once further down. In orchestral scores, for example, it is common to duplicate them above the strings.

    You can control where these markings appear via the Layout panel. Every score has one 'instance' of system markings at the top, which cannot be moved or deleted, but you can add extra instances and position them freely.

    In a blank score, the instances are listed simply as 'System markings' in the panel, but as you add markings to the score they will update to list which types of markings are shown there. You can configure which types of item you want to show at each position.

    If your score uses big time signatures (above or across the staves), these will also be treated as system markings, and will appear wherever you create a system markings instance. See Time signatures for information on how to choose these styles.

    If you want to specify specific positions on the score where measure numbers will appear, these can also be treated as system markings. See Measure numbering position for more details.

    Adding a instance of system markings

    To add a new system marking instance:

    1. Open the Layout panel.

    2. Select the instrument above which you want the markings to appear.

    3. Click the Add button.

    4. Choose System markings from the popup.

    If you do not select an instrument first, the new instance will appear at the first available space from the top of the score.

    Deleting an instance of system markings

    Select a system markings instance and click the remove button at the top of the panel, or press Del.

    Moving an instance of system markings

    Select a system markings instance and drag it up or down to a new position, or use the up/down arrow buttons at the top of the panel.

    If you move one instance on top of another, the one being moved will replace the other, since two cannot exist at the same position.

    It is possible to show system markings below the bottom of the system by dragging an instance below the bottommost instrument. (This is not possible if the score only contains one instrument.)

    Configuring which types of system markings to show

    To choose which types of markings to show at a given position:

    1. Click the cog button to the right of the instance in the list.

    2. In the popup, click the eye buttons to toggle visibility for each item type.

    By default, all types are shown everywhere.

    The available item types are: tempo, gradual tempo change, rehearsal mark, system text, system text line, volta, jump, play count text, measure number and time signature (if you are using large time signatures).

    System markings and parts

    System markings cannot be configured in parts. There is only a single instance, shown at the top, with all types of marking visible. You can still make individual markings invisible in parts in the usual way.

    Hiding instruments and staves

    To hide or unhide an instrument, click the eye buttons to the left of the instrument label. This hides the instrument and all its staves completely.

    To hide or unhide a specific staff:

    1. Expand the instrument by clicking the arrow button to reveal its staves.

    2. Click the eye button to the left of the staff.

    Hidden instruments and staves are not deleted, they are just hidden throughout the whole score and will not affect its layout. You can still create parts for hidden instruments.

    A hidden instrument will not play back, but hidden staves will. If you wish to hide an instrument but still hear it, do one of the following:

    • Unmute the instrument in the Mixer.

    • Hide all of its staves individually, but don't hide the instrument itself.

    Control whether instruments are automatically muted when hidden via Preference -> Audio & MIDI -> Toggle track mute by showing/hiding instruments in the Layout panel.

    If you only wish to hide instruments or staves when there is no music for them on a given system, see Showing staves only where needed.

    Standard line or Plain line (a simple general purpose, straight line) (jump to section)
  • Slurs

  • Staff text lines and System text lines (jump to section)

  • Hairpins and crescendo, decrescendo lines

  • Tempo lines such as rit --- (jump to section)

  • Voltas (repeat section brackets on top)

  • Idiomatic notation: Keyboard: Pedal markings

  • Octave lines (8ve etc)

  • (Long) Trill lines (jump to section)

  • Arpeggios

  • Glissandi (slides) and portamento between two notes

  • Upprall, Downprall, Prallprall, affects playback

  • Guitar-related lines (jump to section): including Barre line, "let ring" line, P.M. --- (palm mute), Vibrato line, and the custom Fingering/String number-line.

  • vibrato sawtooth, tremolo sawtooth, does not affect playback

  • Ambitus (an early music feature)

  • These markings contain length of string or arc, but do not belong to Musescore Line objects because they cannot attach (anchor) to a continuous range:

    • Bends (brass or guitar articulations)

    • Ties

    • Tremolo and rolls

    • Single note Ornaments such as turns, (short) trills and mordents

    • (Staff) and curly braces

    • Staff line (To change global staff line thickness, see . Other related settings see chapter.)

    Note: The following description of actions and general behaviors applies to Line objects discussed here (those do not have a dedicated handbook chapter), for Line objects having dedicated handbook chapters, refer to those chapters for more accurate info.

    Adding a line to your score

    The commonest way to add a new Musescore Line is to use either:

    • a predefined keyboard shortcut, for example S to add slurs (see the respective chapter above), or

    • the Lines palette and the Guitar palette

    To apply a line to a selected range:

    1. Select a range of notes,

    2. Click on a line in a palette;

    Or

    1. Drag a line from a palette to the starting note,

    2. Adjust the end handle to extend the range (see Changing range of a line).

    To apply a line to a single note:

    1. Select a note and click on the desired palette line.

    2. Drag a palette line to the desired start note.

    Adjusting a line

    To adjust the range of a line, see Changing range of a line.

    Types of lines

    Standard lines

    Plain lines are applied from the Lines palette. They can be purposed to anything you like such as to create guitar fingering/string number lines. They can be adjusted to be diagonal or vertical.

    Staff and System Text lines

    A staff text line, like staff text, is affixed to one staff in a system, and is indicative only for that staff. It appears only in the part featuring that staff.

    A system text line, like system text, is affixed to one staff but is indicative for all the staffs in the system. It appears in all instrument parts.

    Tempo lines

    Tempo markings such as rit --- are new in Musescore 4, they affect playback tempo.

    Guitar-related lines

    • Barre lines in Guitar palette: Used to indicate fret positions, see Guitar techniques: Adding a barre line to your score.

    • To create a Fingering/String number-line:

      1. add a Fingering from Fingerings palette,

      2. add a from Lines palette,

      3. as required.

    • Vibrato in the Guitar palette. You can change the shape of the line in the Vibrato section of the panel.

    • Palm mute in the Guitar palette: Changes playback sound to that of a clean muted electric guitar.

    • Let ring in the Guitar palette: Affect playback, acts like the sustain pedal on a keyboard.

    Trill lines

    Not to be confused with (short) trills Ornaments.

    Trill lines are upgraded in Musescore 4, their have lots of new engraving settings such as showing a bracketed small note and accidentals to notate trill note pitch, these settings are explained in Ornaments.

    They still create playback with SoundFonts instruments like in previous Musescore versions. If the instrument use Muse Sounds and the sound sample exists, a trill line will utilize the beautifully recorded trill audio for playback, for example in case of a perfect fifth trill line.

    Line properties

    The Properties panel allows you to view and edit General, Appearance, and Playback settings.

    The name of the section below varies depending on the type of line. But it will have two tabs marked Style and Text:

    Style tab

    Clicking on the Style tab allows you to set the properties of the line itself:

    Line type: A choice of straight, hooked, angle-hooked, or double-hooked. Thickness / Hook height: Style: Choice of solid, dashed or dotted line. Dash / Gap: Adjust the appearance if "Dashed" is selected.

    Text tab

    Clicking on the Text tab allows you to apply and position any text associated with the line:

    Beginning text: Enter the text, if any, to appear at the beginning of the line. Vertical offset: Allows you to move the text vertically in relation to the line (in sp.). Text when continuing to a new system: If the line spans a system, this is the text that will appear before the line in the next system. Vertical offset: As above.

    Line style

    See Templates and styles

    Values of the "Style for Text line" can be edited in Format→Style→Text line. Values of the "Style for System text line" can be edited in Format→Style→System text line. Values of the "Style for text inside Text line" can be edited in Format→Style→Text styles→Text line

    horizontal continuous range
    line properties
    text properties
    styles
    Preferences
    Tablature
    Drum notation
    Slash notation
    Noteheads
    Selecting a start point
    Entering note input mode
    Entering note input mode
    Durations on toolbar
    Durations on toolbar
    Selecting pitch
    Mouse cursor
    Virtual piano keyboard
    Virtual piano keyboard
    Chord entry
    Rest entry
    Accidentals
    Accidentals on toolbar
    Accidentals on toolbar
    Tie entry
    Tie entry
    Tied chord
    Opening parts (animated image)
    Closing parts (animated image)
    Showing and hiding voices in parts (animated image)
    Toggles for managing score and part synchronisation
    Context menu for parts image

    Noteheads

    Overview

    This chapter discusses the appearance of noteheads in MuseScore.

    Notehead schemes

    One aspect of music notation systems is notehead scheme

    To delete a barré: Hold Shift and click on the 'top' of the barré (its left end). Or, with Barré checked, just click on the 'top'.
  • To create multiple barrés: Repeat the above steps at different fret positions.

  • Partial barrePartial barre
    Partial barre ending before first stringPartial barre ending before first string
    Copying a range of notes
    spacer
    Page Settings > Scaling
    Cutaway staves
    Brackets
    Barlines
    Page layout concepts: Staff
    Staff/Part properties
    Standard lines
    adjust the length
    Properties
    Ms4 trillline
    Text line style dialog

    . A scheme is a set of rules used to decide notehead shape's
    meaning
    , some of which are supported in MuseScore. Supported schemes relate notehead meaning to a note's:
    • duration: as in the most widely used scheme.

    • pitch (using movable-do or absolute pitch solfege): literally written on it, and

    • pitch (relative pitch using shape note solfege): as in "shape note notation" (see reference under External links).

    The most widely used scheme is very likely the only one known to most musicians. It is referred to as "Normal" in MuseScore and is the default setting for a new staff. Details of the nine schemes available in MuseScore are covered in Custom staff types:Notehead scheme.

    Understanding relative pitch notations (shape note solfege, shape note notation) can enhance the reader's comprehension of this chapter. Most of the time, a notehead shape conveys one specific meaning, and that meaning is only associated with one notehead shape. Shape note solfege is like a variant of movable-do solfege that belongs to the exceptions. For example, in one type of "shape note notation", a triangle must be used to notate a relatively pitched "C4", but triangles are also read as relatively pitched "C"s or "F"s only, and triangles must sing "Fa" or a syllable agree upon by singers on-site. The loosely related shape note solfege notates interval perception much better than the "Normal" setting.

    Notehead shape

    \ _Shown above, the diamond notehead can be used for harmonic notes in guitar, violin etc; and slash notehead for guitar strums etc. The cross is also known as crosshead, ghost note, or dead note._

    Final display of notehead shape in MuseScore is determined by three factors: the notehead type factor, the pitch factor, and the duration factor (or note-value, rhythm).

    Pitch factor

    Note pitch may affect affect notehead shape, depending on the scheme, but it only happens on note(s) that do not use an overriding Notehead type property. See "Notehead type factor" section. "Normal" notehead scheme does not use pitch to determine notehead shape.

    Duration factor

    The duration factor is determined by a note's duration. To edit duration see Entering notes and rests and Editing notes and rests chapters. It also can be visually overridden for an individual note, while keeping the real value and playback intact.

    Notehead type factor

    Options available for notehead type factor depends on staff type:

    • On Standard staffs (type 1a, type 1b), there are three levels:

      1. Level 1 Notehead scheme of a staff : Default is "Normal".

      2. Level 2 Notehead scheme of a note (option named "Notehead System" in Musescore 4.1.1):

        • The default option "Auto" means "ignore this level".

        • Other options: scheme to use on this note, overrides Level 1.

      3. Level 3 Notehead type property of a note. Affects notehead shape if and only if the result scheme of Level 1 and Level 2 is "Normal".

    • (type 2) do not use notes. To change selected fret number(s) into crosshead, click the cross item in the Noteheads . To enclose selected fret number(s) with brackets (parentheses, dead note or ghost note), use Shift+X. Only the first two items of Noteheads works on Tablatures.

    • On percussion staffs (type 3), instrument (like snare or hi-hat, not the "drumset" MuseScore Instrument) determines the notehead type factor. See chapter.

    Notehead scheme is used to determine notehead shape unless overridden by individual note's Notehead type property. When notehead scheme is not overridden, note pitch may affect notehead shape, depending on the scheme. "Normal" notehead scheme does not use pitch to determine notehead shape. When a note uses an overriding Notehead type property, note pitch information does not affect notehead shape at all.

    Changing notehead shape

    Notehead type factor

    • (Valid on standard staffs only) To change level 1 notehead scheme of a single staff, affecting all notes:

      1. Right click on an empty part of the desired staff and select Staff/Part properties.

      2. Click on the Advanced style properties button (opens Edit Staff Type window).

      3. Select an option in Notehead scheme dropdown.

    • (Valid on standard staffs only) To change level 2 notehead scheme of note(s):

      1. Select note(s) on a score.

      2. In the Properties panel, open Note: Head tab.

      3. select an option from the Notehead system dropdown (you may need to click "Show more" at the bottom of the panel to reveal it): the default "Auto" means "ignore this level".

    • (Valid on standard staffs only) To change level 3 notehead type property:

      1. Select note(s) on a score.

      2. Use one of the following:

        • In Properties panel, open Note: Head tab, select a

    • To change selected fret number(s) into crosshead, click the cross item in the Noteheads . To enclose selected fret number(s) with brackets (parentheses, dead note or ghost note), use Shift+X.

    • To change noteheads on percussion staffs, see chapter.

    Duration factor

    • To change note duration, see Entering notes and rests and Editing notes and rests.

    • To change the apparent duration without altering real value so that playback is not affected:

      1. Select note(s) on a score.

      2. In the Properties panel, open Note: Head tab.

      3. Select the desired option from the Override visual duration (you may need to click "Show more" at the bottom of the panel to reveal it): the default "Auto" means "no override"

    Adding pitch information to notes

    \ _shown above 7 Shape (Aikin), a "shape note notation"_

    There are six methods to change "pitch".

    Most of the time, a note's pitch only affects its staff space / vertical position, to change it:

    • Change note pitch, see Entering notes and rests and Editing notes and rests.

    • Modify the playback pitch of note(s) on score without altering notation: In Properties panel, click General: Playback , edit Tuning (cents). This is useful for reasons explained in Musescore 3 Handbook's Tuning systems, microtonal notation system, and playback. Does not work on instruments using Muse sounds (yet) on Musescore 4.1.1

    Tablatures, percussion staffs and some notehead scheme (see Overview) use notehead shape to convey pitch information:

    • [not working yet, upcoming fixed 4.3 https://github.com/musescore/MuseScore/issues/16500 ] The brackets (parentheses, dead note or ghost note) item in Noteheads palettes can be added to a note or accidental.

    • To change selected fret number(s) into crosshead, click the cross item in the Noteheads palettes. To enclose selected fret number(s) with brackets (parentheses, dead note or ghost note), use Shift+X.

    • To use custom notehead shape for visual pitch representation:

      1. as required for the staff.

      2. Use a level 2 overriding setting on selected note(s):

        1. Select note(s) on a score.

        2. In the Properties panel, open Note: Head tab.

    • To loosen the relationship between note vertical position and pitch so that all notes on a staff create desired playback, take advantage of .

    Changing notehead direction

    To move notehead(s) horizontally to the other side of stem, use one of the following:

    • Press Shift+X, or

    • In Properties panel, open Note: Head tab, select a Notehead direction (you may need to click "Show more" at the bottom of the panel to reveal it).\

    (Note: Contrast this command with X which moves the stem and beam horizontally and vertically to other side of the notehead)

    Notehead properties

    Selecting a note(s) on score, in the Properties panel Note: Head tab :

    • Notehead parentheses: Add or remove parentheses.

    • Notehead type: See overview and changing notehead shape.

    • Hide notehead: Makes notehead invisible, see Properties: visibility.

    • Small notehead

    • Duration dot position: This provides an alternative vertical offset for the duration dot.

    • Show more / Show less button

    • Notehead system: level 2 Notehead scheme, see . The default "Auto" means "ignore this level".

    • Override visual duration: change duration factor, see . "Auto" means "no override".

    • Note direction: See (above).

    • Notehead offset: This changes the offset of the notehead only (to change the offset of the complete note, use "Offset" in Properties: Appearance instead).

    Notehead style and font

    There are 8 font options (two new options compared to MuseScore 3) for notehead set in Format→Style→Score. Notehead does not use style profiles (Templates and styles). Noteheads palette is displayed with Bravura font.

    Sharing noteheads between voices

    When two notes in different voices coincide on the same beat, they can either share a single notehead, or else be offset to allow the display of both noteheads. This is done automatically by MuseScore according to certain rules (see below).

    To force two offset noteheads in different voices to share a single notehead, use one of the following methods:

    • Make the smaller-value notehead invisible. This works for the majority of cases.

    • Select the smaller value notehead and in the Note section of the Properties toolbar change "Head type (visual only)" to that of the higher value note.

    Rules for automatically sharing or offsetting noteheads:

    • Notes with stems in the same direction do not share noteheads.

    • Dotted notes do not share noteheads with undotted notes.

    • Black notes do not share noteheads with white notes.

    • Whole notes never share noteheads.

    Remove duplicate fretmarks in tablature

    If you are using paired standard and tablature staves you will come across situations where a shared notehead in the standard staff generates two fretmarks in tablature. In this case simply hide one of the fretmarks by making it invisible.

    See also

    • Entering and editing percussion notation

    External links

    • The Music Notation Project Wiki > Shape Note Notation

    • IMSLP.org Wiki > 4-shape notation

    • IMSLP.org Wiki > 7-shape notation

    Opening the Instruments panel image
    Opening the Instruments panel image
    exposing instrument settings image
    exposing instrument settings image
    Notehead type
    , or
  • Click on an item in the Noteheads palettes, or drag it onto a notehead in the score.

  • Select an "Normal" from the Notehead system dropdown (you may need to click "Show more" at the bottom of the panel to reveal it).

  • Assign level 3 notehead type property. Use either one of the following:

    • In Properties panel, open Note: Head tab, select a Notehead type, or

    • Click on an item in the Noteheads palettes, or drag it onto a notehead in the score.

  • These note(s) will be always use this item, regardless of any future pitch change by user unlike other notes on this staff.

  • Change duration factor as required.

  • Tablatures
    palettes
    palettes
    Entering and editing percussion notation: Notehead shape
    palettes
    Entering and editing percussion notation: Notehead shape
    Change level 1 setting
    'Transposing instruments' feature
    Overview
    Overview
    Changing notehead direction
    Different notehead shapes
    Note direction

    Dynamics and hairpins

    Overview

    All dynamics symbols are to be found in the Dynamics palette:

    The Dynamics palette

    This includes all the standard dynamics symbols (p, mf, ff, etc.) as well as gradual dynamic changes in the form of hairpins:

    and in the form of cresc. and dim. text lines, which function in the same way but are more suitable for longer spans:

    Unless stated otherwise, anything in this document that refers to hairpins also applies to cresc./dim. lines.

    Adding dynamics and hairpins

    From the palette

    To add a dynamics symbol to the score, either:

    • Select one or more notes, and then click an item in the Dynamics palette, or

    • Drag an item from the Dynamics palette onto a note.

    To add a hairpin to the score:

    1. Select the note(s) to which you wish to add a hairpin, by either

      1. selecting a single note; in this case, the hairpin will be drawn up to the next note, or

      2. selecting a range of notes or measures

    2. Add the hairpin by either

    You can also drag a hairpin from the palette directly onto a note, in which case it will extend to the end of the measure.

    The right-hand end of a hairpin is attached to the first note (or rest) after the range to which you apply it, though it will be drawn to end just before that note. Therefore, do not include the final note in the range that you select.

    From the dynamics popup

    You can also add a dynamic via the dynamics popup:

    1. Select a note

    2. Type Ctrl+D (Mac: Cmd+D) to open the dynamics popup

    3. Click on a dynamic in the popup, or type it directly (e.g. pp or mf, etc.) and then press Esc or click on a blank area of the score, whereupon the text, if valid, will convert to a dynamic symbol.

    You can access more dynamics in the popup by clicking the left and right arrows.

    With a dynamic selected, you can also create a hairpin directly from that dynamic by dragging the handle at the right of the dynamic out the note or anchor where you want it to end. When you let go, the dynamics popup will reappear, and you can select a new dynamic to go at the end of the hairpin. If that dynamic is of a lower level than the starting dynamic, the hairpin will switch from a crescendo to a decrescendo.

    This makes it very quick and efficient to enter chains of dynamics and hairpins.

    Replacing dynamics

    When a dynamic is selected, you can easily replace it with another dynamic by either clicking a different dynamic in the Dynamics palette or in the dynamics popup. The new dynamic will replace the selected one.

    Editing hairpins

    Adjusting hairpin height

    The handle at the bottom of the open end of a hairpin, here shown in gray as when selected, can be used to control its height:

    To do so:

    1. Select the hairpin

    2. Select the height handle

    3. Drag the handle up or down, or use the Up/Down arrow keys.

    You can also adjust height via the Properties panel: see .

    Drawing at an angle

    By default all hairpins are drawn level. To draw one at an angle, first ensure that the Allow diagonal box is checked in the Properties panel (in the Style tab). You will then be able to move the start and end handles of the hairpin independently on the vertical plane.

    Assigning dynamics to voices

    By default, dynamics are assigned to all voices on the instrument when they are entered. If you would prefer all dynamics to be assigned to the voice of the note to which they are applied, this is available as an option in Preferences -> Note input -> Voice assignment:

    Changing this preference will not affect the assignment of any existing dynamics.

    Regardless of this setting, you can assign a dynamic directly to a specific voice when you add it:

    1. Select a note or rest in the score

    2. Click on a dynamic in the Dynamics palette while holding Ctrl (Mac: Cmd)

    3. The dynamic will be assigned to the voice of the selected note or rest.

    (Currently this does not work when dragging dynamics from the palette, or when using the dynamics popup. In these cases, dynamics will be assigned to all voices.)

    You can change the voice assignment of an existing dynamic in multiple ways. Firstly, by selecting the dynamic and clicking one of the buttons in Properties -> Voice assignment:

    For instruments with multiple staves, clicking the the All button will open a menu with distinct options for

    • All voices on this instrument (all voices on all staves of the instrument)

    • All voices on this staff only (all voices on the staff to which the dynamic is attached)

    You can also either:

    • Click one of the voice buttons in the top toolbar to assign to voices 1–4 (you cannot select All via this method), or

    • Use the keyboard shortcuts:

      • For voice 1–4: Ctrl+Alt+1–4 (Mac: Cmd+Opt+1

    For instruments with multiple staves, this last shortcut will apply the All voices on instrument option. For All voices on this staff only, use Ctrl+Alt+- (Mac: Cmd+Opt+-.

    In playback, a dynamic affects its assigned voice(s) from the point at which it appears until another dynamic in the same voice, or a dynamic that affects all voices, is reached.

    See the to learn how the voice assignment feature works with different sound technologies.

    Positioning dynamics and hairpins

    There are three options available in Format → Style → Dynamics & hairpins → Default positions of dynamics and hairpins which control general dynamics positioning:

    • Position determines whether dynamics should be positioned according to their ('Based on voice', the default), or should all go 'Above' or 'Below'

    • Place above the staff on vocal instruments specifies whether dynamics should go above the staff on vocal staves (on by default)

    • Center on grand staff instruments automatically will center dynamics vertically between the staves of multi-stave instruments automatically (on by default).

    Voice-based positioning

    If the Based on voice position is chosen, will affect the default position of dynamics as follows:

    • Voice 1 dynamics go below the staff if there is only one voice at that rhythmic position, and otherwise go above

    • Voice 3 dynamics go above the staff

    • Voice 2 and 4 dynamics go below the staff

    • Dynamics assigned all voices go below the staff

    The position of any dynamic can be explicitly overridden via Properties → Position.

    If Place above the staff on vocal instruments is turned on then, on vocal staves, dynamics assigned to voice 1 will go above the staff, as will dynamics assigned to all voices on the staff. Voice 2 and 4 dynamics will still go below.

    Centering dynamics between staves

    Dynamics on grand staff instruments (e.g. keyboards, keyboard percussion, harp) can be centered vertically between the staves.

    If the Center on grand staff staves automatically option is turned on,

    By default, dynamics are automatically centered (i.e. when when:

    • There is a staff on the same instrument above or below the dynamic (according to its position relative to the staff to which it is attached) against which it can be centered

    • Properties -> Voice assignment is set to All voices on instrument

    • Properties -> Center between staves is set to Auto

    • In Format -> Style -> Dynamics & hairpins

    You can also manually center dynamics by setting Center between staves to On and configuring Position based on whether the staff to which you want to center is above or below.

    Avoiding barlines

    Dynamics are centered under the note or rest to which they are attached. In the case of longer dynamics such as ppp this can easily mean that they would collide with a barline that precedes or follows them, when there is a barline connecting to the staff below. By default, dynamics items will be offset to the left or right to avoid these collisions. This behaviour can be turned off globally (Format -> Style -> Dynamics & hairpins -> Avoid barlines), or for a specific item via the Properties panel.

    The second image shows the result if this option is turned off, but text masking is turned on (Format -> Style -> Barlines -> Mark barlines with intersecting text). If this option were also turned off, the barlines would be drawn over the top of the dynamics.

    If the dynamic has additional text typed before or after it, this is also included in the barline avoidance. See for details.

    Moving dynamics and hairpins

    Dynamics, and the endpoints of hairpins, do not have to be attached only to notes or rests, but can be moved to rhythmic positions within longer durations. See and also .

    If a dynamic has a hairpin snapped to it on either side or both, the endpoints of these hairpins will follow the dynamic as it is moved around. See .

    Snapping and alignment

    If a piece of Expression text is at the same position as a dynamic, and has the same voice assignment and the same position setting (above/below), the two items will snap together, with the expression positioned after the dynamic. If either item is moved, the other will follow.

    To decouple a piece of Expression text from a dynamic:

    1. Select the text

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Under Expression, uncheck Align with preceding dynamic.

    You can then move the items independently of each other.

    If you want to disable this snapping behaviour entirely, uncheck Format -> Style -> Expression text -> Snap to dynamics.

    If a hairpin starts and/or ends at the same position as a dynamic, and has the same voice assignment and the same position setting (above/below), the hairpin will automatically vertically align with the dynamic(s) at either end.

    To disable this behaviour for a specific hairpin:

    1. Select the hairpin

    2. Go to the Properties panel

    3. Under Expression, in the Position tab, uncheck Snap to previous (to disable alignment with any dynamic at the beginning of the hairpin) and/or Snap to next (to disable alignment with any dynamic at the end).

    Flipping the position of a snapped or aligned item to the other side of the staff, or changing the voice assignment of either item, will automatically stop it from snapping or aligning.

    Combining dynamics and text

    There are two ways to combine dynamics and text together, and there are subtle but important differences between them.

    Dynamics and expression text

    Where a dynamic is followed by an expressive marking, for example p dolce or f espress., it is best to input the dynamic and the expression text as separate items. The two will automatically snap together (see ).

    The quickest way to add expression text to a dynamic in this way is:

    1. Enter a dynamic into the score via any method (the dynamic will be selected once it is entered)

    2. Click the expression item in the Text palette, which adds a piece of expression text after the dynamic

    3. Edit the expression text as necessary (assuming the text is selected, which it will be after it is entered, simply press Enter to go into editing mode).

    You can also input them the other way round (expression, then dynamic), though the expression will still be placed after the dynamic.

    The cresc./dim. text lines can be added to a dynamic in exactly the same way, and will snap to the dynamic, as will hairpins.

    Text as part of a dynamics item

    If the text is part of a dynamic phrase, for example più p or f sub., it is usually best to type these directly into the dynamic, so that it is treated as a single item. This is also the only way to put text before the dynamics symbol, as expression items are always placed after the dynamic when snapped.

    1. Double click the dynamic, or select it and press Enter, to go into editing mode

    2. Use the cursor keys to move to the start or end of the item (if necessary)

    3. Type in the text.

    Any text typed into a Dynamic item is styled as Expression text, and is scaled independently of the dynamics symbols.

    When Avoid barlines is turned on, this applies to the entirety of a dynamics item, including any text which is typed into the item itself. It does not apply to any expression item that may be snapped to the barline. Consider the difference between these two examples:

    In the former case, the barline avoidance pushes the text to the left and the dynamic appears as though it applies earlier than intended. This is one reason why it is often preferable to use separate expression text rather than adding text after a dynamic directly.

    When a dynamics item includes text, you can also choose whether the dynamic should remain centered under the note with the text extending out to the left and/or right (this is the default), or whether the whole item should be centered. These options are available in the Properties panel, in the Dynamics section under Show more:

    The icons illustrate the difference between the two options. This has no effect when a dynamic has an piece of expression text attached to it.

    Properties

    Individual dynamics and hairpins can be edited via the . To edit the score-wide settings, see .

    Dynamics properties

    For dynamics, the following options are available:

    • Scale: the size of the dynamics symbol, as a percentage relative to default

    • Avoid barlines: whether dynamics should automatically be offset left or right to avoid collisions with barlines (see )

    • Voice assignment: to which voice the selected dynamic is assigned; this can affect both its position and also ; the default is All (see )

    Under Show more:

    • Alignment with notehead: how to align a dynamics item which has additional text in it; see for details

    • Border: allows you to draw a square or round border around the item. The usual additional border settings will appear if either is chosen.

    If the dynamics item has additional text typed into it, there will also be a Text heading which contains the usual text properties (font, style, size, etc.) These settings will only affect the text, not any dynamics symbols.

    Hairpin properties

    For hairpins, the following options are available:

    Position

    • Voice assignment: to which voice the selected dynamic is assigned; this can affect both its position and also ; the default is All (see , below)

    • Position: whether the dynamic should be positioned above or below the staff; the default, Auto, means that the position will be determined by voice assignment

    • Alignment with adjacent dynamics

    Style

    These options are available for hairpins specifically. For cresc./dim. lines the options are instead the same as for other text lines: see .

    • Niente circle: draws a small circle at the point of the hairpin to indicate niente (coming from or going to nothing)

    • Allow diagonal: allow the hairpin to be angled (see )

    • Thickness: the thickness of the line

    • Height: the height of the open end of the hairpin (see

    Text

    These settings are the same as for text lines: see .

    Style

    See the main chapter

    Format -> Style -> Dynamics & hairpins contains options for the default positioning, spacing, and appearance of dynamics and hairpins.

    You can edit the expression text style (which affects Expression text items and also any normal text typed into Dynamics items) in Format → Style → Text styles → Expression.

    Default positions of dynamics and hairpins

    See .

    Dynamics

    • Override score font: dynamics are usually taken from the music font (as specified in Format -> Style -> Score -> Musical symbols font). If you want to use a different font for dynamics only, check this box, and then select your desired font from the Font dropdown

    • Avoid barlines: whether all dynamics should be offset to avoid barlines by default (see )

    • Scale: the size of dynamics symbols, as a percentage relative to default

    Though dynamics look like text, and are frequently used alongside text, they are better considered as musical symbols like any other (clefs, noteheads, etc) and in any given music font are designed at a certain size appropriate to the other symbols in the font. This is why the Scale setting is not expressed in points, but as a percentage, where 100% represents 'the size at which they are designed'.

    Hairpins

    • Offset above/below: the default vertical position of hairpins above and below the staff

    • Height: the default height of the open end of hairpins

    • Continue height: the default height of the opening of hairpins at the start of a new system, when they cross a system break

    • Autoplace, distance to dynamics: the distance between the end of a hairpin and a dynamic

    Dynamics playback compatibility

    Support for voice-specific dynamics varies depending on the sound technology chosen (e.g. SoundFont, VST, or Muse Sounds) and whether the instrument is a single-note-dynamic instrument (i.e. an instrument capable of changing its dynamic on a single note, such as the violin or flute) or a non-single-note-dynamic instrument (e.g. the piano or percussion instruments, where the instrument's dynamic properties begin to recede after a note's initial attack).

    In the below table, single-note-dynamic instruments are referred to as SND instruments, while non-single-note-dynamic instruments are referred to as non-SND instruments.

    Sound technnology
    Support for individual voices/staves

    clicking a hairpin in the Dynamics palette, or

  • using the keyboard shortcuts < to add a crescendo hairpin, or > to enter a diminuendo hairpin.

  • –
    4
    )
  • For All: Ctrl+Alt+0 (Mac: Cmd+Opt+0)

  • , the
    Center on grand staff instruments automatically
    option is on
  • No manual Y-offset has been applied to the dynamic.

  • Position: whether the dynamic should be positioned above or below the staff; the default, Auto, means that the position will be determined by voice assignment
  • Center between staves: on instruments with more than one staff, whether the center the dynamic between the staff to which it is attached and the next staff; the default, Auto, means that this will be determined by voice assignment (if the voice is set to anything other than All voices on instrument, the dynamic will not be centered)

  • Snap to previous: if this is checked, then if there is a dynamic at the start of the hairpin, with the same voice assignment, the hairpin will be drawn starting just after the dynamic (and any expression text that is snapped to it), and vertically aligned with it

  • Snap to next: if this is checked, then if there is a dynamic at the end of the hairpin, with the same voice assignment, the hairpin will be drawn ending just before the dynamic, and vertically aligned with it.

  • )
  • Height (new system): the height of the opening of the hairpin at the start of a new system, when it crosses a system break.

  • Offset above/below: the default vertical position of dynamics above and below the staff

  • Autoplace min. distance: the minimum distance between a dynamic and the staff, or an item between it and the staff.

  • Line thickness: the default line thickness.

  • Muse Sounds

    Full support for per-voice and per-stave dynamics.

    SoundFont (MS Basic)

    Both SND and non-SND instruments will support dynamics on individual voices. Only non-SND instruments will support dynamics on individual staves.

    VST

    Only non-SND instruments support per-voice and per-staff dynamics.

    Hairpin properties
    Dynamics playback compatibility
    voice assignment
    voice assignment
    Text as part of a dynamics item
    Anchors
    Changing the range of a line
    Snapping and alignment
    Snapping and alignment
    Properties panel
    Style
    Avoiding barlines
    playback
    Assigning dynamics to voices
    Text as part of a dynamics item
    playback
    Assigning dynamics to voices
    Line properties
    Drawing at an angle
    Line properties
    Templates and styles
    Positioning dynamics and hairpins
    Avoiding barlines
    Crescendo and diminuendo lines
    The dynamics popup
    Hairpin height adjustement
    Voice assignment options for single-staff instruments
    Voice assignment options for multi-staff instruments
    Dynamics & hairpins default positioning
    Avoid barlines on
    Avoid barlines off
    Dynamic with text typed after it
    Dynamic with separate expression item
    Dynamics palette
    Hairpins
    Adjusting hairpin height

    Default keyboard shortcuts

    On macOS, make the following substitutions:

    • Replace Ctrl with Cmd (or ⌘)

    • Replace Alt with Option (or ⌥)

    • Replace Home with Fn+Left

    • Replace End with Fn+Right

    • Replace PgUp with Fn+Up

    • Replace PgDn with Fn+Down

    • Add Fn with function keys

    Navigation

    Page navigation

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Score navigation

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Note input

    General

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Duration

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Pitch

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Tablature

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Selecting

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Editing

    General

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Duration

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Pitch

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Notation

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Manual adjustment

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Text

    General

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Formatting

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Lyrics

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Chord symbols, Roman numeral analysis, Nashville numbers, figured bass

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Other score elements

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Score setup and formatting

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    File Operations

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    User interface

    Playback

    Action
    Windows/Linux
    macOS

    Go to last element in score

    Ctrl+End

    Cmd+Fn+Right

    Jump to next screen

    PgDn

    Fn+Down

    Jump to previous screen

    PgUp

    Fn+Up

    Jump to top of first page

    Home

    Fn+Left

    Jump to bottom of last page

    End

    Fn+Right

    Jump to next page

    Ctrl+PgDn

    Cmd+Fn+Down

    Jump to previous page

    Ctrl+PgUp

    Cmd+Fn+Up

    Find / Go to

    Ctrl+F

    Cmd+F

    Select next element in score

    Alt+Right

    Option+Right

    Select previous element in score

    Alt+Left

    Option+Left

    Select note/rest above

    Alt+Up

    Option+Up

    Select note/rest below

    Alt+Down

    Option+Down

    Set duration: quarter note

    5

    5

    Set duration: half note

    6

    6

    Set duration: whole note

    7

    7

    Toggle duration dot

    .

    .

    Enter tuplet

    Ctrl+2 – Ctrl+9

    Cmd+2 – Cmd+9

    Enter tuplet: duplet

    Ctrl+2

    Cmd+2

    Enter tuplet: triplet

    Ctrl+3

    Cmd+3

    Enter tuplet: quadruplet

    Ctrl+4

    Cmd+4

    Add tied note

    T

    T

    Halve selected duration (includes dotted values)

    Shift+Q

    Shift+Q

    Double select duration (includes dotted values)

    Shift+W

    Shift+W

    Toggle accidental: natural

    =

    =

    Toggle accidental: sharp

    +

    +

    Enter rest

    0

    0

    Add grace note: acciaccatura

    /

    /

    Set duration: quarter note (TAB)

    Shift+5

    Shift+5

    Set duration: half note (TAB)

    Shift+6

    Shift+6

    Set duration: whole note (TAB)

    Shift+7

    Shift+7

    Enter TAB: fret

    0 – 9

    0 – 9

    Enter TAB: fret

    A – K

    A – K

    Go to string above (TAB)

    Up

    Up

    Go to string below (TAB)

    Down

    Down

    Toggle ghost note

    Shift+X

    Shift+X

    Add to selection: staff below

    Shift+Down

    Shift+Down

    Select to beginning of measure

    Ctrl+Shift+Left

    Cmd+Shift+Left

    Select to end of measure

    Ctrl+Shift+Right

    Cmd+Shift+Right

    Select to beginning of score

    Ctrl+Shift+Home

    Cmd+Shift+Fn+Left

    Select to end of score

    Ctrl+Shift+End

    Cmd+Shift+Fn+Right

    Cut

    Ctrl+X

    Cmd+X

    Paste

    Ctrl+V

    Cmd+V

    Repeat selection

    R

    R

    Insert one measure before selection

    Ins

    Ins

    Insert measures before selection

    Ctrl+Ins

    Cmd+Ins

    Insert one measure at end of score

    Ctrl+B

    Cmd+B

    Insert measures at end of score

    Alt+Shift+B

    Option+Shift+B

    Delete

    Del

    Del

    Delete selected measures

    Ctrl+Del

    Cmd+Del

    Show/hide properties

    F8

    Fn+F8

    Edit element

    F2

    Fn+F2

    Move pitch/selection down

    Down

    Down

    Move pitch up an octave

    Ctrl+Up

    Cmd+Up

    Move pitch down an octave

    Ctrl+Down

    Cmd+Down

    Change enharmonic spelling (concert and written pitch)

    J

    J

    Move note to higher string (TAB)

    Ctrl+Up

    Cmd+Up

    Move note to lower string (TAB)

    Ctrl+Down

    Cmd+Down

    Move selection up

    Up

    Up

    Move selection down

    Down

    Down

    Move selection up quickly

    Ctrl+Up

    Cmd+Up

    Move selection down quickly

    Ctrl+Down

    Cmd+Down

    Add text: rehearsal mark

    Ctrl+M

    Cmd+M

    Lyrics: enter melisma

    _

    _

    Add lyric verse

    Return

    Return

    Go to next lyric verse

    Down

    Down

    Go to previous lyric verse

    Up

    Up

    Advance cursor: previous beat

    Shift+;

    Shift+;

    Advance cursor: duration

    Ctrl+1 – Ctrl+9

    Cmd+1 – Cmd+9

    Add articulation: marcato

    Shift+O

    Shift+O

    Add articulation: staccato

    Shift+S

    Shift+S

    Add articulation: tenuto

    Shift+N

    Shift+N

    Add hairpin: crescendo

    <

    <

    Add hairpin: decrescendo

    >

    >

    Increase layout stretch

    }

    }

    Add/remove system break

    Return

    Return

    Add/remove page break

    Ctrl+Return

    Cmd+Return

    Reset shapes and positions

    Ctrl+R

    Cmd+R

    Print

    Ctrl+P

    Cmd+P

    Quit

    Ctrl+Q

    Cmd+Q

    Zoom in

    Ctrl+=

    Cmd+=

    Zoom out

    Ctrl+-

    Cmd+-

    Zoom to 100%

    Ctrl+0

    Cmd+0

    Go to first element in score

    Ctrl+Home

    Cmd+Fn+Left

    Select next chord

    Right

    Right

    Select previous chord

    Left

    Left

    Go to next measure

    Ctrl+Right

    Cmd+Right

    Go to previous measure

    Ctrl+Left

    Cmd+Left

    Note input: toggle note input mode

    N

    N

    Show/hide piano keyboard

    P

    P

    Use voice 1

    Ctrl+Alt+1

    Cmd+Option+1

    Use voice 2

    Ctrl+Alt+2

    Cmd+Option+2

    Set duration

    1 – 9

    1 – 9

    Set duration: 32nd note

    2

    2

    Set duration: 16th note

    3

    3

    Set duration: 8th note

    4

    4

    Enter note

    A – G

    A – G

    Add note to chord

    Shift+A – Shift+G

    Shift+A – Shift+G

    Enter interval

    Alt+1 – Alt+9

    Option+1 – Option+9

    Toggle accidental: flat

    -

    -

    Set duration (TAB)

    Shift+0 – Shift+9

    Shift+0 – Shift+9

    Set duration: 32nd note (TAB)

    Shift+2

    Shift+2

    Set duration: 16th note (TAB)

    Shift+3

    Shift+3

    Set duration: 8th note (TAB)

    Shift+4

    Shift+4

    Select all

    Ctrl+A

    Cmd+A

    Add to selection: previous note/rest

    Shift+Left

    Shift+Left

    Add to selection: next note/rest

    Shift+Right

    Shift+Right

    Add to selection: staff above

    Shift+Up

    Shift+Up

    Escape

    Esc

    Esc

    Undo

    Ctrl+Z

    Cmd+Z

    Redo

    Ctrl+Shift+Z

    Cmd+Shift+Z

    Copy

    Ctrl+C

    Cmd+C

    Set duration

    1 – 9

    1 – 9

    Enter tuplet

    Ctrl+2 – Ctrl+9

    Cmd+2 – Cmd+9

    Add tied note

    T

    T

    Toggle accidental: flat

    -

    -

    Toggle accidental: natural

    =

    =

    Toggle accidental: sharp

    +

    +

    Move pitch/selection up

    Up

    Up

    Flip direction

    X

    X

    Use voice 1

    Ctrl+Alt+1

    Cmd+Option+1

    Use voice 2

    Ctrl+Alt+2

    Cmd+Option+2

    Move text left

    Left

    Left

    Move text right

    Right

    Right

    Move text left quickly

    Ctrl+Left

    Cmd+Left

    Move text right quickly

    Ctrl+Right

    Cmd+Right

    Add text: staff text

    Ctrl+T

    Cmd+T

    Add text: expression text

    Ctrl+E

    Cmd+E

    Add text: system text

    Ctrl+Shift+T

    Cmd+Shift+T

    Add text: tempo marking

    Alt+Shift+T

    Option+Shift+T

    Format text: bold face

    Ctrl+B

    Cmd+B

    Format text: italic

    Ctrl+I

    Cmd+I

    Format text: underline

    Ctrl+U

    Cmd+U

    Add text: lyrics

    Ctrl+L

    Cmd+L

    Go to next syllable

    Space

    Space

    Go to previous syllable

    Shift+Space

    Shift+Space

    Lyrics: enter hyphen

    -

    -

    Add text: chord symbol

    Ctrl+K

    Cmd+K

    Next text element

    Space

    Space

    Previous text element

    Shift+Space

    Shift+Space

    Advance cursor: next beat

    ;

    ;

    Show/hide palettes

    F9

    Fn+F9

    Search palettes

    Ctrl+F9

    Cmd+Fn+F9

    Add slur

    S

    S

    Add articulation: accent

    Shift+V

    Shift+V

    Add/remove instruments

    I

    I

    Open Layout panel

    F7

    Fn+F7

    Toggle visibility of elements

    V

    V

    Decrease layout stretch

    {

    {

    New

    Ctrl+N

    Cmd+N

    Open

    Ctrl+O

    Cmd+O

    Close

    Ctrl+W

    Cmd+W

    Save

    Ctrl+S

    Cmd+S

    Play

    Space

    Space

    Show/hide mixer

    F10

    Fn+F10

    Seven-shape system (Aikin)